Skip to main content

Ask for Help and Improve Your Teaching

During my first five years of teaching, I could have benefitted from some real help. Unfortunately, I was petrified to have my high school and college band directors come out to watch my rehearsals.

My former teachers were incredibly kind and willing to help me, and they told me they would come out at a moment’s notice. But I just never felt like I had things in good enough shape for them. In hindsight, I wish I had just asked them come to my school. I don’t regret working hard on my own, but I could have saved so much time and improved more quickly if only I had set aside my fear and ego and asked for help.

The key takeaway is: You are not alone, and you don’t have to do this yourself. With a bit of initiative, you can find ways to directly improve your teaching and expand your networks outside of your once- or twice-a-year professional development conferences. The following suggestions are real situations where I forced myself to go beyond my comfort zone to grow personally and professionally.

Don’t Wait for an Invitation

The music teaching field is remarkably helpful, but it’s also hectic. If you wait for an invitation to observe or help out another program, you’ll be waiting a long time. Instead, take the lead and just reach out.

four friends get together unsplashAt the beginning of my career, I contacted a few well-known directors and asked if I could observe an evening rehearsal. The response was almost always a “yes” or a “yes, but would another time of year work?” Bring a notebook, jot down some thoughts and just take it all in. The next day, try something new in your classroom that you observed the night before. It might work or it might not — but it’s another tool in your bag.

Observing other teachers also expands your network. I’ve made countless friends and connections by observing programs and taking the teacher out for coffee afterward to talk. These can also be social events. I’ve scheduled time with three or four friends to watch another colleague’s rehearsal. This allowed for some much-needed social time with discussion revolving around what we just saw and what we could implement into our own classrooms.

* Please note: many schools are more cautious due to COVID and other safety issues. Make sure to go through proper channels to visit other programs or invite visitors to your school.

Take Control of Your Own Evaluation

In my more than 15 years of teaching, I’ve only been evaluated by an actual music teacher twice. Both times were extremely helpful. The other evaluations were completed by math, English and PE teachers. I certainly received some valuable information from these evaluations, but I missed out on some of the nuances that veteran music teachers can provide. If you are lucky enough to have an evaluator who is well-versed in music, take advantage of the situation and really absorb all their comments and advice. But if you’re in the same boat as me, consider scheduling an additional unofficial evaluation for yourself.

I have invited clinicians to my school to work with my group, but I never had someone come out to really dig into my teaching and conducting. I immediately thought of two music teachers who I would be most fearful of watching me teach — my high school band director, Mr. Ted Lega, and one of my mentors, Mr. Mike Fiske. After pacing around the room for a bit, I gave them a call. They agreed to come out the following week.

After many sleepless nights, the day came. I taught, and they watched without interruption. After the rehearsal, we had some time to sit down. I let go of my fear and ego and just listened. This turned out to be a transformative experience for me. I received so much practical advice, reinforcement of what was working, and suggestions for what needed to be changed to push myself forward. Some advice was simple, such as alternative approaches to setting up the band so certain sections could hear each other. Other suggestions were more significant. I had a lot of work to do with the tone of the group. They also suggested that we work toward an articulation that the entire group could agree on. It didn’t have to be the perfect articulation, but rather, consistent.

contemplate unsplashFigure Out What You Need First

I knew that I needed significant help during my first few years of teaching, but I wasn’t sure about which specific areas. My goal was to have my group sound better — something we all want.

I had to do a little digging and self-reflection before asking for help. I eventually determined that I had some issues with teaching proper techniques for tone, intonation and articulation. I wrote down the different things I had tried and reflected on why they did or did not work so far. Then, I reached out to some colleagues and provided them with this information. This helped them tailor their advice to my specific needs so they could provide some practical advice on what could be added, tweaked or deleted from my approach. Furthermore, I hoped that this showed that I was willing to put in the effort and that their advice wouldn’t be wasted on me.

Try It for 30 Days

You have a couple of options once you receive advice from a friend, colleague or mentor. The first is to simply ignore it. The second is to try it out. After all, if you want different results, you have to do something different. Sometimes new methods, techniques and thought patterns take some time to work.

I will never forget a time in high school band when we sight-read a piece and it sounded pretty awful. One student said, “I don’t like this piece.” Without missing a beat, my band director, Mr. Lega, said, “Well, no one likes it the way we just played it.” We all laughed. A few weeks later, the piece turned out to be one of our favorites. It just took some time, discipline and consistency.

month calendar pexelsMy general rule for a new technique or approach is to try it for 30 days. Sometimes, I record our first day trying out the new suggestion out, and then compare it to how the band sounds 30 days later. If I followed the technique correctly, and the group sounds better, we kept it.

If not, we evaluate why it didn’t work. We either change something and try again or we move on to something else. I know that 30 days can be a long time to stick with something initially. I often get bored and want to abandon something new by day 15, but I work with my students on this, and we keep each other accountable. We understand that boredom and monotony can be a valuable part of the process.

The hardest thing to give up is our emotional attachment to warm-up exercises or rehearsal techniques that we grew up with. As a student, my band warm-ups were always an F Remington, scales and Mayhew Lake’s Bach chorale number 12. It took some rewiring of my brain to conclude that although these pieces felt good to me because they were familiar, it was not the only solution for my kids and my current teaching.

I teach at Joliet Central High School, the school I attended as a teenager, but the area has changed significantly. We now have band students from nearly 10 different sender schools in six districts and this doesn’t count the students who move in from other cities or states. I had to find and develop techniques and methods for the kids in front of me, not the bandmates I sat next to in the 1990s and 2000s.

Consider Multiple Mentors for Multiple Areas

Mentors are not one-size-fits-all. In fact, I have found it incredibly useful to have multiple mentors.

man two women pexelsMy mentors are great overall, but some excel in specific areas. When I have a marching band question, I contact a particular person. When I have a question concerning a situation specific to my school, I reach out to a friend who also works in a low-income/underserved school. I have another friend who doesn’t even work in music but who has been incredibly helpful with financial advice.

Thinking about changing jobs? Contact someone who has worked in a few different places. Maybe you have a work-life balance question. A colleague you know may have some helpful feedback in this area. Do you want to commission a piece for your ensemble but don’t know where to start? Take a look at some state and national convention programs and see who is premiering some commissioned pieces. Then, just email or call them with your questions.

Be careful about getting too many opinions about one area. I had questions in the past about some pretty big life decisions (or what I thought were big life decisions at the time…), and I contacted nearly everyone I knew. I wanted one answer, but I ended up getting more confused with feedback overload.

Ultimately, decisions regarding career choices, changing schools, family, etc., are up to you. Mentors, colleagues and friends can undoubtedly serve as a sounding board, but be careful of getting too much information, leading to paralysis by analysis.

Build Your Network

You are the one who has to do the work. However, you don’t live alone on an island. Ask for help because you don’t get more credit for figuring it out on your own. Expand your circle, seek specific feedback and implement advice from colleagues and mentors — you’ll find that with help, you can improve quicker than if you did this alone.

A Primer on Video Game Subscription and Streaming Services

The internet is a major part of our day-to-day lives, yet existence with the vast digital realm continues to be much like living in the Wild West. New options, new spaces, new ideas and new services seem to pop up on an almost daily basis. From the early days of email to the modern era of high-speed streaming, the internet is always evolving.

One of the most recent trends is the availability of video game subscription and streaming services. These give gamers the opportunity to access dozens (or even hundreds) of titles at any given time … usually for a fee. The games are streamed in real time, but some platforms also offer players the ability to download titles to their devices and continue to access them as long as they continue to subscribe. With a streaming service, one can theoretically play any game on any compatible device at any time — much like watching a TV show on Netflix® whenever you like via your phone, tablet or television.

We covered the pros and cons of discs versus game downloads in a previous posting, but there is much more to consider when discussing subscription and streaming services. In this article, we’ll describe the main features offered by several prime options. First, however, let’s start with some background.

THE EMERGENCE OF GAME STREAMING SERVICES

The first major video game streaming service was Google Stadia™, which was released in November of 2019. It offered gamers the chance to play anywhere via any device, dictated by Google’s servers. Ultimately, though, the venture failed to make the impact the company hoped, and was abandoned in January of 2023.

To date, no company has quite conquered the world of video game subscription and streaming services. Gamers, though, remain confident that one or more companies will eventually emerge as the leaders in the field, much like the most popular television and movie streaming services we have today. For now, though, internet speeds and limited controller compatibility are the main limiting factors. That said, let’s take a closer look at the main players in this arena.

Xbox™ Game Pass

This affordable service (packages start at just $10 a month) boasts a large library, which even includes titles from outside publishers. Subscribers can download both new and older games onto their Xbox One’s storage device, which means that, once the game is downloaded, even compromised internet speed is no longer a hindrance to gameplay. New games are made available immediately and the service is compatible with both Xbox consoles and personal computers. Soon, experts say, Game Pass users will be able to access and play these games seamlessly on cell phones and other devices as well.

Sony™ PlayStation® Now

In mid-2022, the standalone PlayStation Now subscription was shut down, but its services were incorporated into the PlayStation Plus Premium tier. Like Xbox Game Pass, this subscription service originally cost about $10 monthly and offered many legacy games that players already had familiarity with due to Sony’s decades in the market. Subscribers could opt to stream or purchase games that were compatible with PlayStation 4 (or higher) consoles and PCs. As with Game Pass, gamers could download titles onto their system, so they didn’t have to rely on internet speeds for results.

Amazon Luna

The retail giant’s hat was officially thrown in the ring in late 2020. This streaming service offers a limited nunmber of titles, though some of them are new. It’s free for Amazon prime subscribers and $9.99 a month for non-subscribers. While Luna has yet to gain much traction with gamers, that’s not to say Amazon won’t corner the market at some point in time.

Apple® Arcade

So many of us have Apple devices in our pockets. That’s why it was a no-brainer for Apple to create a service for gamers that’s compatible with those mobile devices. With over a hundred titles from well-known publishers, this is an easy-to-use and popular (almost by default) option that allows users to play games easily on their iPhones® and iPads®.  The service is free to try for the first month and $6.99 per month or $49.99 per year with the annual plan after that. In addition, with Family Sharing, you can share your subscription with up to five family members. You can also get three months of Apple Arcade free when you buy an Apple device

NVIDIA GeForce Now

Unlike other services that have their own library, this one is BYOG: bring your own game. It’s not a content service; instead, users must purchase games through a digital store like Steam or Uplay. The catch is the super-high-speed internet connection required for gameplay. But GeForce’s cloud-based processors allow gamers to run the title on any device, no matter their specs (old computers welcome!) — and in addition to ad-free subscriptions that start at $9.99 a month, there’s also a free option, albeit with ads.

AntStream Arcade

Known for its retro gaming, this free streaming service is perfect for those players who never left the 1980s and its cherished arcades. Antstream offers a giant library of more than a thousand titles that can be played on your computer or on a smart TV equipped with an Amazon Fire Stick, NVIDIA Shield or Atari VCS™, as well as on the go via an Android™ mobile or tablet device. So take a walk down memory lane while you fight 8-bit ghosts and goblins!

Nintendo Switch Online

Here’s another streaming service that offers a nostalgic library. While it may not be as vast as some Nintendo fans may want, it only costs as little as $19.99 per year  (an “expansion pack” premium service is available for a still-affordable $ 49.99 a year). The service is compatible with the popular Nintendo mobile gaming system, the Nintendo® Switch™, which is a plus for many.

Humble Choice

This strictly PC-compatible subscription service is a favorite amongst gamers-in-the-know. This outfit is adept at finding and offering its users diamonds in the rough — those lesser-known, smaller games that sometimes end up as favorites — as well as bundles of games, books and software. It’s a tastemaker service as much as anything else, and socially responsible too: 5% of the $11.99 per month subscription fee goes to charity.

Netflix Games

Launched in November 2021, this could be the one everyone’s been hoping for — the service that puts all of the best aspects of the others into one perfect model. For one thing, gamers simply need a Netflix subscription to get started. For another, the titles are mobile-friendly (compatible with both iOS and Android devices) and are offered in many languages, defaulting to the user’s Netflix settings. Some require internet connection and others do not, but they are all child-safe (i.e., they’re not available on kids’ profiles unless you enter an overriding PIN). What the future holds for game streaming could well be wrapped up in Netflix … stay tuned to this space!

Respect: Honoring the Great Woman Songwriters of Our Time

Carole. Aretha. Dolly. Stevie. Joni. Carly. Ellie. Chrissie. Cynthia. Laura. Karla.

These women songwriters, with their stellar bodies of work, made unforgettable names for themselves. So much so that we’re actually able to identify them on a first name basis.

OK, with a few exceptions, perhaps. “Cynthia who?” you may be wondering. That would be Cynthia Weil, who wrote one of the most performed pop songs in history, “You’ve Lost That Loving Feeling,” with her life partner Barry Mann. You might not know her name but you know her songs. To me, she is royalty. As is “Karla” (Karla Bonoff, who penned a number of my favorite Linda Ronstadt songs) and “Laura”: Laura Nyro (“Save The Country,” “Eli’s Coming”).

If you happened to be around in the ’60s and ’70s when these gals stormed onto your favorite radio station and claimed their rightful territory, they most likely influenced the trajectory of your life and how you would come to regard things like unconditional love, jealousy, ego, motherhood, joy, heartbreak, make-ups, breakups, the passage of time, yellow taxis, working 9-to-5 and landslides. (And even if you weren’t there, you probably still feel their influence today.)

I know that they opened my eyes wider. They filled me with a sense that there’s something deeper than skin that we need to examine within ourselves.

I learned from them through their songs. For instance:

Carole (King) impressed upon me how necessary it would be to find a partner with whom I didn’t have to put on pretense because “natural” is the best way to feel with someone. That message, especially when belted out by Aretha (Franklin), was quite compelling.

And speaking of Aretha … she got me telling the people I love to call me the moment they get to wherever they’re going. We sleep better knowing they’re safe.

In words and melody, Dolly (Parton) painted a picture of how a girl might drop her defenses when her crush simply smiles that smile. That’s all it takes sometimes. And Dolly broke it down in a simple universal fact. Thanks, Dolly. I will always love you!

And let’s not forget Stevie (Nicks), who, in one of her many prescient moments, touched on the idea that even when we think we’re older we’ll look back one day and realize we were young. But time has a way of making us brave. It’s true. Thank you, Stevie, for your clarity and brutal honesty.

Joni (Mitchell) helped me look at love and life from all different angles, whether I was up in the clouds or driving across a parking lot in search of paradise. She also got me thinking about how the seasons come and go like carousels going ’round and that there’s nothing we can do to escape time.

Time, of course, is a popular subject for wise women, and Carly (Simon) taught me that anticipation is a lustful place. What would life be without something to look forward to? That’s a concept to which I was introduced via a song on a boombox in 1971: The state of longing is a luxurious window.

“Be My Baby,” my favorite Ellie (Greenwich) song, brought me so much joy singing in my car (along with the Ronettes) as soon as I got my driver’s license — top of my lungs, windows down. You can still catch me on the freeway doing the same when it comes on an oldies station.

Did someone say Chrissie? Chrissie (Hynde) has been rockin’ it for decades. Never gives up. Never gives in. Says and sings what’s on her brassy mind. I have extra special affection for Chrissie because anyone who can write their own massive hits and still choose to record a song I wrote gets extra worship. Thank you, thank you, thank you Chrissie.

These are the women whose voices were a profound influence on my personal coming of age. Whose vinyl I wore out (and sometimes bought two copies of). Who left an indelible impression on my youthful self and on the woman I was to become. Who formed the soundtrack of my life.

There’s a commonality here. These are all deep-thinking women, with rich histories they longed to share. In many cases, they faced uphill battles but they were persistent and had an unfailing belief in themselves. They had fires in their hearts and a desire to reach people like me, and to touch us with their unique view of the human condition.

You may have your own list of women songwriters whom you cherish and who will live on in your psyche as trail blazers and torch carriers — the ones who shape your universe. Taylor, Beyonce, Xtina, Mariah, Gaga. They’re also recognizable on a first name basis. That says something.

Let’s honor them all. Not just during Women’s History Month, but every month of every year.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

What are the Different Kinds of Tubas?

When it comes to brass instruments, there seems to be something of a hierarchy. Trumpets are bright and authoritative, always right out front. With their long slides, trombones are both visually arresting and fun to play. But tubas? Too often they are thought of as the kid Little League coaches stick out in right field. But, in actuality, the lowest-pitched instrument in the brass family plays a vital role.

There are concert tubas, marching band and jazz ensemble tubas; tubas with bells pointed upward, backward and frontward; tubas of different finishes and tuned to different pitches. In this article, we’ll describe the difference between them all … but first, a look at their origins and similarities.

ORIGINS

Tubas have a long and fascinating history. The first example of the instrument — the basstuba — was patented on September 12, 1835. However, there was a milestone event that predated this: the invention of valves in the 1820s. These allowed the player to easily change the length of internal tubing and thus significantly extend note range — a technological breakthrough that was not only swiftly incorporated into existing brass instruments like the trumpet and French horn but also led to the creation of several new instruments, including the tuba. The original basstuba incorporated five valves that were similar to modern piston valves (see the next section for more information).

The word “tuba” comes from the Latin word for “tube.” (The term has also been used for an ancient bronze instrument used in Greece and Rome, as well as a blanket term for any horn.) The original was called a “basstuba” since it offered a lower register than other horns of the era. Before the invention of valves, lower-register (valveless) instruments included the ophicleide, a long wide brass instrument invented in 1817 that used metal caps called “keys”; and the serpent, a long, windy tube-like instrument. Adolphe Sax’s low-register “saxhorns” were also popular around the inception of the basstuba. During the American Civil War, for example, saxhorns were common. Saxhorns that still exist today are the flugelhorn, baritone horn, the alto/tenor horn and the euphonium (more on those below).

PISTON AND ROTARY VALVES

When it comes to tubas today, there are two main types of valves: piston and rotary. Each alters the length of space that the air (or breath) must travel, which then has an effect on both the pitch and timbre of the note being played.

Rotary valves change the angle of a given tube, resulting in more internal space. Piston valves act much like the pistons in a car engine. Top-action piston valves move vertically and front-action piston valves move more horizontally. The advantage piston valves offer is “half-valve” playing, which experienced players can use to create “in-between” notes — something that’s almost impossible with rotary valves. The downside to piston valves is that they require more maintenance and regular oiling to keep freedom of movement consistent.

Most modern tubas offer three to six valves, with a few rare exceptions. Three-valve tubas are often used by beginners. The sousaphone (see below) also has three valves. More advanced tuba players use four- or five-valved instruments.

Yamaha offers many varieties of both rotary- and piston-valve tubas, including the YBB-641 B♭ tuba (which has rotary valves) and the YCB-822 C tuba (which has piston valves).

YBB 641
Yamaha YBB-641 B♭ tuba.
YCB 822
Yamaha YCB-822 C tuba.

SIMILARITIES

Tubas are most often made of brass that’s either unlacquered, lacquered or plated with another metal such as nickel, gold or silver. Sound is produced by buzzing your lips into the mouthpiece. Anyone (with normal lung capacity) is encouraged to give it a try!

The instrument is comprised of lengthy tubing and is made with a conical bore, meaning the tube’s diameter widens as it moves towards the bell. Tubas used in military bands historically had bells that pointed backwards. Tubas used in recording studios have bells pointed frontwards and tubas used in orchestras have bells pointed skyward.

Showing the scale based on a piano keyboard.

Today, the most common tubas are found in four pitches: B♭, C, E♭ and F, with each variety determined by the instrument’s tube length. Most modern music composed for the tuba is written in the bass clef, though some, like that for British-style brass bands, can be written in the treble clef.

B♭ TUBA

The tube of a B♭ tuba is the longest of the varieties listed here — it measures 18 feet (5.5 meters) long — and therefore it’s the lowest-pitched of the four. B♭ tubas are common in marching bands and full orchestras and are the instruments most beginners start on. However, they come in a range of weights, so factors like a player’s size and strength can determine which to choose. But no matter which he or she does, the tone and depth of sound of a B♭ tuba (also known as a BB♭ tuba) is unmistakable.

Tuba in brass.
Yamaha YBB-621 tuba.

C TUBA

While the B♭ tuba is the most common of the four, the C tuba comes in as a close second, and is mostly found in orchestras and wind ensembles. Its tube is 16 feet (4.9 meters) long and so a C tuba is a bit smaller and pitched slightly higher than its B♭ counterpart. Compared to B♭ tubas, C tubas (also known as a CC tubas) have a faster response time and a clearer tone. Both B♭ and C tubas can also be known as “contrabass tubas.”

C Tuba  YCB 826S
Yamaha YCB-826S C tuba.
C Tuba   YCB 621
Yamaha YCB-621 C tuba.

E♭ TUBA

The tube of an E♭ tuba is 13 feet (4 meters) long. As a result, the instrument often plays an octave above the BB♭ tubas. It is used in brass bands and some military bands, and is prized for its extended note range. The E♭ tuba is also a good solo instrument for experienced professional players who want an instrument that is even more responsive and clearer tonally than a C tuba.

Tuba in silver finish.
Yamaha YEB-321S tuba.

F TUBA

With an interior tube measuring 12 feet (3.7 meters) long, the F tuba is the shortest, clearest and highest-pitched of the four. Because of its high range, the instrument is often used by professional players as a solo instrument. In Europe, the F tuba is a standard orchestral staple. An F tuba is sometimes equipped with a fifth or even sixth valve to assist in attaining a lower range of notes.

Tuba with brass finish.
Yamaha YFB-621 tuba.

OTHER SIMILAR HORNS

Euphonium

This is a smaller instrument than any of the four tubas and offers a higher range than its counterparts — it’s essentially a B♭ tuba pitched an octave higher, but with a conical inner tube. The euphonium is also known as a “tenor tuba,” though traditionally tenor tubas are thicker and more tapered.

Baritone Horn

Usually equipped with three piston valves, this B♭ horn has the same tonal range as the euphonium; however, the timbre is brighter largely because a baritone’s inner tubes are considerably thinner. In the U.S., a euphonium with the bell and pistons facing forward is sometimes called a baritone to differentiate it from a true euphonium.

Sousaphone

Created by the famed American conductor and composer John Philip Sousa , the sousaphone looks much like a tuba and is featured prominently in marching bands, usually pitched to B♭. It’s a large, heavy instrument that wraps around a player’s body. The sousaphone incorporates three valves and has a large forward-facing bell that rests over the player’s right shoulder.

Cimbasso

Rare today, this historical instrument looks almost like a trombone bent at a 90-degree angle. It has the same range as an F tuba, though other versions exist to fit the range of BB♭, CC and E♭ tubas.

Subcontrabass Tuba

Even larger and weightier than BB♭ contrabass tubas, these varieties offer the lowest range, but are extremely rare.

A promotion for a new Yamaha Custom French horn.

How to Succeed as a Sole 6-12 Music Educator

You have been hired as the new high school band director — congratulations! It’s probably the beginning of summer, and you are about to start the process of building your marching band show and learning the ins and outs of football season at your school.

However, in addition to being the high school director, you are also the middle school director. The middle school stuff can wait until August, right? The answer is “no” … and, at the same time, “yes.” I have been a band director for 10 years in Alabama, and in seven of those years, I have been the sole band director for grades 6-12. I also work with a choir director who covers middle school and high school, too.

In my state, the majority of music programs are in this same situation; most are in rural or underfunded areas. As a result, there are a number of uphill battles that are immediately presented to you as a director. The main one being an underdeveloped program. Past directors, no matter how talented or hard-working, were usually in the job for a year or two at most, which means programs have to restart/rebuild every few years.

So, what can a sole director do? You must invest, plan, build and then invest again. If you go through these steps, you might be able to rest a little easier during that first year, and, most importantly, you will see the value of your hard work. Every student deserves the same musical and educational experience regardless of the number of directors, financial opportunities, program size or location.

Emotional Investment

Shelby County Winds EnsembleThe first thing you must do as a new director is to learn about the community, students, stakeholders and the general dynamics of the school. That’s what I did when I accepted the job at Shelby County High School in 2018. I soon discovered that I was in a great situation because my community is very tightknit (most music educators in small or rural areas will experience the same thing).

You might hear that too much community involvement is a bad thing, but that will only be the case if you allow it to be. If you go into the investment phase with the mindset that your program is the only thing that matters, you will be run out of town quickly. I was in charge of two schools with a total population of just under 1,000 students, and I knew that we would have lots of crossover with other programs, athletics and academics, which is wonderful! Your ability to work and collaborate with others will lead to a better program for your students.

My first few days on the job were critical. I set up meetings with my principals and band boosters, and I held a general meet-and-greet event where folks could get to know me and put a face with a name. These simple interactions gave me a better understanding of the community and the wants and needs of the program. My community had a rich tradition of band excellence, which they naturally wanted to continue, but what I heard most from students and parents was that they wanted newer things. Not necessarily new items, but new ideas — a freshness to the program.

Plan, Plan, Plan

After the initial investment phase, you then enter the planning phase. And let me be clear, planning never stops. When you plan for a school year for two schools with students at four to seven ability levels, you must always think about the next step and then have two or more backup plans. It’s challenging, but not impossible. Here are a few ideas I use when creating my plan for my program.

Music First — Always invest the majority of your planning into finding music that serves two purposes. The first is educational — the music should meet the needs of your program and your students. Secondly, the music must be engaging for your students and for you. I have selected music off a list of “essential” pieces, and they are usually the ones I dread teaching, which results in an underdeveloped plan and a poor performance. Choose music that you and your students will enjoy and that meets your educational goals.

perform nursing homePerform Often — No matter the age of your students, they should be performing. The typical model of fall, holiday, performance assessment and spring concerts truly doesn’t meet students’ ability to perform. It also leads to performance anxiety. To eliminate this, I try to schedule at least one performance each month after students’ first year of instruction. This could be as simple as a chamber group performing at a nursing home. The more students perform, the better they become at performing, and it increases their music-reading skills. My high school students will perform 12 times in various ensembles from November to January, and only one of those times is a full ensemble concert. These include multiple jazz performances at nursing homes and community events; our marching band performing in the city Christmas parade; and our chamber ensembles performing at the Alabama Music Educators Association conference in January. With each performance, your program’s footprint and advocacy expand. Every school board member and our superintendent know me because our music students are so visible in the public, and they often attend our full concerts. And we all know that their presence at concerts leads to more opportunities and more experiences for our students.

Trophies Do Not Matter — It will take some time for you and your students to accept this idea.  The final group to understand this will be the parents. The outcome or success of a performance should not be gauged by awards or trophies. If your students have progressed in their learning from where they started, then you have won. In 2019, our last full year before the pandemic, the band won almost every competition and scored higher than some of the top programs in the state. For the 2021-2022 school year, our return to a normal marching band season was incredibly difficult. More than half the band members were first-year performers, and many had never performed in a full concert. We received lower scores than in the past, but students began to buy into the idea of improvement as the ultimate goal. As a result, students who fought through the adversity of the pandemic have a greater love and appreciation for band and music.

Build Your Program

I am a firm believer that in order for your program to thrive, everyone must speak the same language. You must develop a system from the top down. What you want the top of the pyramid to know must be taught at the bottom of the pyramid, or at the beginning of the process. My hometown is known for high school football, and the reason for its success is that the youth teams run the same plays as the high school. Kids grow up within the culture, using the same language as the high school football system. When they make it to the high school team, they already know the playbook. Of course, there are variations of complexity of plays as they progress, but the basis is the same.

ShelbyCountyHigh performanceBuild Your System — The same concept works for music as you develop your own system. Being the only 6-12 director, using the same language from top to bottom makes my life easier. For example, I use the same method book series from beginner band all the way through high school. I also use the same methodology for counting rhythm. Whether you choose to count in the traditional method, Eastman Technique or in any other form, you must make it the same from bottom to the top. I started this process during my first year at SCHS, and now four years down the road, all grade levels count using the same system. Our rhythmic integrity has greatly improved and our students’ abilities have increased. This is part of building your system.

Call-Time System — When it comes to rehearsals and performances, I use a call-time system, where the call time is 15 minutes before the actual event. If call time is 3:30 p.m., then rehearsal begins at 3:45 p.m. This gives me and students leaders 15 minutes to do things such as begin sectional times, take attendance, make sure the facilities are ready for whatever activity we are about to do. We also use call time for travel. If we are departing at 6 p.m., then everyone is there no later than 5:45 p.m.  It took a few years to get everyone on board, but now it is second nature to the students. It has allowed for less stress on times we are leaving campus or when we are performing, which leads to less performance anxiety. This is part of building your system.

Open-Door Policy — Everyone says that they have an open-door policy, but my door is literally open all the time. My students know that my office is their safe place. My schedule works out so that I have lunch period off, and our school is split into three lunch waves. During all three lunch waves, there are anywhere from five to 15 students in my office eating lunch. We rarely talk about band, although music theory topics have come up; instead, we talk about their history, math and English classes, and we talk about life. I tutor kids on assignments they didn’t quite understand. I also just sit back and observe how they interact with each other. We laugh, we cry and we eat. We become a family. While this has nothing to do with the notes on the page, it means more than any time of the day for the development of the system. With this stronger connection to each other, we are able to work later in the day on music but do it with greater human interaction.

Recruit All the Time — The other way to build your program is to recruit every day. I make sure students know who I am by being present throughout the year. I visit our three elementary feeder schools three to four times a year, and each time I bring something different but deliver the same message: Join the band! The first time I visited an elementary school, there were a few “hey, I know you” moments. By the time students choose an elective for 6th grade, I know some of their names.

Spread the Word About Your Program — I also regularly post on our band’s social media accounts (Instagram and Facebook), which is another way to expand the footprint of our program. All my posts are positive about student achievements, and I tag all local accounts. As a result, I often have people in town say that they know what’s going on with the band because of social media. I also pitch everything we do to our local reporters. Last year, the band program was in the newspaper and on our local TV stations numerous times, including an interview with me on our ABC affiliate (Teacher of Month Interview). All this has brought us positive momentum. Currently, 20% to 30% of all incoming 6th graders join the band. By the start of the next school year, we should have 15%-20% of the middle school enrolled in band, which will only lead to an increase in high school participation in the future.

Investment for the Future

I was always told to “never smile your first year,” which is the worst attitude to have. There is good in everything that we do. You must find a way to smile, or you will soon be looking for another job. In a small community, find joy in the little victories, and they will lead to bigger victories. With that being said, I do apply the adage, “never take no for an answer,” but I have tweaked it to “never accept no as the only answer.”

Matthew Martindale wearing senior pins With every big decision I have taken to our administration, I always have a back-up plan. Your administrators are there to support you, not to fight with you, and if they are fighting against you, then you might need to look in the mirror. Your top priority is your program, and you must fight for it. But you must realize that you are just one program at your school. If your plan is rejected, don’t be discouraged. Have a back-up plan or be willing to work with administrators on a revised plan. Or, come back at a later date and say, “Remember when I wanted to do XYZ — what are your thoughts on it now?” You may be shocked, as I have been, at how administrators are more willing to approve, or at least discuss, the original plan. Team-building and collaboration are essential.

This past season at the Alabama Marching Championships, I spoke with another director who is in the same situation as me. She, however, has been the director at her schools for almost 15 years. We agreed that our jobs as the lone director is hard … really hard, but our conversation was more about the positives of it all.

As the sole director, you can shape your entire program, see students grow up, learn family members’ names and stories, and ultimately, you are more than a director/teacher. You are a part of the community!

Whenever I am struggling with hardships and the workload, I think about that conversation and know that I am not alone. We still have the best job in the world, and there are a lot of us out there teaching all grades all day. Let’s boost each other up and let our students flourish in a positive musical experience!

Dollar Store Manipulatives for Elementary Students

It’s no secret that elementary school music teachers are usually on a tight budget. But before music teachers throw their hands up in the air, they should add these music manipulatives into their classrooms. The following DIY learning tools are economical and can provide countless hours of instruction.

Because of inflation, many of us now call these discount retailers “Dollar Twenty-Five” stores; however, these items are still good deals for your classroom.

Rhythm Flashcards

Rhythm cards can be made with oversized flashcards and a Sharpie. For younger elementary students, start with ta, ti-ti, and ta-a flashcards (quarter note, eighth note and half note cards). Because the large flashcards are so sturdy, they will last the entire school year without having to laminate them.

ball string unsplashString

String? Yes, you read that right. String can be used in spider games, such as the song “Little Spider Spins All Day.” I don’t remember where I found this song and activity, but it’s a fun one!

The song goes like this: “Little spider spins all day, spins while all the others play”

Solfege: DRMFSLS SLSFMRD

Students form a circle and start to sing the song. The teacher should hold on to the end of the string and hand the ball of string to a student, or spider. He or she will take the ball of string and go across the circle (i.e., spinning a web) and will hand another student the string. Then, the students switch places. The first spider takes the string while the other spider takes the ball of string to give to another spider on the other side of the circle. Each time the song is sung, another student will “spin” his or her web. By crisscrossing the circle, the students are creating a physical web.

Make sure to tell the students to hold on to their piece of string tightly, otherwise, you’ll end up with a tangled mess! After all the students have had a turn, they lay down their “web,” and step back and look at their creation.

Solfege Flashcards

Similar to rhythm cards, oversized flashcards can also be used to make simple solfege manipulatives.

For kindergarten, start by doing high and low, or sol and mi. For every grade level, add a few new notes from the scale (refer to Orff’s pedagogy for which ones to add).

Music flashcards are one of the easiest manipulatives that can be added to your classroom’s daily music warm-up routine. These exercises can even be student-led by the time it hits mid-year. While each grade level will have a different set of flash cards, student-lead solfege quizzes can be beneficial from kingergarten through 6th grade.

Make-It Blocks

Make-It Blocks are similar to Legos. With a permanent marker, draw rhythms that are one beat on each block. Your students can build rhythms as they connect their blocks together.

Plain wood blocks can also be used, but they are easily knocked over.

Letsplaykidsmusic.com has a great demographic that shows examples of what you can draw on the blocks:

Magnets

Magnets are one of my favorite tools to use in primary school when teaching the concepts of high and low. Unlike stickers or Velcro, magnets are much more sturdy and will last for years.

Some teachers like to draw or paint the solfege syllables directly on the magnets, but I prefer to keep them plain so that any magnet can be placed in any spot on the staff. One game I play with kids is for them to place the magnets on the whiteboard based on what I sing (“Was it high-low-high or low-high-low?”).

Pointing Stick

Don’t underestimate the power of a tool as simple as a pointing stick. Pointing sticks can be handed to students who are on their best behavior. They will get a chance to keep time in front of the class or lead other music-related activities. It is the best manipulative and classroom management tool I have found at the Dollar Store, hands down.

popsicle sticksPopsicle Sticks

Popsicle sticks can be used for rhythm-building exercises for mid- to upper-elementary schoolers. To use the popsicle sticks for rhythms, use one single (vertical) popsicle stick for a quarter note. For eighth notes, use a horizontal stick to form note beams. Check out this YouTube video of a popsicle sticks rhythm game.

Plastic Hand Clappers

These loud and goofy gag gifts can be used in your classroom. And while you may not like them because they’re so loud, having a bright neon clapper in each student’s hand makes it very obvious who is and isn’t participating.

Plastic hand clappers can be bought as a class set and used to read rhythms. Put the rhythms on your whiteboard or smartboard and guide the students as they clap along. Clappers make a great assessment too, as you can easily tell who is missing the rests and who is getting the entire rhythm correct.

You can also use hand clappers to teach proper concert etiquette. Practice by showing your students a classical, multi-movement work. You can teach students that an end of a movement is more like a comma, and the end of the piece is like a period. Hand clappers are an excellent preparation for a symphony field trip.   

playdough unsplashVisual Music: Play Dough, Styrofoam Putty and Pipe Cleaners

What do play dough, slime and pipe cleaners have to do with music? They can be used to create visual interpretations of sound.

Have students make play dough and putty sculptures in response to a piece of music. Pipe cleaners, on the other hand, can be used to create a melodic shape, which can then be interpreted by the teacher or even sung by the class. As the pipe cleaner goes up, voices go up, as it comes down, the voices go back down, and so on.

This energetic video by Angie McDaniel is a great way to prep students for using pipe cleaners as a vocal warm up.

Props

Some props at discount retailers can be used for singing games. For example,

Costumes

While you likely won’t be able to meet all your costuming needs at a Dollar Store, you can find more than you might think! The last time I was in my local store, I saw animal masks (dogs, foxes, cats) and butterfly wings. If you are practicing for an upcoming musical, get your costumes early! The more practice you have with them, the better.

Regular classroom lesson plans can also incorporate costumes. My students loved reenacting “Peter and the Wolf.

Oftentimes, costuming is incorporated into the state standards. If you are looking to make your own costumes for an event, you can also find small T-shirts in different colors. Use your sewing machine and get creative!

slinky pexelsSensory Tools

Apart from manipulatives, discount stores are excellent sources for sensory tools that you can use to make a sensory station. Items such as Slinkies, squeezable toys, bubble poppers and pop tubes can all be found for about $1.25 each.

Go Shopping!

You don’t need a big budget or fancy equipment to make your classroom an engaging space that is full of hands-on learning tools. The next time you are running low on ideas and petty cash, check out your local discount retailer and try out the above ideas!

10 Micropractices for Better Mental Health

Influential architect Ludwig Mies van der Rohe famously said, “Less is more.” And luckily, this phrase is as helpful to busy music educators as it is to minimalist midcentury architects.

As nice as it would be to stretch through a 90-minute yoga class, luxuriate during an hour-long massage or even escape on a week-long retreat to Costa Rica, these options aren’t realistic for many people. That’s where micropractices come in. These short, super-easy practices are designed to provide uplifting energy, release anxiety and disrupt negative patterns. View them as little mental-health snacks, if you will.

1. Hum

The vagus nerve, also called cranial nerve X, runs from the brain down the neck and chest to the heart, lungs and into the digestive tract. It’s responsible for heart rate, among many other roles, and stimulating the vagus nerve helps the body know it’s okay to relax. Humming and singing both stimulate this nerve, creating a simple way to relieve anxiety, stress and fear. Here’s a video that explains how to activate the vagus nerve using humming with “mmm,” “ahh” and “ooo” sounds to induce a relaxation response.

2. Drop 3

People often hold tension in three key areas: the jaw, shoulders and abdomen. Focus on these spots by “dropping 3.” Inhale deeply and then as you exhale, release any tension you are holding in your jaw. Then do the same for the remaining two areas.

3. Stare at a Wall

According to Rahaf Harfoush, author of the creativity-based book “Hustle & Float,” our minds need more real rest than we give them. “What our brains actually need is periods of destimulation, which means no screens, no emails, no audiobooks. Your brain needs a second to breathe, to catch up, to integrate all the content that we’ve consumed,” she told NPR. She suggests literally staring at a wall now and again, for up to 15 minutes.

woman jogging4. Take a Trot

If staring at a wall for 15 minutes doesn’t sound appealing, try a 15-minute jog. According to a 2018 research study led by Fabien D. Legrand, this brief period of exercise boosts energy, memory, mood and cognitive function. The research was done on “moderate intensity” jogging, but lots of other research says that a good walk is helpful, too. Walking reduces stress, anxiety and fatigue, and may ward off depression, according to the British nonprofit organization Walking For Health.

5. Get Specific

Researchers like Robert Emmons, Ph.D. have explored gratitude and found it leads to better sleep, heart health and even obtaining goals. Turbo-charge a short gratitude practice by being super-specific. For example, if you keep a journal, you might write one sentence, such as “I’m grateful for all the beautiful azalea blooms I see on my way to school.” This helps keep a daily gratitude practice fresh, rather than just another thing to get done on the to-do list.

6. Declutter One Drawer

If you think your messy desk is a sign of genius, well, who I am to argue? But according to research by Stephanie McMains and Sabine Kastner, visual stimuli — like cluttered surfaces — compete with our brain’s processing ability, making it literally harder to think. Truth is, our brains like order and the ability to focus, and having a cleaner space around us lowers cortisol, the stress hormone. Since redoing your entire life is a tall order, create just one “zone of tranquility” at a time. Maybe it’s the produce drawer in the fridge, a toiletries drawer in the bathroom or your top desk drawer at school. Then take on one cabinet shelf, etc. Steadily, your home or classroom will become tidier.

stack books unsplash7. Put Down that Book

Reading for just six minutes can reduce stress levels by 68%, according to cognitive neuropsychologist David Lewis’ research at the University of Sussex. However, some people struggle to read for an interesting reason: They feel guilty not reading a book all the way through and get stuck. It’s better to spend your precious time reading books that are either pleasurable or are sparking your true interest. Still feeling bad? Librarians gave six reasons why it’s fine to stop reading a book and move on to another.

8. Breathe Some Fire

Pranayama, or manipulation of the breath, has been shown to decrease stress and improve cardiovascular function. There are many ways to practice pranayama, such as slow alternate nostril breathing, deep breathing or panting like a dog. Here’s one to try: Breath of Fire, popular in Kundalini yoga teachings, can be done in as little as a three-minute session. Here’s a video tutorial on how to do Breath of Fire properly and safely.

9. Roll on a Spiky Ball

Keep a spiky massage ball under your desk, and during breaks, give a quick roll to massage your feet. Physical therapists use these balls to relieve issues such as plantar fasciitis, but according to the Mayo Clinic, “Several studies indicate that reflexology [applying pressure to the hands or feet] may reduce pain and psychological symptoms, such as stress and anxiety, and enhance relaxation and sleep.” You can also use a tennis ball, golf ball or small foam roller. Spend 2 to 3 minutes per foot, applying as much pressure as is tolerable.

blow bubble pexels10. Chew a Piece of Gum

Violet Beauregarde, a character in “Charlie and the Chocolate Factory,” gave gum-chomping a bad rap. But she may have been on to something, as chewing gum reduces stress, according to research. “Overall, it would appear that chewing gum attenuates the sensory processing of external stressors and inhibits the propagation of stress-related information in the brain,” explains one published study by Andrew P. Smith. So, chew a piece of sugar-free gum for a quick blast of relaxation. Blowing a big pink bubble the size of your face, however, is probably best done after band practice.

Spotlight on Second-Generation Yamaha Revstar Guitars

I love demonstrating the latest Yamaha guitars at trade shows. These events allow me to interact with the Yamaha, Line 6 and Ampeg teams, as well as with dealers and fellow guitar players. At the 2020 Winter NAMM show, I was invited to a private gathering to “test drive” some prototypes for a planned new series of Revstar guitars. It was exciting and inspiring to get a sneak peek at what lay ahead, but details of those new implementations could not be discussed with anyone … until now.

I’ve been working with the original Revstar guitar lineup since 2017, so I feel I have a unique perspective. Having just spent a couple of weeks playing and recording two of the new second-generation models, I’d like to share with you my impressions of these exciting upgrades. First, though, let’s talk about the new features.

New Revstar Features

Staggered rows of beautiful electric guitars laying flat with strings up in a variety of colors.
The new Revstar lineup.

The Revstar line has been streamlined into three main categories: Professional (RSP models), Standard (RSS models) and Element (RSE models).

All second-generation Revstar models feature chambered mahogany bodies, mahogany neck-through body design, rosewood fingerboards, jumbo frets (stainless steel on Professional and Standard models), humbucking or P90 pickups, new gloss finishes and satin finished necks that match the body color. They also all sport a set of lovely ivory-colored tuners that complement the unique headstock shape and striking Yamaha logo.

RSE20 HEADSTOCK Resize L
RSS20 HEADSTOCK Resize R

The RSP02T and RSS02T Professional and Standard models feature the original 02T tailpiece, and there are also left-hand Element and Standard models available (the RSE20L and RSS20L).

Electronics

Revstar Element models retain the first-generation “dry switch” feature on the tone control. This pull-pot effectively filters low-end frequencies for a cleaner tone. I particularly like this sound for rhythm guitar parts.

Closeup of the body of an electric guitar.

Professional and Standard Revstars employ a new five-way selector switch (shown above) in combination with a unique passive boost on the tone control. When the tone control is pressed in, the five-way selector switch toggles between the bridge and neck pickups. However, positions two and four engage a capacitor circuit that slightly delays the output of the opposite pickup, resulting in a subtle phase shift. The resulting tone is similar to the familiar “out of phase” sound we often hear from guitars with single-coil pickups, but rarely found on instruments with humbucking pickups.

Pulling up on the tone control engages the “focus” switch — essentially a passive boost that cuts the highs while boosting the low and mid frequencies to produce a sound similar to that of overwound pickups.

New Finishes

Colors in the Standard line-up include Black (shown below), Flash Green, Swift Blue and Vintage White. The tailpiece edition of the Standard lineup (the RSS02T) clocks in with Black, Hot Merlot, Sunset Burst and Swift Blue. (The latter two colors are also available in Professional Series Revstars.)

Beautiful electric guitar propped up on a leather chair in a sound studio.
RSS20 in Black.

All Element models feature matte-finished double-stripe “café racer” detail through the middle of the gloss-finished body — a subtle but unique addition. These guitars come in four new colors: Black, Vintage White, Swift Blue and Neon Yellow (shown below).

Striking neon yellow electric guitar propped on leather chair with sound studio in background.
RSE20 in Neon Yellow.

My Impressions

The body dimensions in all second-generation models are slightly larger than the original solid-body Revstar. This allows the guitar to balance well and reduces some of the overall weight. Even when played for extended periods of time, the instrument never feels too heavy or uncomfortable.

The new neck profile and stainless-steel jumbo frets are some of the best I’ve ever encountered. The string spacing seems perfect for my hand size and personal playing style. Navigating the length of the fretboard is super-fast and smooth due to the “dryness” of the satin landscape.

The tuned, chambered body actually resonates like a semi-acoustic guitar, adding a nice “bounce” to the picking attack and a roundness to the tonality. Chords ring longer, and single-note passages generate pleasing upper-harmonic content within the sustaining tones. The humbucking pickups articulate dynamic touch, and faithfully reproduce what you feel and hear from the acoustic resonance of the guitar.

I like the simplicity of three-way switching and the bass filter (dry switch) on the Element guitars, but the new five-way pickup selector and focus switch on the Professional and Standard Revstars add a beautiful set of twenty onboard tonal variations. My favorite tones were with the focus switch engaged, as I prefer the softening of the upper frequencies along with the pronounced mid-range and low-end bump those settings produced.

I really appreciate the tuning stability of these new Revstar guitars too. The carbon-reinforced neck on my RSS20 allowed for prolonged bending and perfectly intonated complex chords, as you can see and hear in the videos below.

The Videos

These two videos will give you a good sense of how the new Revstar guitars sound, along with a feel for how they can sit in the mix with other instruments. (The only piece of outboard gear used is a Line 6 Helix modeling processor.) The isolated clean crunch and bluesy pickup tones show off the unique character of the guitar, and I also demonstrate the various switching options for rhythm and lead guitar playing.

The Wrap-Up

Revstar guitars hold a special place in the hearts of guitar players looking for a unique and expressive instrument. I certainly became an advocate and poster-child for the RS720B and RS502T, my favorite first-generation Revstar models.

The second-generation Revstars retain the essence of that legacy, but refine, define and elevate the original visual appeal, playability and tonality to a whole new level. I think there’s a Revstar in the new lineup for any discerning guitar player looking for something special.

Personally, I have my eye on the RSP02T in Swift Blue. Just sayin’!

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

What is Lo-Fi?

The events of the last two years have revealed a dichotomous new musical era. In one way, technology has never been more prevalent. At the same time, people have never been more isolated. But that reality has a silver lining: it’s helped create a renewed love affair with Lo-Fi.

The crackle and delightful imprecisions of the music of the past is drawing millions of new listeners. In this article, we’ll tell you exactly what Lo-Fi means, why it’s so popular and where it came from … as well as where you can find the best examples of these kinds of sounds.

WHAT DOES LO-FI MEAN?

“Lo-Fi” is simply short for “low-fidelity” — a term for music in which the listener can hear imperfections like crackles, scratches, pops, out of tune strings or other things that might otherwise be considered imperfect. These have always existed in older recordings or, more recently, in DIY recordings. But today, there is a renewed appreciation for them.

Many associate the resurgence in Lo-Fi fandom to the renewed popularity of YouTube™ communities like Chillhop, LoFi Girl, and Oldies playing in a coffee shop and it’s raining, as well as Spotify playlists like lofi hip hop music. These online resources play popular contemporary music as well as oldies; not only are fans drawn to familiar sounds, in the case of the latter they enjoy the memories associated with them too.

Many of these YouTube channels can stream lo-fi music in real time, like a traditional radio station. They also offer the added bonus of an online forum in the comments section where fans can “hang out” together, talk about the music and share personal stories. Because the music is often instrumental and calm, it doesn’t distract from a passive chat.

THE HISTORY OF LO-FI

Lo-Fi sounds have their origin in both old-time radio and in outdated audio formats like cassette tapes and 8-track cartridges. In the waning years of the 20th century, some musicians began to tend toward earthier sounds, rebelling against the synthesizer-saturated ’80s and the oncoming computer domination of both audio and modern culture in general. Punk, grunge, hip-hop and other subgenres all embraced that sonic sensibility.

It’s important to understand that “Lo-Fi” is not a type of music unto itself. For that reason, it can be applied to nearly every genre; for example, there’s Lo-Fi rock, rap, hip-hop, even jazz. Modern hip-hop producers like J Dilla and Q-Tip have helped to make these fuzzy, nostalgic sounds popular for contemporary audiences.

In this context, Lo-Fi refers to how the music was recorded or mixed, which can involve the use of rudimentary equipment, the creation of purposeful “mistakes” and the addition of ambient environmental sounds like a crackling fire or raindrops on a window. There are even “bit crusher” plug-ins for DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) software that reduce the resolution of digital recordings so they sound more like they came from the 1980s than the 21st century.

Today, Lo-Fi music, especially when it comes to hip-hop-oriented sounds, often features drum loops, jazz chords and recognizable vintage song samples. Songs recorded in the first half of the 20th century are also popular — genres like swing and Dixieland jazz — especially when combined with ambient sounds from the era. Some YouTube playlists earn millions of streams.

HOW BEST TO ENJOY LO-FI MUSIC

One of the most beloved aspects of these playlists, particularly those that are broadcast in real-time, is the community that has organically amassed around them. These provide calming, supportive, like-minded spaces to engage with other music fans while enjoying Lo-Fi. Especially in times of stress, the familiarity and nostalgia found in these sounds soothes and comforts.

Another reason people flock to Lo-Fi music is that it can be enjoyed passively, while doing other things. The songs are familiar, the recordings often mild and mellow, so there is nothing the brain needs to pay direct attention to if a listener is otherwise occupied. That means you can listen to Lo-Fi while studying, working, cooking or when doing other things around the house. Some therapists are even suggesting that their clients take advantage of the calming nature of Lo-Fi.

As a bonus, many of the YouTube Lo-Fi channels incorporate familiar, simple imagery: a couple sitting at a diner counter; someone sleeping cozily in their bed; a “LoFi girl” studying with her cat on the window (a meme created by Colombian artist Juan Pablo Machado). Last but not least, engaging with the beloved sounds of the past can offer a unique type of music education: learn while you listen instead of the more usual “listen while you learn.”

 

Looking for more Lo-Fi? Check these out:

Lofi hip hop mix [Beats To Relax/Chill to

Oldies playing in another room, it’s a great night

Oldies music playing in another room and it’s raining

The Advantages of Parallel Processing

We’ve covered the basics of compression and saturation in previous Recording Basics blog postings. This time around, let’s look at an alternative way of applying such effects — a technique called parallel processing. We’ll discuss how it works and when it’s good to use it, and we’ll provide step-by-step instructions for setting it up yourself.

Not All Wet

When you apply an effect to a track or group of tracks (a Group Track in Steinberg Cubase), you have a couple of different ways to do so. One option is to open the effects plug-in on an insert slot on the track itself. That’s referred to as serial processing. The term comes from the fact that audio is fed directly from the track through the effect, which processes 100 percent of the signal, as shown in the illustration below:

Graphic illustrating concept.
Serial processing.

Alternatively, you can use an auxiliary send (a feature found in all DAW mixers) to route signal from the source channel to a dedicated effects channel called an auxiliary return (also known as an “aux” return or, in Cubase, an FX channel). Here, unlike an insert, you’re not processing 100 percent of the audio. Instead, you’re able to use the send and return controls to blend in as much or as little of the effect as you want along with the original dry track:

Graphic illustrating concept.
Parallel processing.

In a parallel setup, if the plug-in you’re using has a mix control (wet/dry knob), be sure to set it to 100 percent wet:

View of front panel with dial indicated.
In a parallel setup, set the mix control to 100%.

Things like compression and saturation are most commonly configured as serial effects because they’re meant to change the character of the entire sound. Reverb, delay and modulation effects are more likely to be applied in parallel because you typically want to blend only a little bit of their signal along with your source track. However, that’s not always the case. Let’s take a look at the exceptions to this “rule.”

Parallel Compression

Parallel compression — sometimes called New York Compression because it originated on the New York City studio scene — is a simple enough concept. Instead of inserting a compressor directly on a track, you put it on an auxiliary return like you would with reverb or delay. That means you’ll be blending the uncompressed dry audio with the compressed version rather than compressing the entire signal.

The basic purpose of compression is to attenuate any audio that goes above a certain level, known as threshold. By squashing down the peaks, you’re reducing the track’s dynamic range — the difference between the loudest and softest parts. Doing so lets you turn the track up higher because the reduced peaks are no longer as loud in comparison to the rest of the track.

Those peaks are the transient portion of each sound or hit — the “attack” portion of an audio event like a note or a drum hit. With the transients lowered, the sound will be less punchy and, therefore, less impactful … but with the reduced dynamic range, you can turn the instrument higher in the mix and accentuate the more “roomy” parts of the sound that occur after the transient. However, particularly if the attack time of the compression is too fast, the sound can almost get a little “mushy,” When applied to drums, they can start to sound as if they were being played by a soft beater rather than a hard wooden drumstick.

Parallel compression helps alleviate this issue. By blending heavily compressed audio with uncompressed audio, you can reduce the dynamic range while maintaining more control over the transients. When applied to percussive sources like drums, you can create a more aggressive and ambient sound.

Let’s have a listen to how this works, starting with an uncompressed stereo drum mix:

Compare it to this clip, where the drums are processed with parallel compression. Notice that the sustain portion of each hit is accentuated without losing the punch of the transient:

Three Parallel Compression Configurations

There are three different ways of setting up parallel compression. The first, as previously mentioned, is by using an aux send and return. This is a good approach to take if you want to parallel process multiple tracks. Here’s how to do it:

1. Create an aux return track (FX track in Cubase) and insert a compressor on it. Set the compressor for extremely heavy compression (low threshold, high ratio, fast attack time).

2. Configure an aux send and route it to the aux return track on the channel or channels that you’re going to compress. Many DAWs have the aux sends already configured; you just have to route them to the aux return channel you’re using.

3. Turn up the aux send until you’re hearing the desired amount of compression.

The second way of achieving parallel compression is to use a duplicate track. This is the preferred method if you’re applying the effect to multiple signals, where using aux sends could create a clutter of extra tracks. Here’s how to do it:

1. Make a copy of the source track and start with its fader down all the way.

2. Insert a compressor on the duplicate track and crush it with a heavy setting.

3. As you’re playing back the song, slowly raise the level of the compressed track until you hear the desired sound.

Screenshot.
Duplicate a track and heavily process the copy.

Finally, if your compressor has a mix control, such as the Vintage Compressor in Cubase, you can accomplish parallel compression by following these steps:

1. Insert the compressor on the track.

2. Create a setting that’s overly heavy with a lot of gain reduction (try -15dB to -20dB) and a relatively fast attack.

3. Turn down the mix control as the song plays until the balance between the compressed and uncompressed sound is to your liking.

This “mix knob” method is particularly handy for parallel processing an entire mix on the master bus.

Parallel Saturation

Saturation effects such as overdrive, distortion or fuzz benefit from parallel processing in much the same way: they allow you to keep more of your transients while still bringing in the saturated sound.

The setup is identical to parallel compression, except that you’ll be using a saturation plug-in instead. Note that saturation by its nature reduces transients to some degree, so you’re getting some compression as well.

Here’s an example using a recording of a cajón — a box-shaped wooden percussion instrument played by slapping the front or rear faces with the hands. This first audio clip is without any distortion:

Here’s that same track with a distortion plug-in inserted:

Finally, here’s the track with parallel distortion from a plug-in on an aux track:

It’s a subtle difference, but you can hear more of the transients on the parallel distorted version — especially if you listen on headphones.

Another place you might want to try parallel saturation is on the master bus. This will give your whole mix just a tiny bit of saturation to make it feel more energetic. However, you have to go easy when using it that way, or your mix will lose punch.

Over and Out

Parallel compression and saturation aren’t superior to their serial counterparts, they’re just different. Sometimes the difference is subtle, but sometimes — particularly when you’re trying to preserve transients — it can be significant. Experiment with both methods, and you’ll get a feel for which approach works best in various mixing scenarios.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

 

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

Build a Culture of Excellence

Students who believe in their ability to perform at a high level are more likely to achieve remarkable things.

When students see results as a performer, they develop trust in their instructors. Music educators’ ability to take their students to a level that they may not even see as possible hinges on committing to a process that requires patience and delayed gratification. Directors may not see instant results, but if they can see progress over the long term or find fulfillment in the total impact, that sense of accomplishment will continue to breed success down the road.

“The Little Blue Band That Could”

The Little BlueBand That CouldIn 2008, Claudia Taylor Johnson High School (CTJ) in San Antonio, Texas, opened, splitting from Ronald Reagan High School shortly after its band placed second at Bands of America Grand Nationals. Many of our upperclassmen did not have a choice to remain at Reagan, and they were highly discouraged moving away from such an incredible band program to start over at a new school with so many unknowns.

Although the first two seasons were challenging, the younger students in the band who did not have the same connection with Reagan were endlessly optimistic. Many underclassmen nicknamed the marching band “The Little Blue Band that Could,” playing off the classic children’s book, “The Little Engine that Could.” As the band improved during those early years, the energy and enthusiasm spread quickly. While the students weren’t chanting “I think I can, I think I can,” our staff made a collective effort to build up our students to move from thinking they could be great to knowing they could.

The Big Picture

To build a culture of excellence, we constantly met with students in those years to talk about specific big picture ideas, including:

  • The importance of structure and organization: Protocols, policies and procedures can help students thrive in rehearsals and around the band hall. Have a process for everything students do. Consider smaller details like how they line up water jugs and instrument cases along the front sideline of the field to larger details like what they do before they play, such as a “set” or “ready” position. The structure will help keep rehearsals moving forward during the more challenging months of the year and will also maintain a professional environment.
  • Claudia Taylor Johnson High School band's first rehearsal What excellence looks and sounds like: Consider watching videos or playing audio recordings for students of professional groups, as well as great groups their own age. Students will learn to admire professional recordings, but they can learn as much from listening and watching great examples of their peers performing.
  • Why commitment is important: Students must learn to finish what they start. Help students learn to rest when they get tired, not to quit.
  • What it means to push through boredom: As Joe Dixon, one of CTJ’s brass instructors, often reminds us, “Children need to learn to be bored.” Students have phones at their disposal all the time and can instantly entertain themselves with video games or social media. Working through the challenges of playing an instrument and perfecting music can seem boring in comparison, and students must learn how to push through this boredom to achieve success.
  • How to follow through and develop a “stick-to-it” attitude: This is tied to the two prior points —commitment and learning to be bored. Students who are committed will follow through and find success through delayed gratification. Students who learn patience through band will ultimately translate this practice to other endeavors or pursuits in their lives.
  • Overcoming failure: Students must learn how to bounce back when they don’t achieve a goal or don’t get what they want. Learning to cope with failure is a powerful way to grow an organization because students will likely fall three times before they are on their way.
  • The rewards of hard work: The final concerts and performances of a school year are some of the very best rewards for hard work. Students also learn time management, bond with their peers and develop conflict resolution skills through their hard work and participation in band.
  • The sense of accomplishment when achieving goals: Celebrating success is more fun when you do it with others. In this case, students learn how special it can be to celebrate victories large and small with their peers.
  • Teamwork: Teamwork makes the dream work. Students learn that many hands make light work, and they learn how to function in a hierarchy of leadership. Sometimes students will be the queen bee and other times, the drone.
  • Faith, Honor, Love: Most importantly, students learn to have faith in one another and in the process. They learn the value of keeping their word and honoring those who have come before them. And they learn to love their teammates, their school, their community and their family.

Claudia Taylor Johnson High School Marching Band Getting our students to a place where they were excited to be great together and to believe in the journey was a process! It was paramount for us to have the values listed above in place before we ever attempted to improve as musicians and athletes.

In 2010, when CTJ made finals at its first regional and advanced to the state marching contest for the first time, our senior class who had started their band journey at Reagan was so satisfied to see the CTJ band improving quickly. It went beyond placement and was all about progress.

And four years later, the freshmen who helped start the band at Johnson made finals at Grand Nationals as seniors, with their bandmates from the prior three years celebrating the rapid ascent of “The Little Blue Band that Could.”

Changing Jobs, Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs

People change jobs for various reasons. When the time comes to change jobs, business and stress can take over. As with many new experiences, there isn’t always an owner’s manual for what to do.

Furthermore, emotions on different sides cloud judgment and make the process even more difficult. Below are some things to consider when pursuing or accepting a new job.

Can You Keep a Secret?

Leaving a position can be difficult, while starting a new job can be exciting. Many people want to share the news. My advice is to keep it to yourself as long as possible, and when you start to tell anyone, start with your inner circle.
I subscribe to the thought that only one person can keep a secret. One time, I met with a trusted administrator, asked them for a letter of recommendation, and requested that they keep this under wraps. They assured me that this would be confidential. By the end of the day, the entire admin team and most teachers knew that I was applying for another position. I then had to deal with some additional meetings, rumors and other distractions that took away from my primary focus.

Emotions Can Cloud Your Judgment

We are working for businesses that don’t want to spend more money than they deem necessary. Do your research before becoming emotionally invested in a potential new job. For example, the new job may start you at the bottom of the pay scale. Also, look at the max number of years of service credit the school offers — on the high end, this might be 15 years. Run some financial projections on what you would be making, gaining or losing, and determine what you can handle before getting too excited about the new position.

Salary and personal/professional satisfaction do not always go hand in hand. There are certainly schools that may pay you more, but schedule, benefits and overall building climate are less than ideal. In other cases, the work environment is excellent, but the pay is low. Ideally, you want great pay and a great working environment, but you may have to choose. Ask yourself which is more important.

There isn’t much room to negotiate in terms of education pay and benefits in public schools, but you can always ask about years of service. I have heard of some districts granting teachers all their years of service.

friend group g1Kr4Ozfoac unsplashFriend Groups Might Change

Some loneliness can set in at your current job after you announce that you are leaving. Your colleagues will undoubtedly care, but they also have to continue their careers and life paths as well. I have had coworkers stop talking to me once they learned that I was leaving. You may find that some colleagues will be upset with your decision to leave. Their attitude may be because your resignation or other choice reflects on them, and they may subconsciously question their own decisions. Their attitude doesn’t matter because they aren’t paying your bills. Continue on your path — not everyone will understand.

Remember that oftentimes friendship is easy when it’s convenient. In other words, it’s easier to be friends with people who are physically close to you like colleagues and neighbors.

Don’t be surprised if you have little interaction with people from previous jobs who you thought were good friends. It will be on YOU to continue fostering these relationships if you choose to. These people are not bad — you have exited their environment, and many relationships rely on convenience and proximity.

Changes in friend groups can be difficult to deal with. Luckily, a new job comes with so much responsibility that you may be too busy to suffer the loss. And, a new job comes with new people. Luckily for you, people always want to meet the new music teacher.

It’s Tough Being the Rookie … Again

One of my mentors, Mike Fiske, retired director of bands at Joliet Central High School in Illinois, offered the best advice about changing jobs: “When you leave and go somewhere new, all of your credibility is left behind.” This can be a tough pill to swallow when changing positions, especially if you were successful at your previous school.

Parents and students at your new school will test you — don’t take it personally. Like you, they are also dealing with change. It would be best to play by their rules before establishing new traditions or bringing new flavors to things.

teacher standing in front of room Students might challenge many of the changes you want to implement. It helps to be aware of the teacher you are replacing and the program’s history. If the program was successful and everyone loved the previous director, don’t change too much at first. If you do, be ready to hear complaints from students and parents. Again, it’s not personal — people tend to think about what they’re losing rather than what they will be gaining. Be patient and guide them through this.

Even with many years of teaching experience, you’ll feel like a rookie at a new job. However, you’ll be able to navigate the waters quickly. I’ve worked at four schools. They all had different procedures for securing buses, entering financial transactions and requesting field trips, but the process for each was the same. (And most of these things will be covered in the new teacher training.)

Ask questions, be aware of the process and use the new school’s procedures. Many people waste a lot of mental energy wishing the new procedures were the same as the old, familiar processes. Acceptance is the way to move past this.

When I started my first teaching job, I didn’t know the answers to questions, and I didn’t know what questions to ask. In the next two to three years, I still didn’t know the answers to questions, but I did know what questions to ask. In other words, during the first few years of your teaching career, you don’t know what you don’t know.

Your Letter of Resignation

Administrators at your current school may want to quickly start the hiring process to find your replacement. They have a lot of work to do, so I don’t blame them for this. However, you need to do what is best for you. Do not get rushed into submitting a letter of resignation until after you are board-approved by your new position.

When I changed jobs the first time, I wasn’t sure how to “quit” my job. I stressed about writing the perfect letter of resignation. In reality, the letter serves to leave the job and protect your remaining pay and benefits. My advice is to be direct, to the point and give a quick thank you for the opportunity.

Here’s a sample script:

Dear Principal and Board of Education:

Please accept this letter as my resignation as band director, including all stipend and volunteer positions associated with this role, effective at the end of my contract on July 31.
I thank everyone in the school and community for their support of the band and me. In my years at this school, I always felt a great deal of respect from the administration and faculty toward the music program, and I will never forget my time working with these great students.

Sincerely,
Donald Stinson

Submitted on May 25

Let’s break down a few things with this letter. I resign from the position at the beginning of the letter. I then provide a heartfelt, but brief, thank you. I don’t burn any bridges, nor do I make any demands. I did the job, my time doing the job is coming to an end, and the letter is making it official.

But the crucial part is the date. As long as you are switching jobs in the middle of the school year, date your letter on the last day of your contract. If you’re unsure of this date, look at your contract or ask a trusted colleague. Why is this important? Benefits and access to your data. How do I know this? Because one time, I made the mistake of resigning from a position “effective at the end of the school year.” The school board accepted this and notified me that they would pay me to the end of my contract but that my insurance benefits would expire in May. My insurance benefits with my new job would not begin until August/September. My wife was pregnant, and we were extremely anxious about going three months without insurance. After some phone calls to the HR department, administration and countless other helpers in my current district, I was allowed to submit a corrected letter of resignation dated to the end of my contract. Correcting my error took a lot of extra work, but I greatly appreciated my current district administrators and staff for helping me — they didn’t have to do this.

When You Leave, All Your Files and Emails Go Away

When leaving a position, back up important files to a few different mediums, including online cloud storage, hard drives or thumb drives. Once these files are gone, it is challenging — and sometimes impossible — to get back.

If you have files on an online drive, make sure to copy them or change ownership of the drive. I have lost essential files because the school shut access to my old email address, and that was the only account registered to the files.

Usually, school districts will close your email either near the end of your contract or sometime soon after. If you have important emails that you would like to save, forward them to another email address. You can download some large files, but these can be difficult to open on different programs.

Finally, ensure that you leave access to essential files for your replacement. Documents such as your instrument inventory, music library and any crucial templates are extremely helpful to an incoming teacher. You don’t have to go overboard with prepping materials for your replacement, but try not to make the job harder for them.

Your Students and Their Emotions

One of the hardest things to work through when you leave a position is your students’ emotions, which are amplified for a teacher who has taught students over multiple years or has spent extended time with them in extracurricular musical groups. Your students will go through the entire emotional spectrum when a change happens.

I was prepared for students to be sad when I announced that I would be leaving, but I was not prepared for their anger. The students who were angry later told me that they felt abandoned and didn’t know how to deal with this. Yet, they pulled through and are doing OK. This is the important part — they will be OK. They are just emotionally invested in their program and YOU.

The Final Months in Your Old (Current) Job

If you secure a new job before the end of the school year, you might be witness to a new candidate going through the interview process to replace you. This process could be anything from interviewing in a committee to doing a conducting interview in front of the ensemble. Be prepared for this. Although you are leaving the school, it can be tough watching the process of filling your position.

Push through to the end! When something new and exciting is on the horizon, you may feel motivation drop in your current position. Think about what you would tell your students and expect of them. I always want to be remembered as someone who didn’t “check out” before the school year was over.

When your last day comes, try to schedule some time for yourself at the school. Double-check that you have all your things, and before turning in your keys, spend some time reflecting in your soon-to-be former classroom. And when it’s time to leave, go and start your next chapter.

man sitting with head in his handsBuyer’s Remorse

Another emotional situation to be aware of is buyer’s remorse. Buyer’s remorse often sets in when things are tough at the new job during the first few months, and you miss your old colleagues and the sense of familiarity at your old school.

Everyone is different, but for me, November usually marked the time when I came to accept that I made the right move. After winter break, I still had some work to do, but the second semester reset undoubtedly helped with this.

However, in one job, I could not convince myself that I had made the right move.I gave this position a two-year shot, but it was not the best move. I felt like I was stuck. However, …

You’re Never Stuck Anywhere

Another one of my mentors, Dr. Charles Menghini, the former director of bands at VanderCook College of Music in Chicago, always told me, “It’s a job, not a life sentence.” You’re never stuck.

He was right. The more experience you have, the more difficult it may be to leave a job based on pay, location, etc., but there is always a choice. It just may be a difficult choice. In the situation described above, I chose to leave and find a position that I could be more comfortable with. This may seem like a short time to be at one position, but ultimately it was what was right for me.

You go in, you do the job and then you leave. Leaving may mean retiring after 35 years, or it may mean seeking a new job after two years. Don’t focus on whether you are blissfully happy day in and day out — every job has its ups and downs — instead, ask yourself if you are in a place where you can progress and make an impact on yourself, the students and the community. If you are, then consider yourself lucky!

Do you have any additional advice for music educators who are looking to change jobs? Email your tips and suggestions to educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 1: Tips to Improve Your ResumePart 2: Interviewing Tips and Part 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers.

Changing Jobs, Part 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers

During an interview, you’ll be asked a battery of questions, but remember that it’s essential for you to ask the interview committee questions, too.

The primary reason is to find out information to help you determine whether the employer, school and program are a good fit for you. The secondary reason is that by asking meaningful questions, you will appear prepared and invested in the job that you have applied for.

Prepare 10 or so questions, and bring the printout to the interview. If you are interviewing with a panel of people, have more questions ready. Sometimes you will be told ahead of time who will be interviewing you, and other times, you won’t know until you walk into the interview room. I’ve interviewed for jobs with one person running the interview all the way up to a panel of 15 people

If you don’t have the information on the interview committee ahead of time, you can make some reasonable assumptions. I always have prepared questions directed toward administrators, teachers, parents and students. Furthermore, I have questions for music specialists and non-music specialists.

interview panel Dx6lpoMAG Y unsplashAdditional tips on questions for the interviewer:

  • Only ask questions that you can’t find answers to on your own. For example, don’t waste a question asking about school enrollment because you can probably find this information online.
  • Remember, you can ask a few additional questions over email after the interview. I have included a follow-up question or two in my “thank you” email that I send to each person on the interview panel.
  • And if you are offered the position and accept it, you can ask even more questions to prepare for your new job.

I will assume that you are comfortable preparing questions related to music or your specific content, so many of the questions below are more general.

Questions for Students

Some interview committees include current students. I’ve seen too many interviewees tell the panel that they are student-centered, yet they never engage with the students sitting in front of them.
If there are students on a panel, I address them first. I want the committee to see how I interact with students. From a more realistic standpoint, schools don’t exist without students, so that’s where my primary focus goes.

Consider some of the following questions directed toward the current students:

  • What are some of your favorite and the most important traditions in your music program?
  • Besides being an effective rehearsal technician and conductor, what do you want from your director?
  • Your current director is a great teacher and a great person, and I know he/she will be missed. What do you think the new director can do to ease the transition and help your music family continue to succeed?
  • Do you have an example of a piece, lesson or experience in your music class that has really stuck with you?
  • What input do you expect to have in your music program?
  • You are the most consistent part of the music program. What do you think the new director/teacher needs to know when stepping into this program? How would you be able to help the new teacher? (This is an excellent question to direct toward a program that might have a revolving door of teachers/directors.)

Questions for Parents

Some interview committees include band/orchestra/choir parents. As with the students, make sure to engage with the parents. This is another opportunity for the administration or interview head to see you interact with key stakeholders. Consider directing some of the following questions toward the parents:

  • What do you think this program means to your student?
  • What do you think your student will remember most about this school and this program when he/she has graduated?
  • What do you want from your child’s music teacher?
  • What input do you expect to have in your music program?
  • When talking to parents from other schools, what is the first thing you tell them about your music program?
  • What do you see as the ideal relationship between director and parent organization for those involved in the parent booster organization?

Questions for Faculty Committee Members and Administration

Many of these questions could be used when speaking to either teachers or supervisors/administrators.

  • closeup hands pexels 3760067

    How does the administration measure the success of the department?

  • What are the most critical skills and attributes you are looking for in filling this position?
  • What are you looking for in a colleague?
  • At my current position, we encourage the students to become successful musicians, not just music, choir or orchestra members. What opportunities exist for students to branch outside of their specific music, orchestra or choir world? Are these curricular or extracurricular?
  • What do you think the new teacher needs to do in the first six months to make the most significant impact on students?
  • Besides the goals outlined in the strategic plan, what life application skills and values do you expect students to achieve from the music department?
  • How does the administration feel the music program should support the community?

Additional Questions

The questions listed below are part of a document I have when preparing for job interviews. I pick and choose from this list depending on the job I’m applying for. Some questions can quickly be answered by an online search or phone call to someone familiar with the program. Others may be good questions to ask during your interview. Use your best judgment to determine what fits best.

  • Where has the emphasis of the program been?
  • How does the student body feel about the music program?
  • What are the conditions of the instruments, music library and uniforms?
  • What are the rehearsal facilities like (indoor/outdoor)?
  • Are rehearsals in the curriculum?
  • What is the current performance schedule?
  • Is there a booster organization in place?
  • Would the administration like to see the booster organization be more or less active?
  • How many students are involved with the music program?
  • When do the beginners in the district start?
  • What is your contact with the feeder schools?
  • Where do you see the music program in 3 to 5 years?
  • Is there a current budget for the music program? Can you share this information?
  • Is there a budget in place for instrument repairs?
  • Do you have a copy of the music library?
  • What is the school and program’s philosophy on competitions and festivals?
  • Is there a transportation budget for the program, and is the director in charge of it? Or is the district/building responsible for this?
  • Do students participate in solo and ensemble events?
  • Do students take private or group lessons? If not, would the district entertain a proposal for a private lesson program?
  • Are music parents supportive of their children in all activities, not only music?
  • Is there a summer program or music camp?
  • If I were fortunate enough to land this position, when could I begin to prepare (regardless of contract)?
  • Can new teachers serve on faculty committees? (I ask this on almost every interview, and the committee always gets excited about this. Only ask this if you are serious, as they will take you up on this offer).
  • If you could advance one thing about the music program, what would it be?
  • Is there a school newsletter/email in place for the parents? If so, Is the music program included in this paper regularly? If not, is it possible to create a music newsletter?
  • Is there a mentoring program in place for teachers new to the district?
  • Does the music program have a social media program manager in place?
  • Has the district implemented any programs or procedures to help teachers support students in the area of social and emotional learning (SEL)?
  • How has the district supported inclusivity and diversity in the fine arts?
  • Why is the position open? Has there been consistency, or is there a revolving door? (Don’t ask this in the interview; instead, find this info out behind the scenes.)

listen take notes WZROBIlY8Rg unsplashSome Other Thoughts

While your questions are being answered, listen actively and write down some notes. Some responses may need clarification. Be prepared to ask a follow-up question or restate and further explain the original question.

If you feel that a prepared question may come off as judgmental, trust your gut instinct and don’t ask it. Either rephrase it or move on to another question.

Some interview committees will tell you how many questions you can ask. Others will not. If you aren’t given a set number, look for non-verbal cues. If responses from the committee members become shorter or if you notice people looking at their watches or getting antsy, start wrapping up.

It’s impossible to get answers to everything during an interview. You are looking for a snapshot of whether this position is a good fit for you. Formulate and select your questions to give you the best chance of making this decision. I have turned down second interviews because the initial answers to my questions during the first round did not sit well with me.

What questions do you ask during interviews? Do you have other tips or recommendations on interviewing for a job? Email them to us at educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 1: Tips to Improve Your Resume, Part 2: Interviewing Tips and Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs.

Changing Jobs, Part 2: Interviewing Tips

Interviewing for a job can be stressful, especially during the early years of your career. Below are some tips taken from my experiences as an interviewee and as an interviewer.

You Don’t Have to Memorize Anything

I brought notes and printouts with crucial information highlighted when I interviewed for jobs. This allowed me to refer to important school information, such as mission statements and goals. This info sheet included some information about me, including career highlights and meaningful experiences relevant to the position. You would think you could speak about yourself and your accomplishments off the top of your head, but in the heat of the moment, it’s easy to become flustered.

I also recommend having  the school report card printed out so you can share some fast facts about your school and the music program (read my article, “Dig Deeper: How to Read Your School Accountability Report Card”).

When answering questions, you can refer to your notes and the school accountability report to help refine and clarify your responses.

Keep Busy

Some great advice I received was to keep busy during the interview. A notebook and a pen allow you to have something to do with your hands — take notes! — during the interview. This shows that you are taking the interview seriously, and you can jot down the answers to any questions you might have had.

Also bring a bottle of water, which is yet another thing to do with your hands if you get nervous. This also allows you to have an excuse to take a “dramatic pause” before answering a question.

interview 2men pexels 5439438Have Your Elevator Pitch Ready

Almost every single job I’ve interviewed for began with “so, tell us about yourself.” Early on, I gave them my life story, goals, aspirations, dreams, favorite sports teams, social security number and my thoughts on the recent episode of whatever TV show I was watching. Later on, I streamlined this to relevant information that was true to me. Your answer doesn’t have to be the most creative or unique thing ever. It just has to be true.

Here’s my current answer: “I’m Don Stinson. I’m a music educator in the Chicagoland area. I have the drive to work with students and parents to help provide musical experiences that we could otherwise not do on our own. My focus is to help all students push themselves from wherever they are. My background and experience help students from low-income and underserved backgrounds push themselves toward success. I’m here today because I’m highly interested in discussing how my skillset and experiences could fit into your program, school and community.”

If you have a fascinating fact about yourself that you can pepper in, go for it. This can show some personality and set you apart. I once helped out with a choir performance in California and met Julie Andrews. This is a fun one to include, especially if any music teachers are on the committee.

Call Back on Your Experiences

During an interview, you will be asked several situational questions — what you would do in certain situations. If you’ve had an experience relevant to the question, you can refer to what you did (or what you wished you did!).

However, if you’re a new or newer teacher, you may have to answer hypothetically. Consider starting off with, “in this situation, I would…” and then respond. There’s a good chance that you will get questions regarding parent organization groups and out-of-school trips if you’re interviewing for a music teacher position. Questions regarding conflicts with colleagues with more experience have often come up as well. These are certainly points to ponder when preparing for the interview.

Then there are the questions that really threw me for a loop where I didn’t have a past experience to refer to, nor did I think about the situation as a hypothetical before the interview. So, I was honest and told the committee my process. I said that I wasn’t sure exactly what I would do in this particular situation, but my initial reaction would be to refer to the school’s policies. I would then seek out a colleague and administrator to help with my decision before acting. This was an elaborate way of saying, “I don’t know, but I will take steps to find out.” The committee was satisfied with this answer.

Remember, You’re Not Going to Live on Your Own Island

You’re interviewing to be a part of the overall teacher community in the school. Some music teachers like to be separate from the rest of the school, living on their own island. Education is better when we work together, and administrators see value in candidates who will do their best for the music program while thinking about the school’s overall mission. When discussing your vision for a music program, talk about how you and the program can fit into and benefit the entire school.

Only Tell Them What They Need to Know

Avoid being too forthcoming with details that are not relevant and won’t work in your favor.

Interviewer: “Don, tell us about one of your weaknesses.”

Me: “Well, sometimes I lose an entire night’s sleep because right when I’m about to doze off, I remember how I called my 5th-grade teacher ‘mom’ by accident, and the entire class laughed at me. I then think about this for six to eight hours, slowly pulling the bed covers over my head more and more.”

Interviewer: “Excuse me?”

Me: “My mistake. What I meant to say was ‘conducting.’ I’m always working on improving my non-verbal communication.”

A ridiculous example? Absolutely. But not too far off from what I’ve seen in some interviews. Openness and personality are great but staying on topic is essential during the interview process.

Be Up to Date on Current Focuses

In 2021, you should be up to date on social and emotional learning (SEL), hybrid learning and diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI). I hesitate to call these “trends,” but the reality is that education is constantly changing, and what is today’s focus will likely shift in the upcoming school years. When you interview for a job, it’s assumed that you can teach and describe your content. However, many interview committees will ask questions about current focuses in education. When in doubt, refer to the school’s mission statement or look up the school board minutes to view recent presentations and topics that are important to the district.

Don’t Expect Anyone to Ask for Your Materials — Rather, Reference Them

I’ve had interviews where I brought a portfolio of my work. It was a beautiful binder that had evidence of almost everything significant in education that I had done.

No one looked at it.

This happened multiple times. Eventually, I learned that I had to be the one to reference my portfolio. If I could elevate one of my answers with a piece of evidence, I would then take it out of the binder and show it off. Then, the committee was interested in looking at the rest of my materials.

Some other advice I received was simply asking to leave your portfolio with the committee at the end of the interview. “I’d like to leave this portfolio so you can take a look at some other programs and methods that have benefitted my students. I can reach out in a week to an administrative assistant to pick this up.” In most instances, I got my portfolio back during a second-round interview.

YOU Are also Interviewing THEM!

Don’t forget — the interview isn’t just about them asking you questions. It is also about you and finding out where you fit best. Ask questions, and if you need some follow-up, ask more questions. There have been jobs that I wasn’t particularly interested in, but I took the interview anyway. I found out through the interview process that the position would be an excellent fit for me. I’ve also found the opposite — jobs I thought that I really wanted, but then red flags came up during the interview process.

Figure out what is important to you when looking for an employer. At the start of your career, you probably just want a job. But as you gain more experienced, and if you decide to look for other positions, you can begin vetting potential employers. I’ve always heard that it’s easier to get a job when you already have a job. This absolutely turned out to be true for me. Having the security of an existing job helped me feel more comfortable and confident and allowed me to be more honest in what I was looking for in another employer.

Create Questions Based on the Music Program AND the School

Have questions prepared and ask them! I’ve never walked away from a job interview without asking some questions (read my article, “Changing Jobs, Part 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers.

Start by using data points from the accountability report of the school that you are applying to. When you create questions, you are coming from a place of curiosity and seeing how you can grow, learn and offer your own skillset to this program and school. Avoid coming from a place of judgment. Some schools may appear to be underperforming on paper in academics, for example. Don’t ask, “Why is the majority of the school failing math?” Rather, rephrase the question to: “What interventions are in place for struggling students, and how can the music teacher best support these school initiatives?” Then, move on to questions regarding the music class or program.

If you’re a new teacher, asking “can new teachers serve on faculty committees” shows a genuine interest in wanting to be a part of the entire school culture. Just be careful — if you offer something up during the interview, the school and administration will likely take you up on it!

From a strategic standpoint, asking questions gets the interview committee talking. You simultaneously learn about the position and school while also getting a break from answering questions yourself!

I typed up and printed out my questions when I interviewed for jobs. I had this sheet handy during the interview process and took notes on it because chances are that some of your questions will be answered during the interview process. This helped me to avoid being redundant. I had a few interviews early on where I was nervous and didn’t write much down. I looked pretty silly asking a question that the committee had already spoken about earlier in the interview.

I’ve found that 10 prepared questions work well. Once you have your questions, consider organizing them from most to least important. Then, select the question you will ask last (your closer). During the interview, three or four questions will probably get answered. When it’s your time to ask questions, select three. Take notes on the answers and ask any quick follow-up questions if necessary. Finally, ask a closing question that makes it clear that your are interested in the position.

Ask for the Job

Do you want the job? Then ask for it!

At the end of the interview, consider a closing statement. It can be short (“Thank you for the opportunity to interview. I hope I have made it clear that I would love to be a part of this learning community”) or a little more detailed (“Thank you so much for meeting with me today. I was especially impressed by your dedication to including the music program alongside other academic disciplines in the school. If I were to be fortunate enough to work for your school and community, when would I be able to begin preparing?”).

interview practice pexels 1181715Practice, Practice, Practice

Just like practicing an instrument, the more you interview, the more comfortable you will become with the process.

Find time with a trusted colleague or two to practice your interview skills. My best friend and I would help each other out by cold-calling each other when we were interviewing. I would randomly get a call from him, asking, “Mr. Stinson, this is generic music program calling you for an interview. Please tell me how you might incorporate new techniques to include all types of learners in your performance music classroom.” I would answer, he would say “thank you” and hang up. Later that day, I’d get another call from him with some feedback.

In-person practice can help immensely. I’ve always had trouble with eye contact and body language. So, for a particularly exciting job prospect, I had some friends run a mock interview for me. The stressful part? I had them seated extremely close to me, and they hit a buzzer every time I broke eye contact for more than a few seconds. This got me on track quickly (although I tricked them a few times by simply looking at a spot on the wall behind them).

Silence is OK

You don’t have to fill every second of silence with words or sounds. When practicing for your interview, take a pause of two to three seconds before answering. This will feel like an eternity at first, but it’s one way to become comfortable with the silence. Think of this in terms of music — have you ever heard a phrase that just had too many notes? Rests are not only OK, but they are necessary! I’ve even asked the interviewer if I could have a few seconds to write down some notes before answering. They were always OK with this. After 20 seconds, I replied with a much more cohesive answer than what was previously in my head.

Saying Thank You

My personal preference is sending a handwritten thank-you note after the interview. However, email is much more timely and reliable when sending a follow-up. I learned from being on committees that there can be a quick turnaround in some cases. Within a few hours of the interview, I would send a quick email to each committee member (how did I remember who was on the committee? I wrote their names down on the notebook I mentioned above). I triple-checked the spelling of their name and sent an individualized email.

Dr. Johnson:

I appreciate the opportunity to interview at your school today. I was especially impressed by the student greeters at the office and how proud they were of their community. I was very interested in this position before, but after meeting some faculty, staff, and students, your school is one that I would be very fortunate to be a part of.

Sincerely,
Don Stinson

Rejection

You put in all of the prep, you practiced and then you interviewed. One of two things will happen — you either get the job, or you don’t. Now what? Either way, you’ve gained interview experience.

Rejection will come in a few different ways. In some instances, you’ll receive an email or a phone call saying, “thanks, but no thanks.” If there is an opportunity to ask some follow-up questions, by all means do so, but focus on yourself. Don’t ask questions about other candidates. Hiring processes are usually strict and confidential, and employers open themselves up to legal trouble if they say certain things. You can certainly ask, “Do you have any feedback for me that I could use for future job interviews?” or “Was I missing certain skills or experience that would have been beneficial for this position?”

Rejection may also come in the form of silence. I’ve been on the receiving end of this before, and it’s not fun. Two weeks went by after an interview, and I didn’t hear anything. I knew deep down that I didn’t move on in the process but had trouble accepting it. Eventually, I heard on social media that another candidate had moved on.

Although I wish that every hiring committee would contact candidates with a “yes” or “no,” the reality is that many committees don’t. Most committees have a timeline in place but avoid calling or emailing their final candidate(s) until at least a few days after this deadline. Remember, while the interview and hiring decision are essential to you, the callback goes down the administrator’s to-do list when something like a fire drill or contact tracing comes up.

Rejection hurts at the moment. You’ll have questions and maybe some anger or self-doubt. I do a little planning ahead of time. If I get the job, I’ll go out to dinner. If I don’t get the job, I would still go out to dinner. Either way, I treat myself not for success or failure but rather as a resolution.

Acceptance

On the other hand, you get a call saying, “Congratulations! We’d like to offer you a position in our school district!” If you are dead set on this position and have all of the information you need, it’s an easy decision!

Otherwise, consider saying thank you and asking if you could have some time to think before accepting. You may get a little pushback from an administrator who wants to get a candidate to the upcoming board meeting, but if you are not 100% sure, take the time to consider. This is your time to ask for clarification on years of service credit, benefits, schedule, etc. Then, once you’ve mulled it over, you can call the school back with your decision. If it’s a yes, it’s an easy phone call to make. If you decide that the school is not a great fit for you, a simple “thank you, but at this time, I’m going to have to respectfully decline the offer” will work.

Do you have other tips or recommendations on interviewing for a job? Email them to us at educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 1: Tips to Improve Your ResumePart 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers and Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs.

Changing Jobs, Part 1: Improve Your Resume

A good resume is the first step in landing a job interview. Below are some tips to improve your chances of standing out in a pile.

List the Most Important Things First

An old journalism rule is the inverted pyramid where the most important facts are presented first, and relevant but least important information is written about last.

That’s what a solid resume should look like. What are the top three to five most impressive parts of your career? Put them at the top quarter of the first page of your resume. These could be things like a prestigious school you attended, an important certification you received, a new program you started or a big performance.

Decide on a Format

I format my resume in this order:

  • Credentials
  • Professional Teaching Experience
  • Accomplishments & Distinctions
  • Education
  • Related Experience
  • Memberships
  • References are available upon request

Under each header is the relevant experience with some bullet point descriptors. My format is not the right way, but simply one way to do it. I currently have 15 years of professional teaching experience — that’s why this is near the top. If I was in my first five years of teaching, I might move “Education” closer to the top. You could always combine sections and list any accomplishments under Professional Teaching Experience regarding the relevant employer.

For a more descriptive sample, this is what my “Professional Teaching” section might look like:

2016- present      Professional Teaching: Director of Bands, Joliet Central High School, Joliet, IL  

  • Director of two curricular band ensembles; AP Music Theory instructor; Jazz Band director; Marching Band director; Pep Band director; Chamber Ensemble director.
  • Created and coordinated a Guest Artist Series of national and international performers, including Dr. Leah Schuman, graduate of the Eastman School of Music, and Omar al Musfi, Syrian Recording Artist.
  • Coordinated major travel and performance events to Gatlinburg, Tennessee, Chicago, and NYC.
  • 2020: Joliet Central Symphonic Band invited to perform at David Geffen Hall in Lincoln Center in New York City; national invitation, solo act performance.
  • Created, proposed, and received approval for “Introduction to Band” course for 2020-2021 school year.
  • 2017: Marching Band selected to perform at the Chicago Thanksgiving Day Parade.
  • 2019: Symphonic Band: Superior Rating at IHSA; Awarded Best of Day.
  • 2017, 2018, 2019: Symphonic Band selected to perform at the University of Illinois Superstate Band Festival.
  • 2017, 2018, 2019: Selection to perform at the Chicagoland Invitational Concert Band Festival.
  • 2016: created second jazz group, Jazz Lab, due to student interest.
  • 2016 to present: Community events, including planning and participation in the Veteran’s Day Ceremony.
  • Launched Commissioning Project for 2018-2019 to create new band music; launched fundraising campaign called “Buy the Sound.” Project was fully funded in less than three weeks with Hollywood composer and Central Alum Jermaine Stegall.
  • 2016, 2017, 2018: Recipient: JTHS Foundation Grants.
  • 2016: Recipient: Give a Note Foundation Grant, including $2,500 and a visit from a Radio Disney Artist. Matching grant from the Country Music Awards Foundation.
  • 2016: Recipient of Music Technology Grant from Ableton, Inc.

Be Mindful of Putting Your Contact Information

I list my name, phone number and personal email address on my resume — I do not include my address. Including your home address can either make you more desirable if you’re an out-of-state candidate, or it can make an employer apprehensive about interviewing you based on location. When in doubt, it’s OK to leave it off.

Do NOT use your current work email to apply for other jobs. And be mindful of your personal email address — yourname@email.com will work fine, but if your email address is  2Cute4You@puppycuddles.email, you should change it to something a little more generic.

resume friend pexels 4063797Have Someone Look It Over

Once you have completed your resume, have two or three people look it over — close friends who know you and your work will offer valuable feedback. Also, consider reading your resume out loud to catch typos and any awkward wording. It’s essential to ensure that your presentation and grammar are consistent and free of misspellings. Believe it or not, I’ve seen resumes where candidates misspelled their current employer!

Constantly Update Your Resume

Constantly update your resume even if you’re not looking for a job. It’s a lot easier to keep track of what you are doing or have done if you regularly update your resume.

I recommend having a long-form and a short-form resume. My long-form version includes everything I’ve done that is related to my career. Every job, committee, teaching lesson, side work, etc. is included in my long-form resume, which is over 10 pages long. Think of the long-form resume as a written scrapbook of everything you’ve done.

If I’m applying for a job, I can pull relevant information from long-form resume and summarize it onto a new file that I can personalize and tailor to the job that I’m applying for. This new file becomes my short-form resume and the one that I submit

For example, If I’m applying for a high school job, I put more information regarding what I’ve done that relates to high school teaching, such as relevant job experience, working with marching bands and judging high school association auditions.

resume brag pexels 5915239Brag About Yourself

This is your shot — your resume should showcase how great you are! You are literally competing for this job, so do what you have to do to ethically and morally win a chance at the position. Related to listing the most important items first, are you exceptionally good at something? List it!

I’m a fan of letting your work speak for itself, but you have to let potential employers know what you can do and have done. The goal is to get an interview where you can talk about your accomplishments, but you have to “wow” them with your resume first!

I pride myself on community service and having our ensembles contribute to our community. So I list that we perform at multiple community events each year. Another item I’m particularly proud of is that my students have the opportunity to play with some nationally known guest artists. Both of these brags go near the top of my resume. Think about what you do well and include them in your resume. Maybe it’s related to recruitment (include numbers and percentages of how much your program has grown), after-school programs (include any obstacles or problems you solved to get these started) or relationships with colleagues and students (include the impact of these relationships to your program).

Don’t Overthink Length

Ask 10 people about how long a resume should be, and you’ll get 10 different answers. So here’s the 11th opinion: Focus more on the content. If you have so many experiences and initiatives that take up three pages, go for it. It’s also OK if you have a tight one-page resume that summarizes and showcases your career and accomplishments. I haven’t found many administrators with a hard rule on resume length.

Sometimes, More Words Are Better

Which of these options sounds better?

  • “Coordinated major performance and travel events involving students, parent groups and travel companies. Worked with district officials to ensure safety and logistic protocols, including overnight regulations, transportation logistics and rehearsal schedules.” OR “Planned a band trip.”
  • “Guided and provided high school students with authentic leadership experiences through leading sectionals and rehearsals with sender school students.” OR “Led a summer music camp with student involvement.”

resume update pexels 5915152List Other Relevant Information

Do you hold Google educator certificates? List it! Or did your district require you to participate in restorative practice circle training, response to intervention (RTI) or Creating Independence through Student-owned Strategies (CRISS)? List these as well.

I also have a short list of professional memberships at the bottom of my resume, along with some relevant experience such as ensembles I’ve performed in or educational writing that I’ve done. My self-imposed rule is that whatever I list must be relevant to education or music. Some people put personal items or hobbies on their resumes. I don’t, but this shouldn’t hurt if you include them.

To List or Not to List: Your Student Teaching Experience

This depends. In my opinion, include your student teaching experience if you have had only one job or if you are in your first few years of teaching. By year five, you can leave off student teaching.

An exception would be if your student teaching placement has some connection to where you are applying. For example, if an administrator at the school you are applying to worked at your student teaching placement, or if you are applying to the school where you student taught, then definitely include your student teaching information.

There Are No Rules

The big takeaway is: There are no official rules when it comes to resumes. There are certainly some norms and expectations but avoid stressing out about the perfect format. You can choose to present your resume in chronological order or organize it by project. The key is to ensure your resume includes accurate information that sells your skills in a consistent and organized fashion.

Do you have other tips or recommendations on improving your resume? Email them to us at educators@yamaha.com.

Read the other articles in the Changing Jobs series — Part 2: Interviewing TipsPart 3: Questions to Ask Potential Employers and Part 4: Things No One Tells You About Switching Jobs.

How to Play Electric Piano, Clavinet and Organ Sounds

There are many instruments that feature the familiar black and white keys of the piano. But don’t be fooled into thinking that, if you can play one, you will sound good playing all the others. Each instrument has its own design and sound, and requires some adjustment to your technique and style of playing.

The Four Main Food Groups

When it comes to keyboard instruments, there are four main “food groups,” as follows:

1. Acoustic Piano

The center of this universe is the acoustic piano, invented over 500 years ago and a mainstay of many genres of music, including classical music as well as jazz and pop. There are two main types: grand piano and upright piano. Check out this blog to learn the difference between them.

2. Electric Piano

The electric piano is an electro-mechanical derivation of the acoustic piano with a thicker, more “chimey” type of sound due to the fact that its hammers strike metal bars or reeds instead of strings. Although it was invented in the 1920s, the instrument came to prominence in the 1970s, where it became a staple of many forms of popular music, including jazz-rock and fusion.

3. Clavinet

The Clavinet is another electro-mechanical instrument, but one that is more closely related to the clavichord that had a distinctive metallic sound and was used widely in the Baroque and Renaissance eras. Clavinet sounds became a staple of the funk music of the 1970s, and, while not as popular today, can often come in handy when playing cover songs of the era.

4. Organ

Organ describes a family of keyboard musical instruments characterized by their sustained tone. There are many different types of organs, including pipe organs (mostly the domain of liturgical and secular music), “combo” organs (featured prominently in some pop and rock records of the 1950s and early 1960s) and tonewheel organs (used extensively in blues, jazz and rock — especially the prog rock of the 1970s and 1980s). If you’re learning a specific song, you can research it on the internet to find out what particular organ was used on the original recording.

Most current digital “portable” keyboards, digital pianos and stage pianos include sounds that were sampled from these four instruments, and learning how to play them correctly will help your music sound better. Since previous Well-Rounded Keyboardist blog posts have covered piano technique in some detail, I’ll assume you already have some familiarity and experience playing piano. In this article, I’ll provide some tips for adapting your playing style to electric piano, clavinet and organ sounds.

Playing Electric Piano Sounds

The electric piano has a thicker tonality than acoustic piano — especially “Rhodes”-style sounds — so you need to consider playing smaller chord voicings, using fewer notes. You should also avoid playing octaves in your left hand — something you’ll often do on acoustic piano. For example, here’s a basic, powerful way you might play a C Major chord on an acoustic piano:

Musical annotation.

When playing an electric piano sound, however, it’s better to simplify the voicing, like this:

Musical annotation.

In addition, when playing solo acoustic piano, it’s common practice to adopt a broken left-hand “stride” style, where you play a low bass note, sustain it using the damper pedal, and then jump up with the left hand to add a chord in the range below middle C, like this:

Musical annotation.

This doesn’t translate well to electric piano, however, so it’s better to lift the pedal before playing the chord:

Musical annotation.

In general, you should avoid holding down the sustain pedal during long passages when playing electric piano sounds, period. Doing this on acoustic piano produces a nice dreamy wash of sound, but on electric piano everything can quickly get jumbled and muddy-sounding if you’re not careful, so you need to pedal more often to keep the sound from becoming overbearing.

Electric pianos can vary tonally quite a bit, and the more earthy and hollow “Wurly” varieties work especially well when playing bluesy riffs and licks. In addition, those sounds “speak” nicely when played in a rhythmic and dynamic fashion, like this:

Playing Clavinet Sounds

The clavinet has a much thinner and string-based sound that is not unlike that of an electric guitar. Players of the original instrument back in the ’70s developed a very rhythmic, busy 16th-note style to get a super-funky feel (think Stevie Wonder’s “Superstition”). If you picture how bass lines are crafted for R&B music and then include some right-hand rhythmic figures, you’ll be on your way to playing clavinet sounds realistically.

Musical annotation.

In general, the chords you’ll base your parts on should be simple ones: mostly minor sevenths and dominant sevenths (with either a sharp ninth or natural one). No other alterations or color tones are needed.

Playing Organ Sounds

The organ is the most different keyboard out of the group that we’re discussing here. That’s because it sustains indefinitely, while all the others decay over time. Because of this, in general you should play more open and less busy parts when playing organ sounds.

Organ is used in many genres of music, so I won’t make any general recommendations about types of chords — just use the harmony that is appropriate for the genre you’re playing. Here’s an example of how a basic chord progression can be played using the kind of classic “combo” organ sound you’d find in the pop and rock records of the 1950s and 1960s:

Musical annotation.

Note: This audio clip played using a software emulation of a vintage Yamaha YC-10 combo organ.

As a rule, you should never use the sustain pedal when playing an organ sound. Organists connect chords and phrases together using smooth fingering choices only and will sometimes slide across the keys to get to the next chord.

Since organ is a sustaining sound, you should consider not playing down too low if you’re performing with a bass player — leave them some space so your instruments are not fighting one another in the same frequency area. That’s why you’ll sometimes see the organist playing with their right hand only, while using their left hand to operate other controls or to play another keyboard. That said, in jazz and blues it is common for the organ player to also cover the bass part, so the only chording will be done with the right hand. These genres will also at times use voicings that require you to stretch your hand a little, like this:

Musical annotation.

Note: This audio clip played using a software emulation of a tonewheel organ.

If you’re playing a sample of a tonewheel organ, you need to be aware that a big part of the sound is that of the rotating speaker that it is usually played through. These rotating speaker systems offer two speeds — fast and slow — and it is common for the organist to change between them while playing held chords. Your keyboard will most likely have a control like a footswitch or a button to allow you to “virtually” change speeds as you play. Here’s an example of what switching from the slow to fast speed and then back down sounds like.

Note: This audio clip played using a software emulation of a tonewheel organ.

Notice how it takes a little bit of time to spin up to full speed, and how the return back to slow speed occurs quicker — something that’s typical of the way the motors in a physical rotating speaker system work.

 

Check out this related posting: Layering Digital Keyboard Sounds

All audio clips played on a Yamaha P-515 except where noted.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

The History of Marching Drums at Mardi Gras

Drumming is a vital part of any marching ensemble and is especially important for the bands in New Orleans — a city that has been a cultural melting pot throughout its history. Nowhere is that more evident than in its music, which evolved from African, European, Caribbean and Native American influences.

One of the most visible examples of the city’s musical diversity is its marching band tradition. Such bands and “Second Lines” — a type of musical procession unique to New Orleans — are ubiquitous year-round in the Crescent City, but are most visible during the Mardi Gras season.

In case you’re wondering, “Mardi Gras” is French for “Fat Tuesday,” which falls each year on the day before Ash Wednesday, the start of Lent. The term is said to have derived from “Boeuf Gras,” which means “Fat Ox,” and referred to the 17th-century French tradition of eating fattened farm animals on the day before Lent. Fat Tuesday marks the end of two weeks of intense partying, with parades and marching bands abounding. It’s a celebration of the end of Carnival, which begins each year in early January and is celebrated in many countries throughout the world.

Multicultural Roots

Nearly fifty years after its French founding in 1718, New Orleans became a Spanish territory. It remained that way until 1800, when Spain ceded it back to France. Just three years later, the region became the property of the United States as a result of the Louisiana Purchase.

New Orleans was a busy port that was integral to the slave trade until the end of the Civil War. During the Spanish colonial period, slave laws were not as onerous as they would later become. Enslaved people were often given Sundays off and allowed some freedom of movement. Many would gather in Congo Square — a plaza located in the neighborhood that’s now called Tremé — to play and dance to the music from their home countries.

Congo Square played a significant role in developing the musical traditions of New Orleans, particularly drumming. The syncopated rhythms played in those gatherings, such as the “Bamboula,” are considered a foundation of what we think of today as New Orleans-style beats.

On the March

Closeup of a saxophone player in a marching band on a New Orleans street.
A New Orleans jazz funeral band.

Marching bands have long been a staple of New Orleans music. Their origins go all the way back to the 1830s, when they were primarily military-style ensembles. After the Civil War, emancipated African Americans began forming marching bands, which typically featured brass instruments and usually a pair of drummers: one on bass drum and one on snare.

Such bands became a staple of African American funeral processions, later known as “jazz funerals,” a tradition that continues today. The musicians would play slow dirges as the mourners marched to the cemetery along with the rolling casket. Then they’d play upbeat music on the way back, and the people would dance to celebrate the deceased person’s life. The rhythms they played had a heavy West African influence, as did the dancing of the marchers, which came from West African circle and ring shout dances.

The Second Line

Marching bands performed at many different social events in New Orleans, but the type of procession they formed at funerals became adopted at parades and eventually became known as the Second Line. (The “First Line” is the main section, featuring a full brass band.) The Second Line consists of additional musicians and assorted other marchers who dance and engage with bystanders — a style called “second-lining.” Some have termed this “the quintessential New Orleans art form — a jazz funeral without a body.”

Second Line drumming, particularly for the snare drum, is improvisational, which sets it apart from the highly regimented snare parts in traditional marching bands. At small Second Line parades, the person on bass drum will typically set a steady rhythm, emphasizing the first and third beats of a measure, while the snare player adds syncopated counter-rhythms. At larger parades like those held at Mardi Gras, a second line snare drummer typically follows the brass band, playing off of the marching beat with improvised polyrhythmic figures that can inspire the second line dancers or even the band itself.

Brightly colored individual Yamaha snare drums in staggered rows.
Yamaha MS-9414 marching snare drums.

Mardi Gras Celebrations

Up until the late 1800s, the inner-city population of New Orleans was largely shut out of Mardi Gras festivities, which had traditionally been a province of the upper class and consisted of fancy dress balls featuring classical musicians and ballroom dancing.

But at the turn of the 20th century, especially in poorer neighborhoods, people started their own Mardi Gras celebrations. They formed their own Social Aid and Pleasure Club organizations (better known as SAPCs or “krewes”), which began sponsoring parades and other events. Thus began a tradition that’s still a big part of the African American Mardi Gras experience: dressing up in costumes and trying to outdo rival krewes in both music and regalia.

Mardi Gras Music

At around the same time, Dixieland jazz and ragtime were developing as popular musical forms, and both had a major impact on the music played at Mardi Gras. Over the years, additional musical styles have become integrated into the festivities, including jazz, R&B, gospel and funk.

Today, if you’re lucky enough to visit New Orleans during Mardi Gras, you’re sure to see and hear lots of bands of all varieties — everything from small Second Line ensembles to full traditional marching bands with complete brass and marching percussion sections that include multiple snares, bass drums, toms and other marching instruments. High school and HBCU (Historically Black Colleges and Universities) marching bands from as far away as Kentucky, North Carolina and Virginia regularly perform at Mardi Gras parades in The Big Easy, with many incorporating Second Line rhythms into their material.

But Mardi Gras isn’t the only time of year you can enjoy New Orleans’ rich musical offerings. On any given Sunday afternoon, you can visit Congo Square and listen to (or even participate in) drum circles playing traditional West African polyrhythms and Second Line beats on hand drums. Or you can go to famous Bourbon Street in the French Quarter, where many bars offer live music nightly, featuring bands with drummers who interpret infectious New Orleans rhythms on standard kits instead of drumlines.

Whether you play drums or just like to listen to great music, the vibrant New Orleans music scene offers something for everyone!

Photographs by Deborah Gremito and Getty Images / Philip Gould

 

Yamaha offers a wide range of marching drums. Click here for more information.

The Music and Work of Omar Thomas

It’s no surprise that Omar Thomas has become an educator, arranger and composer of renown. Born to Guyanese parents in Brooklyn, New York, he pursued opportunities to play music like an athlete drawn to competition, taking up trombone in the fourth grade and writing original music by the eighth. In high school, he participated in the marching band and sang in the choir. “I was the kid who the director would ask to run a rehearsal if they weren’t around,” he says with a laugh.

Marching band leader in uniform with his band on field.
Omar Thomas in his marching band days.

Today, Thomas’ musical offerings shift comfortably between jazz and classical idioms, thanks to his broad exposure to multiple genres and a fervent desire to continually push the boundaries and blaze new trails.

FORGING A MUSICAL IDENTITY

In his early years at home with his parents, Thomas was exposed to a steady diet of classic soul, Soca, Calypso and Reggae that shaped his musical DNA. “All of that just kind of sat with me and I’m really proud that I was able to take that part of who I am and put it into my own music,” he says.

Omar Thomas and his mother at his graduate school graduation.
Omar with his mother.

“When I first started writing,” he continues, “I was really drawn to chords and to harmony, and I think that’s why jazz and R&B were such strong entry points for me because they were doing things harmonically that really spoke to me. I just sought to explore that as fully as possible … I wasn’t thinking too much about emotional catharsis or diving deep into issues and topics in those early days; I was feeling the harmonies and was really inspired to dig down and learn more from them. I would hear something and say, ‘What is that chord? What is going on there?’ I’d want to work with that chord progression and understand how it worked and see if I could manipulate it for my own uses.”

Thomas would eventually shift his interests in musical styles to more formal settings. After studying Music Education at James Madison University in Harrisonburg, Virginia, he moved to Boston in 2006 to pursue a Master of Music in Jazz Composition at the New England Conservatory of Music. While still a student at the conservatory, he was named assistant professor of Harmony at Berklee College of Music in Boston. He later joined the faculty at the Music Theory department at the Peabody Institute of Johns Hopkins University in Baltimore and is currently an assistant professor of Composition at the University of Texas at Austin.

MUSICAL HEROES

Thomas, like many artists, was deeply influenced by his musical heroes. For him, the real dynamic duo is Duke Ellington and Billy Strayhorn. “They were always so ahead of their time,” he says, “and were so prolific and had a deep love and appreciation for all art; you could hear that in all of their music. They were always searching for something; they had really deep and unique things happening orchestrationally that were just decades ahead of their time.

“I’m also inspired by who they were … You look at these old pictures of the Ellington big band, and it was very much integrated and people were hugging on each other and loving on each other.”

Duke Ellington, right, and Billy Strayhorn, left.

Thomas remains impressed by Ellington and Strayhorn’s resilience to create in an environment that was, at the time, openly hostile to Black people. “It just seemed like there was such a positive spirit about who they were and the situations in which they’d put themselves, even though they had to deal with a segregated country,” he says. “They were in situations where members of the band couldn’t walk through the front door … Despite that, they were able to maintain their class and their inspiration and their talent and their effectiveness and their reach.”

Sometimes things come full circle. In 2019, the National Band Association presented Thomas with the William D. Revelli Award for his composition Come Sunday, named as a nod to Ellington, making him the first Black American to receive that honor.

OF OUR NEW DAY BEGUN

The Black Experience can be painful and dark. In those moments, many turn to music for comfort and understanding. In 2015, Thomas was asked to write a piece of music to honor the nine victims of the mass shooting inside Mother Emanuel Church in Charleston, South Carolina. It proved to be a profoundly meaningful experience and a memorable musical journey.

Man in suit and tie hugging his son as they both smile for the camera.
Omar and his father.

Thomas’ first instinct was to say no. “It seemed like such a daunting task,” he recalls. But after receiving gentle encouragement from his father, he embraced the challenge and decided to title the piece “Of Our New Day Begun.” When Thomas learned that church members would be in the audience at the premiere, he realized that their attendance would help him in making decisions about how the piece should sound. “The most important thing to me was that they would hear themselves and their experience coming from the stage; to know that they were seen and they were loved and that this piece was about them.”

For that to happen, the music had to be authentic in its melodic and vocal presentation. To achieve this, Thomas used the Black National Anthem, “Lift Every Voice and Sing,” as a cornerstone melody, and instructed the choir director to leave the African American English vernacular in place, telling them, “Don’t teach the singers how to pronounce their T’s and their D’s, and how to make the vowels round, because that’s not what this is supposed to be.”

Inspired by trumpeter Terence Blanchard’s scores for Spike Lee’s films, Thomas decided to go for “something a bit cinematic.” He also wanted to make sure that there was a clear journey throughout the piece. “I had to think about what I wanted people to go through and how I wanted them to feel at the end of the piece specifically,” he says. “And so it made sense to end on the entire band playing the same note, growing and growing and growing and bringing back the stomping and the clapping as kind of one voice becoming many voices and the resilience in saying ‘this will not defeat us, nor will it define us.’”

Check out this video of the Dallas Winds performing “Of Our New Day Begun”:

CARIBANA

Some of Thomas’ earliest and fondest memories are those of carnival parades on Eastern Parkway in Brooklyn, which he remembers as being “loud, joyful and colorful,” speaking poignantly of “flatbed 18-wheeler trucks with massive rigs of speakers blasting this music out to the point where it’s literally shaking your body, overwhelming you in the best possible way.” This experience would serve to inform him when he was recently commissioned to write a celebratory piece for the 75th Midwest Clinic, which came to be titled “Caribana” — an exploration of the Caribbean music of his youth that would serve to honor his family and heritage.

Young boy with Carnival dancers.
A young Omar attending carnival in Brooklyn.

“For years I had been batting around the idea of exploring Soca and Calypso music in a symphonic setting, and this seemed like the perfect opportunity to do that,” he says. The name of the piece is taken from the annual festival held in Toronto — the largest Caribbean carnival outside of the Caribbean itself.

“I built everything off of the groove. The rhythms had to be very loose and free and over the bar line, and then the harmony underneath had to have this folksy intention.”

Despite his strong grounding in Soca/Calypso, Thomas found the composition process challenging because he didn’t have any models for how to express those rhythms and emotions in a symphonic setting. Convinced that the piece had to be conversational yet timeless, he made the decision to rely heavily on percussion, known in this style of music as the “engine room.”

“I built everything off of the groove,” he explains. “All of the rhythms were derived from what was happening in the engine room,” which in this case included glass bottles to simulate the sound of a car brake drum being struck — an element that’s specific to Soca music — as well as cowbell, wood block, congas and bongos. “The rhythms had to be very loose and free and over the bar line,” he says, “and then the harmony underneath had to have this folksy intention.”

The experience, according to Thomas, forced him to stretch and grow as a composer. “Walking that tightrope from beginning to end was really difficult,” he reports, “but I’m extremely happy with how it turned out.”

Check out this brief excerpt from “Caribana”:

BLACK HISTORY ISN’T LIMITED TO FEBRUARY

Omar Thomas in a stylized photo shoot wearing a combination of a Western business suit with a brightly colored cloth over one shoulder and ceremonial face painting.
Omar Thomas today.

Thomas continues to contribute to Black History, building a legacy for young black composers to follow. But this stretches well beyond any one particular month. “I can’t speak for everyone, but I don’t think Black History Month is as big of a thing in Black households because we live Black history every day,” he says. In Thomas’ view, Black history is celebrated year-round in how “the Black experience … helped to shape this country.”

Looking ahead, Thomas plans to focus on themes related to the Black experience that aren’t rooted in trauma and pain — to paint sonic tapestries in brighter hues so as to convey the fullness and joy of Black life.

“The reason there aren’t more pieces like Caribana speaks specifically to issues of representation,” he says. “There are almost no composers out there who come from the Caribbean. [But] people need the opportunity to be able to tell their stories. Space needs to be made for them to be able to share with the world who they are. I hope that my presence in the field gives others permission to create music and tell their stories.

“I don’t believe that music just breaks down barriers; I believe that music phases through barriers as if the barriers are not even there.”

“I don’t believe that music just breaks down barriers; I believe that music phases through barriers as if the barriers are not even there,” Thomas concludes. “You may come to a concert feeling a certain way, but you’ll leave feeling a completely different way if there is a message behind that music, no matter how high your defenses were when you walked in the door. I love, and I take very seriously, having that kind of power to effect change and to move hearts.”

Photographs courtesy of Omar Thomas and Getty Images / Afro American Newspapers/Gado / Contributor.

 

For more information, visit www.omarthomas.com

How (and Why) to Set the Volume Limiter on Your iPhone®

Did you know that listening to headphones or earbuds at loud levels can damage your hearing over time? The threshold for injury is based on a combination of how loud you listen and for how long.

If you’re in a noisy environment like a train or plane, it’s easy to inadvertently turn up the volume above safe levels. If you listen to headphones a lot, particularly in such environments, you could be putting your ears in danger. Excessive volume over time can injure the hair cells in your ears — which are critical for your hearing — and is irreversible. Damage enough hair cells, and you’ll start to permanently impair your hearing.

Fortunately, if you’ve got an iPhone®, you can use its Headphone Safety features to help preserve your hearing. In this article, we’ll describe what it is, and how to access it.

Hearing Is Not Linear

Human hearing is sensitive to a wide range of sounds. We can hear something as quiet as the rustle of a leaf or as loud as a jet taking off — and everything in-between.

To quantify such a wide range of sonic energy (referred to as sound pressure level or SPL for short), scientists and audio professionals use the decibel (dB) scale, which is logarithmic rather than linear. Raising the level by 3dB doubles the energy of a sound; raising it by 10dB increases it by a factor of 10; raising it by 20dB by a factor of 100.

With that in mind, here’s a list of common sound levels, sourced from a document published by the Centers for Disease Control (CDC):

List of sounds and their related decibels.

Mobile devices typically output music at up to about 110dB SPL, but anything over 85dB is considered unsafe. The longer you listen at unsafe levels, the more likely that hearing loss will occur, and the higher the SPL, the shorter the time in which that damage can happen. For example, impairment can occur after eight hours at 85dB, after two hours at 91dB, after 30 minutes at 97dB and after just 15 minutes at 100dB.

The bottom line is this: Whether you’re concerned about your long-term hearing safety or that of your child, or even if you just have sensitive ears, setting volume limits and monitoring your time of exposure is a good idea.

Your iPhone to the Rescue

Fortunately, the iPhone has an internal signal processor called a limiter, which allows you to set a volume threshold above which sound can’t go. Any audio that tries to exceed the threshold has its level automatically reduced — in layman’s terms, the signal is “squashed down.”

Even if you don’t use the limiter, your iPhone can track your exposure to audio through headphones over time, and you even have it notify you if you’ve exceeded safe limits. To make all of this work, you need to configure things correctly in your iPhone settings.

Setting Up Headphone Safety

To access the Headphone Safety features on an iPhone, follow these simple steps:

1. Open Settings.

2. Tap either Sounds or Sounds & Haptics, depending on your iPhone model.

2. Tap Headphone Safety:

Screenshot.

3. In the Headphone Safety screen (shown below), turn on Reduce Loud Sounds and set the limiter. If you listen less than eight hours a day, you can keep it at 85 decibels. Otherwise, turn it down to 80 decibels.

Screenshot.

4. In that same screen, turn on Headphone Notifications so that you’ll get a warning if you listen too loud for too long over a 7-day period.

Track It

Your iPhone keeps track of your exposure to loud sounds over time through the built-in Apple Health app. If you want to see how much exposure you’ve had over the last week, it’s easy:

1. Open the Health App.

2. Tap the Browse button at the bottom right.

3. Tap Hearing:

Screenshot.

4. Tap Headphone Audio Levels:

Screenshot.

On the Headphone Audio Levels page, you’ll see your exposure for the week in decibels and whether you’ve exceeded healthy levels:

Screenshot.

More Solutions

We’ve focused here on the iPhone’s Headphone Safety features, but Android™ phones also offer a similar limiting function. Called Media Volume Limits, it too lets you set a maximum audio level for listening on headphones.

Yamaha has tackled the issue of safe levels differently. Its newest wireless headphones and earbuds feature Listening Care technology, which allows the user to hear the music clearly at lower volumes. Humans hear midrange frequencies louder than lows or highs. Because of that, people tend to turn up the volume to better hear the bass and treble elements. Listening Care compensates for that by using equalization (frequency changes) to automatically make sure that you’re hearing an even tonal balance at any volume.

Listening Care is even more sophisticated on products like the Yamaha YH-E700A headphones. This model factors in not only the level of the music you’re listening to, but also the amount of background noise around you to create the ultimate tonal settings.

Wireless banded over headphones.
Yamaha YH-E700A headphones.

Use the Tech

Whether it’s Headphone Safety on iOS, Media Volume Limits on Android or Yamaha Listening Care, technical solutions are available to help you preserve your hearing when listening on headphones or earbuds. Take advantage of these sophisticated technologies so you can enjoy your music worry-free.

It’s also a good idea to get a hearing test. Not only will that show any problems you might have now, but it will serve as a good baseline to compare to when you get future tests.

The Teacher’s Role in Developing Good Practice Habits

In “The Different Types of Practice,” I presented several practice types, which teachers must understand in order to help their students develop effective practice habits.

From the very first piano lesson, it is the role and responsibility of the teacher to assign the work to be prepared between lessons and to provide students with the necessary tools to practice effectively at home.

For younger students, parental supervision, guidance and support during practice sessions are essential if they are to make good progress. Few students love to practice in the beginning, however, if parents and teachers are able to help students form good and regular practice habits, students are much more likely to achieve success in their music studies.

teacher watching student playing CLP 700 Upright Piano 1In the article “Not All Practice Makes Perfect: Moving from naive to purposeful practice can dramatically increase performance,” Dr. K. Anders Ericsson (1947–2020) and Robert Pool note the importance of the role of an expert teacher or coach in helping accelerate a student’s progression to expertise. In their view, having a teacher who is already familiar with the obstacles a student might encounter is invaluable to student success because the teacher can suggest ways to overcome such challenges. However, novice music teachers often assign homework to be practiced without offering any practice strategies or much in the way of practice advice to their students.

In the article, “Productive Practicing,” eminent piano pedagogue Robert Pace (1924–2010) outlines a number of excellent suggestions aimed at guiding teachers to better help their students accomplish more during practice sessions. Teaching our students to do more than simply practice using repetition but to play with musical thought and concentration can make a huge difference.

In my experience, ineffective practice can lead to mediocre playing as well as a general lack of enjoyment as a result. As such, I have found that students often give up music study altogether because they do not know how to get over the next hurdle or plateau in their practice. How do we get our students to practice? What do we get them to do during their practice time in order to make progress?

Perfect Practice Makes Perfect

In their oft-cited study, “It’s Not How Much; It’s How: Characteristics of Practice Behavior and Retention of Performance Skills,” music educators, Robert Duke, Amy Simmons and Carla Davis Cash make it clear that it is the proportion of correct repetitions in relation to total number of repetitions undertaken during a practice session that translates into playing accurately with consistency.

To this point, we might have a student who plays poorly during the lesson say, “I played it much better at home.” I respond by asking, “Which time was it better, and how many times did you play it to its best?” More often than not, the student made many errors in his or her practice, often through trial-and-error, or naïve, repetitions, only to finally arrive (often by luck) at an accurate rendering of the passage in question. As such, the student believes that “practice makes (or has made) perfect.”

Teacher Female Student

However, this old maxim is untrue. Let’s say the student played the passage 20 times with the first 19 times being inaccurate and the last iteration was finally played cleanly. The chances that the student will play this passage correctly again, especially in the context of a lesson where he or she is more self-conscious than at home, is exceedingly unlikely. As such, “practice makes (or has made) the inaccuracy permanent.”

With this in mind, the old maxim should perhaps be amended to more correctly state that “perfect practice makes perfect.”

Craft a Practice Plan

One of the most effective ways to improve the quality of our students’ practice is to help them craft an effective practice plan. Such a plan should not only include all of the materials to be practiced and activities to be undertaken, but also the structure or organization of each practice session, time spent on each item or activity, as well as the specific practice goals and strategies to achieve them to be implemented in every instance. In fact, the quality of the practice to be done is more important than the quantity or amount of time spent practicing in total.

To help my students foster productive practice habits more consistently, I have created a practice planning template with sample strategies and more that I use in my studio. When I first use this with my students, we fill it in together. Over time, I encourage my students to create their weekly practice plan by themselves because my goal is to instill independence and empower them to be self-reliant. Pace wrote, “The best teachers help students learn to teach themselves, enabling them to progress beyond their mentors’ expertise and to continue learning for the rest of their lives.” Indeed, this is certainly a noble goal, and one I am hoping to achieve with my students.

For additional ideas about creating effective practice plans, Réa Beaumont’s article “Take Note: Developing an organized practice system for piano lessons” in Clavier Companion magazine is a superb resource.

Geoffrey Tankard provides excellent examples of practice time tables and how to effectively distribute a student’s practice time in the chapter on “Practicing” in his book, “Pianoforte Diplomas & Degrees” (see pages 49-50). In addition, Tankard provides a “suggested practice chart for covering 1 hour a day [of technique] for six days [per week]” on page 3 of his comprehensive technical exercise manual written with Eric Harrison, “Pianoforte Technique on an Hour a Day.”

Teachers can also find innumerable online templates and utilize countless apps to help their students better structure and organize their practice sessions.

Monitor Practice Sessions

Another way that teachers can help their students improve their practice habits is to monitor their students’ actual practice sessions. Due to the COVID-19 pandemic, it is easier than ever for teachers to check in with their students via Zoom, Skype or FaceTime. An occasional practice check-in during the week is brief and helps keep students accountable and considerate of their practice habits. Similarly, at monthly group lessons at my home, I always incorporate a portion of time specifically dedicated to supervised practice. I am able to do this easily with a small group of students using one acoustic and two digital instruments.

Perform as Much as Possible

In addition to utilizing practice plans and monitoring and supervising students’ practice time, I am a big proponent of having my students perform as much as possible in order to develop confidence on stage and a performance mindset. Since it can be hard to find and secure an audience, a simple way to simulate the sense of a performance is to record ourselves.

Teacher with 2 girls

In preparation for a recital, competition or music exam, my students will sometimes send me daily videos or audio recordings of themselves playing for several weeks in advance. Not only do I send them feedback, I also have them listen and critique themselves. In these ways, they become increasingly used to performing while honing their own critical listening and analytical skills.

Regularity versus Time

And finally, it is important that I make it clear to my students that the regularity of their practice is more important for their progress than the total amount of time they spend practicing during a given period. Building regularity helps to foster a habit.

If students practice at a similar time each day, the practice habit is much more likely to stick. In addition, less time spent practicing in total every day will probably yield better results than one long day of practice each week. The analogy of physical exercise can be helpful in this regard: If we only work out for two hours one day per week there will be some benefit. However, if we exercise for 10 minutes each day for a total of 70 minutes, wouldn’t the physical benefit be greater even though we have spent less time exercising in total?

In my article, “12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies,” I present practical guidelines that music educators can employ to help students practice more effectively.

Sources and Resources

Concert Black Do’s and Don’ts

When marching band season is over, it may be time to consider refreshing your ensemble’s concert black. After all, the first thing judges see at band festival is your students’ appearance.

It may sound cliché but looks really do matter in the performing arts. So how do you get your band to look modern and timeless? It isn’t quite as easy as it seems.

Here are some do’s and don’ts when it comes to concert band apparel.

Don’t: Add Ties of the School Colors

Ties of the school colors are things of the past. The dual striped statements make your band look outdated. Mixing two more colors on top of the black and white will look way too busy. To keep your band looking elegant and timeless, don’t add too many colors. 

THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

Do: Consider a Tiny Splash of Color

While mixing two or three colors with your concert black is distracting, choosing one small splash of color can really bring the look alive. It doesn’t necessarily have to be one of your school colors. Sometimes, it shouldn’t be. If your school colors are yellow or dark purple, you may find your group looking like striped bumblebees, or completely contrast-less. Burgundy or scarlet red accents always look beautiful with black. There are several ways to add one bit of color, such as student-chosen jewelry, cummerbunds or cufflinks.

cello male tux pexels roxanne minnish 9660813Do:  Offer Suits or Tuxes

Full-length dresses and suits are traditional, and there are many great ways to do them. You can try a plain suit, notched lapel jackets and tuxedo pants, or a traditional tux.

If suits and tuxedos aren’t in the budget, try black button-down shirts and dress pants instead. To make this look appear to be an ensemble uniform, make sure all the button-downs are the same style and brand.

Do: Keep it Simple for the Ladies

For female-identifying students, consider the following combinations:

  • Black tops and wide-leg palazzo pants
  • Long dresses
  • A blouse top and long skirt

Blouses and dresses can get pretty complicated, with sashes and sparkles, straps and peplums. Less is often more when it comes to finding something that is universally flattering on women. Dresses with square/sharp geometric necklines are classic and are a great way to add shape to an outfit.

Do: Let Your Students Choose the Uniform They are Most Comfortable With

Having students feel confident in what they are wearing is important. You may have students in your class who do not feel comfortable with the gender they were assigned at birth. Or, non-binary students may prefer one option over the other. Don’t be afraid to offer suits and dresses as the two choices for everyone. Just make sure to do an online form so students can choose their option before you place the order.

YOB-441IIT INTERMEDIATE OBOE: Features a modified conservatory system for advancing students!

Don’t: Let Your Students Choose Their Own Concert Black

Concert black without much specification is fine for middle school and non-audition high school bands. But if you plan to take your ensembles to festivals for ratings, make sure that you have a proper concert uniform and clearly lay down the ground rules. And, even if it’s not in the budget to buy uniforms, be sure to create a document of what students can and can’t wear from head to toe (see below).

Do: Spell Out All the Specifics

strings black top black skirt pexels cottonbro 7097468Even if you have a standard uniform, many things can go wrong. Consider the following:

  • What color socks should students wear?
  • If students wear dresses, should they also wear stockings? If yes, what color?
  • What limitations are there on footwear?
  • What personal accessories will be allowed?

It’s easy to see how something that seems so basic can go very wrong. One time, I was at a symphony concert and I couldn’t listen to the music because I was far too distracted by one particular cello player’s purple socks. Don’t be the band director who has a kid with purple socks in her ensemble!

As for socks and stockings, choose black because it makes everything easier (and, it looks good).

Shoes are something that also can go very wrong, especially for the ladies. Flats and heels are both fine, but consider setting a limit on the height of the heels. You don’t want one instrumentalist who shows up in 6-inch bedazzled platforms! As for the guys, any black, leather dress shoes will do.

Last but not least, consider what accessories will be allowed. While it might be easiest to say no to all jewelry, you do want to allow your students some option for personal expression. Consider putting limits on the accessories, such as dainty, neutral jewelry like gold, silver and clear crystal earrings, necklaces and bracelets. Otherwise, you might end up with a student wearing a big yellow beaded statement necklace on top of your carefully planned concert black.

Make sure to spell out what is and is not allowed in a form, put it up on Schoology and send it home to parents!

Don’t: Order Satin

Not all fabrics are made equally. Low-quality polyester tends to pill after 10 or 12 washes. Some common fabric types you will find on uniform sites include satin, crepe and stretch velvet.

clarinet white shirt pexels joanjo puertos 8900200Satin looks great, but keep your flutists and percussionists in mind. They will need extra give in the shoulders. In the case of concert bands, skip the all-satin uniforms. Crepe and polyester allow for more motion, but they can appear thin and cheesy if you don’t choose the right blend. Instead, go for a mix of poly and cotton, or a heavy crepe fabric.

Do: Check Out Group Prices

You can often get a set of uniforms for your entire ensemble between $30 and $60 dollars per student if your order is large enough. Group prices are a great way to save some money in your budget! Some places even offer group prices for rental uniforms.

Final Notes

If you work at a school that has a tight budget or possibly no budget at all, consider a large fundraiser specifically for uniforms. Another possibility is to ask students to bring their own uniforms but give very strict guidelines. For example, all students must wear black dress shoes, flats or kitten heels, black socks, black pants and a black shirt with three-quarter sleeves or longer.

While concert black may seem much simpler than marching band uniforms, there are a surprising number of factors to consider. It may take some trial and error, but your concert band will be looking sharp in no time!

12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies

We have looked at “The Different Types of Practice” and “The Teacher’s Role in Developing Good Practice Habits.” Now, I would like to share some practical guidelines that have benefitted my students in their development as performing pianists.

1. Make it Harder

Boy Playing CLP 700 Upright Piano

One main principle that governs my philosophy on practice is “make it harder (to make it easier).” If a passage contains difficult leaps, making the leaps harder by placing them farther apart on the keyboard, or playing them with eyes closed can actually make the original leaps feel easier to navigate and play. Similarly, a one-octave, double-note chromatic third passage could be turned into a two-, three- or four-octave passage instead. A tricky passage over the keys could be transposed to feel even more awkward and uncomfortable in the new key. In these ways, the original passage or technical hurdle will come to feel and be easier, and mastery can be achieved.

2. Repeat with Variety

Another principle I advocate when practicing is “repetition with variety.” Mindless repetition can become unproductive or worse, reinforce permanent bad habits or inaccuracy. Constantly varying the strategy or procedure utilizing variable practice invites mental stimulation and engagement. As such, my students and I try to come up with as many conceivable ways to practice a given passage or piece as possible. When drilling a piece for technical surety, for example, a student can vary the procedure in innumerable ways, including playing in different rhythmic patterns, with various rhythmic accents or in assorted rhythmic groupings. Certain notes can be played repeated, passages can be played backward and forward, with hands reversed, etc.

Below are 10 additional practice tips and strategies that were originally included in an article I wrote for the California Music Teacher, which I have revised and updated here.

3. Set a Goal for Each Practice Session

According to Anastasia Tsioulcas in her article, “10 Easy Ways to Optimize Your Music  Practice,” practice sessions are often more effective when the player sets out with a specific goal in mind. Pianists can accomplish a great deal more in less time if the session is focused on achieving a particular objective. This can be as simple as aiming to learn a certain number of measures of music or being able to play a target passage at a specific tempo. In my own experience, I am able to accomplish far more during my practice time if I begin with a goal in mind. Even a short 5- or 10-minute practice period can be effectual when approached in this way.

 

practice journal pexels nataliya vaitkevich 5070026

4. Use Post-it Notes for Reminders and Distracting Thoughts

It is easier than ever to become distracted while practicing. Thoughts about homework, daily chores, etc. can become all-consuming and curb students’ ability to focus. As a result, the quality of their practice is negatively affected. Jotting down a reminder on a Post-it or notepad can help them keep their mind free of distractions so they can concentrate on the material at hand. I borrowed this idea from Robert Pace in his article “Productive Practicing.”

5. Keep a Practice Journal

A practice journal can help bring about greater awareness with regard to practice habits and tendencies. Regularly journaling, with student reflection and teacher discussion and oversight, can help students develop better practice routines and more effective practice habits in general. This journal can complement a practice record book, or both items can be merged into a single practice resource.

6. Utilize Score Study and Mental Practice

Incorporating mental practice in which students spend time studying the works they are playing away from the piano can be enormously beneficial for successful learning to occur, according to Tsioulcas. As discussed in my article “The Different Types of Practice,” mental practice, including visualization techniques, can aid in the process of learning music at and away from the instrument, as well as memorizing music and preparing for performances.

In addition, Pace explains how score study is invaluable to the learning process when students utilize some initial score study prior to trying to play a new piece at the keyboard. Students develop their inner ear and begin to acquire important analytical skills in this way.

7. Avoid Hands-Separate Learning

This point is slightly contentious as hands-separate learning is so ubiquitous and a go-to learning and practice strategy at the elementary level for many teachers. Hands-separate and voice-separate practice, especially in contrapuntal works, are two indispensable practice tools for pianists. This kind of practice allows pianists to focus on one hand or part at a time and listen intently and fully comprehend what each is doing.

Hands-separate learning is another matter entirely. When students always learn their pieces in this way, they do not conceive and understand the two parts together as a whole. Furthermore, their visual modality is diminished because they become used to focusing on only a single staff of music at any given time. In my experience, this leads to poor sight-reading ability at the piano and should therefore be used sparingly and avoided as the default strategy for learning all piano music.

8. Add Musical Details as Early as Possible

Many students practice the notes and rhythms of a piece divorced from the musical expression. Similar to hands-separate learning, such practicing leads to a compartmentalized understanding of music. Based on research by Robert Duke, Amy Simmons and Carla Davis Cash in “It’s Not How Much; It’s How: Characteristics of Practice Behavior and Retention of Performance Skills” (and rearticulated in Noa Kageyama’s article “8 Things Top Practicers Do Differently”), the sooner students are able to observe and internalize musical details such as dynamic markings in the learning process, the more efficient and effective their practice will be. Teachers might encourage their students to instill a habit of observing more of the musical details in their learning by assigning a new quick study to their students at every lesson. Such a piece should be two to three levels below the student’s other repertoire in difficulty. As such, students should be charged with learning these pieces independently with the aim of preparing them to the highest artistic level.

9. Tackle and Correct Errors Immediately

hands playing piano elijah m henderson KoQxb6taoLA unsplash

Many students expect to make errors and spend much of their time fixing learned mistakes. Mistakes are simply bad habits repeated over and over. In their research, Duke, Simmons and Cash showed that the best practicers were the ones who played with the least amount of inaccuracy and who addressed and corrected errors immediately. In reference to this study, Kageyama states that “strategically slowing things down” is the most impactful strategy for achieving absolute accuracy.

In my studio, we often talk about Cora Ahren’s and G.D. Atkinson’s idea of “making haste slowly” (see page 49 of their 1955 book, “For All Piano Teachers”) just like the slow and steady tortoise in Aesop’s famous fable who was able to beat the agile but undisciplined hare.

10. Repeat Target Passages with Variation Until Errors are Corrected, then Practice in Context

Focused repetition of targeted passages is an important element of practice. It helps to build neural pathways and develop muscular reflexes and responses. Mindless repetition is less effective and can actually do more harm than good when bad habits are reinforced during reiterations of a target passage. Repeating a target passage, or what I call a “bite-size chunk,” and utilizing variable practice so that some aspect of the music such as the rhythm, tempo, articulation, direction, metric accent, etc., is varied can be highly effectual. In this way, the mind must engage to ensure each variance is accurate, while the muscle memory is solidified through repetition. It is then important to put bite-size chunks together and practice these targeted passages in context.

11. Practice at a Variety of Tempi

Many pianists practice their repertoire at concert tempo, as well as under tempo. Slow, mindful practice, or what I call “slow-motion practice” or “tortoise tempo practice,” in which all musical details are heightened in a much slower tempo can help to secure a piece as it allows for careful listening and engagement to take place. However, pianists would do well to develop the technical and listening skills needed to be able to play repertoire with mastery at a variety of tempi including: very slow, slow, slightly under tempo, at tempo, a little faster than tempo and much faster than tempo.

12. Take Advantage of Technology

I agree with Anastasia Tsioulcas that technology can be a wonderful practice aid. There are all kinds of apps that can assist pianists during practice sessions from metronome apps, to apps that can slow down or speed up YouTube clips or MP3 files, to online practice logs and journals. It should also be noted, however, that technology is able to severely disrupt practice sessions. Text messages and other alerts are distracting and break students’ focus. Pianists might do well to place their phones on “do not disturb” or in airplane mode when practicing. Some of my students have now moved to using old-fashioned metronomes instead of a metronome app with this in mind.

For a useful list of additional practice tips and suggestions, take a look at “Hints on Practicing” on page 2 of Tankard and Harrison’s book of technical exercises, “Pianoforte Technique on an Hour a Day,” as well as Ahrens and Atkinson’s “Fundamental Rules of Practice” on page 49 of “For All Piano Teachers.”

Sources and Resources

Bridge the Gap Between “Knowing” and “Doing”

Every band director struggles to find strategies to bridge the gap between providing information to students and getting them to achieve the desired result. How do you get students to actually do what they have been told to do?

Below are some ensemble and practice strategies that I use to help students listen to the information and implement it. Some of it begins with students buying into what they are doing and believing in it. A lot of it is assisting students realize how much it takes — physically and mentally — to achieve great music-making.

Move from Conceptualizing to Actualizing

Many of the band members at Claudia Taylor Johnson High School are masters of the “essay test.” They can take a topic and often regurgitate all the information they’ve ever heard about it to hopefully hit a homerun somewhere in there.

CTJ band wearing masksIn music, the performance is the essay, and students knowing what to do and doing it are two very different things. The knowledge often doesn’t translate. How beautifully and musically our students play hinges on their ability to move from conceptualizing to actualizing, and the gap often appears in the results of their performances. For example:

  • Students know it takes practice to be great, but they don’t always practice.
  • Students know they should listen to their neighbor and match, but they don’t always remember to do it.
  • Students know they should play with their best sound, but they don’t always know how to take what they have been told and physically achieve it. Or, what they hear sitting on one end of the instrument is different than what their director hears on the other end.
  • Brass students know they should “keep their eyebrows out of their lip slurs,” but they’ll do just about anything to move from pitch to pitch when things get stressful.
  • Woodwinds know they should have newer, quality reeds for their instruments, but they enjoy re-living the taste of those enchiladas from last Tuesday far more than they can fathom breaking in a new reed.
  • And of course, all band members know they should not throw a football around inside the band hall, but … well, you get the point.

Sometimes students make choices. Sometimes students are lazy. More often than not, when it comes to making beautiful music, students either forget what they have heard or have to remember the correct information — in other words, they struggle to bridge the gap between “knowing” and “doing.”

Listening Skills and Self-Awareness are Learned Skills

A big piece of connecting knowing and doing is to develop students’ awareness. We ask students to listen and “use their ears,” but sometimes the results still fall short.

listening hand to ear dylann hendricks oxaBYAbpWgI unsplashGuiding students to listen beyond their ears and react to certain stimuli is no different than training students to form an embouchure or take a proper breath. In other words, provide clear information to students, have them practice, give them feedback — then repeat. Keep in mind that students will only fix what bothers them. Until they are as bothered by a problem as their coach, they will be limited in the amount they can improve.

So, how do you transition listening skills into learned skills?

  • Constantly reinforce that students should have an opinion. After a musical segment during rehearsal, after a performance or after listening to anything, ask students what they think about what they heard.
  • Ask simple questions like: “Should they play long or short?” or “Should they play smooth and connected or more detached?” Then follow up by asking them “why” to jumpstart conversations.
  • Eventually, you can move into more advanced questions, such as: “What did you think about the clarity of the tone quality?” or “What did you think about the consistency of style?” or “What did you notice about that phrase ending?”

“I Don’t Know” is an Acceptable Answer

Tom Bennet and Joe DixonTrain your students to respond in one of three ways: “Yes, I think so,” “No, I don’t think so” or “I don’t know” —  which may sound surprising.

One of our brass instructors, Joe Dixon, tells students that he had a former teacher who questioned him about some things in his playing. “My teacher complimented many aspects of my playing then told me to listen carefully to the end of one of the notes,” Dixon says. “I shared that I could not hear what he was talking about, and he responded, ‘That’s OK, just remember I said it.’”

This story resonated with our students in helping them learn to distinguish between what they can or cannot hear, as well as helping them hear what we do to improve their playing.

Knowing that a note should be performed with a particular style or length and hearing if it is happening hinges on a student’s ability to recognize the difference.

Students Must Learn to React Without a Director

In our program, we spend time in smaller group sectionals identifying “out-of-tune” versus “in-tune” unisons, which sounds like a single player on an instrument. We each have different ways of approaching “in tone, in tune, in time,” but getting each student to react centers on the director’s ability to develop reactions from the performers.

Earlier in my career, my students reacted to problems by reading the expressions on my face or, worse, when I would yell during rehearsal. I was surprised to learn that most of the time, students did not hear what I was angry about but only tried harder when they sensed the energy in the room getting more intense. Developing critical listening skills has resulted in students fixing and reacting to things faster — before I get frustrated.

Questions to consider to help students develop critical listening skills:

  • How can students tell if it’s out of tune?
  • How can they hear if it’s out of time?
  • Are they only reacting to what you do?

Students Must Have Listening Role Models

Tell students to have three role models on their instrument. Provide examples for students who are unsure of which artists to listen to.

Ask students to identify and write about one piece per musician, what they hear and what they like. Ask students to compare their sounds to the professional.

Fundamental vs. Musical Issues

Our clarinet teacher, Philip May, regularly tells our students that there are two distinct challenges they face as musicians: 1) how well they play their instrument and 2) how well they play the music.

Although the two share similarities, May’s point is that students need to invest as much time and attention to mastering their instruments as they do to learning the music for band rehearsal. Students who have better control over their instruments will have more skills to perform music at a higher level. One of the fastest ways we help our students improve their playing is connected to their breathing.

breathing in field tracey hocking dIceRhMFTJI unsplashBreathing to Play vs. Breathing to Live

Periodically, we ask our students, “Why do we practice breathing exercises?” As you can imagine, we receive a colorful assortment of answers ranging from the bizarre to the sublime: “To learn to take a full breath,” “So we can sound good on our instruments,” “So we can play longer phrases,” “So we know how to breathe in music” and, my personal pet peeve, the blank stare.

How many of us spend a few minutes each day during warm-ups working on how to take the proper breath to produce the most characteristic sound only to get into the music and find that students aren’t breathing properly? Just watch young players during their breathing exercises and then see what they do while playing — you’ll be surprised at the variety of breathing methods. Some students breathe correctly, others maybe not at all, and some fall somewhere in between.

In the article, “Improve Student’s Tone,”  I discuss how our ultimate purpose in practicing breathing with our students is so they “remember to do it when they get to the music.” One of my mentors, Tom Bennett, who was the director of bands at the University of Houston, guided my focus early in my career to understand the difference between a “playing” breath and a “living” breath. The type of breath students use when sitting (not playing), walking to class or hanging out is entirely different from the type of more athletic breath needed to produce a characteristic sound.

Students must practice “playing” breath exercises in class, so that when they get into the music, they know how it should feel. Most students will revert to taking “living” breaths, especially before they play after a silence. Train students to take a type of “replacement” breath during these transition times.

We teach the concept of “phrase breathing” versus “catch/replacement breaths.” A phrase breath would be in between longer musical phrases and might occur in unison across the ensemble, whereas a catch/replacement breath is quicker and should minimally disrupt the phrase. Students should plan catch/replacement breaths in a way that you can’t tell when they are entering and exiting, also known as “stagger breathing.” A catch/replacement breath must happen quickly and should not affect the tempo of the music, whereas a student or ensemble may slow down or speed up coming in and out of a phrase breath.

Training students on a few breathing rules can make a difference in the quality of sound during performances, but only if they actually follow through with those rules. To get the rules’ fundamental message across to students requires some rephrasing and training.

  • winds ensembleRuleStudents should avoid breathing in predictable places such as at bar lines.
  • Bridge the gap: Ask students to mark where they will breathe instead, then practice this breathing plan with them in context.
  • Rule: Students should avoid breathing at the end of a crescendo.
  • Bridge the gap: Practice the music before, during and after the crescendo, training students to breathe in the middle of the crescendo or in another section.
  • Rule: Students should avoid breathing before rhythmic activity.
  • Bridge the gap: Train students to avoid breathing before music becomes more rhythmically active, i.e., before 16th note or triplet rhythm that they may subconsciously want to “tank up” and create holes in the sound/phrase.
  • Rule: Students should work to stagger breaths with students around them and not breathe when their neighbor does.
  • Bridge the gap: Ask students to perform the segment and listen to see if there are “holes in the sound.”

Remember, students want to do what is most comfortable, and “breathing to play” is rarely comfortable. You must provide students with information, as well as reinforce proper “playing” breath techniques to bridge the gap between knowing and doing.

Other Bridge-the-Gap Strategies

Help us help you” —  We use this phrase often because we want students to learn to self-advocate or come to rehearsals prepared so they can be successful. The students at CTJ require daily reminders to use tuners or metronomes in individual practice, as well as to bring pencils or highlights to rehearsals.

Hold up your pencils and highlighters” — For many years, Emily Gurwitz, the band director at one of our feeders, Bradley Middle School, would begin each rehearsal by asking students to “hold up your pencils and highlighters.” No rehearsal began without this step, and students could not rehearse without them. The result? Students had pencils and highlighters during rehearsals as needed. This habit, formed early, transferred to high school, and students were more likely to show up to rehearsals with a pencil and a highlighter. What seems like a simple process that took only a few seconds each day required persistence on Gurwitz’s part. She is now a band director at Judson High School in San Antonio, where she still begins her rehearsals with this timeless tradition.

Accountability strategies

  • Practice records with focuses rather than just minutes on the instrument.
  • Use pass-off or star charts. Consider breaking the music down into chunks that students must “play-off” for a director, student teacher or even a student leader. List all of the students’ names on a chart going down the left side and the chunks of music going across the top. As the student passes-off the segment, they get to put a sticker under that segment next to their name so other students can see everyone’s progress. This incentivizes students to pass-off their music so their peers see that they are working hard.
  • Utilize software to break down assignments into smaller steps. Programs like SmartMusic and MusicFirst help students practice music with the computer for instant feedback. Consider minimum score requirements before students can submit an assignment.
  • Regularly check woodwind reeds during band rehearsals or sectionals by asking students to hold up extra/replacement reeds that they have on hand.

Structure practice for students

  • Provide students with exercises specifically to help improve their playing so they can achieve music.
  • Teach students ways to improve technique like utilizing broken rhythms, metronome games or practicing tonguing slurred notes passages (or slurring tongued note passages).
  • Introduce brass players to pitch bends and coach them on how they can improve their ability to move gracefully from note to note.
  • Emphasize the importance of students recording themselves and listening back, show them how to do this or what software to use.

metronome g904e63346 1280Tuners and metronomes

  • Teach students how to properly use tuners and metronomes.
  • Define the parameters and purposes for these tools.
  • Show students specifically how you expect them to use tuners and metronomes
  • Teach them that sometimes it can get worse to use a metronome before it gets better.

Tackle Issues Individually … Literally

Another of my mentors, Dr. Lawrence Markiewicz, director of bands at Independence (Kansas) Community College, taught drum corps for many years before moving to the collegiate level. He is a master at bringing out the highest level of performance from his students. His hornlines at the Cadets and Glassmen were remarkable for their musicality, energy and clarity.

One of his primary strategies to achieve clarity was the individual performances “down the line,” where students would play passages of music for feedback and sometimes accountability purposes. Markiewicz believed that by getting into the weeds and listening to students individually, he could better diagnose articulation or technique problems. Students could hear better when they played individually. They would also become more aware of things as they listened to others perform. While the technique can be stressful for students, maintaining a positive environment and having students play by themselves frequently can alleviate that anxiety and result in rapid improvement.

The same applies to “group rhythm counting” — ask students to individually count rhythms aloud during rehearsal to eliminate rhythm problem. Students learn how things sound by listening to their neighbors rather than just reading the music on the page. Helping students learn to function and react independently can only help them improve.

Tying it All Together

Our end goal is for our students to learn to listen like professional musicians to create and experience music at the highest level. Students who understand how to connect the dots stand a far greater chance of enjoying magical musical moments early in their journeys that can propel them to continue to play for the rest of their lives.

We understand that not all our students will pursue a career in music, but we want them all to have the tools to be successful performers in any capacity. By developing their performance and listening skills, we hope they will be more apt to continue performing beyond their days at Claudia Taylor Johnson High School.

The Different Types of Practice

In order to make progress on any musical instrument, or frankly to improve at any skill, a combination of discipline, hours of concentrated work and an effective set of practice strategies is required. All too often, students fail to make progress in their music studies due to a lack of utilizing productive practice habits.

Before we can discuss how teachers can help students learn to practice efficiently, it is necessary to first understand the various types of practice.

Naïve and Purposeful Practice

Dr. K. Anders Ericsson (1947–2020), a Swedish-born psychologist and professor of psychology, was world-renowned for his research in the field of peak performance and expertise. In an article with Robert Pool, “Not All Practice Makes Perfect: Moving from naive to purposeful practice can dramatically increase performance,” Ericsson makes a distinction between two kinds of practice, as follows:

  • Naïve is what we might think of as traditional trial-and-error practice. It essentially involves mindless repetition or doing or playing the same thing in the same way continually.
  • Purposeful practice, by contrast, is more productive and requires that we get out of our comfort zone by attempting to do things we were unable to do previously. It is focused, goal-orientated, systematic and in it, we must respond to feedback in order to make improvements.

According to the authors: “This is a fundamental truth about any sort of practice: If you never push yourself beyond your comfort zone, you will never improve. The amateur pianist who took half a dozen years of lessons when he was a teenager but who for the past 30 years has been playing the same set of songs in exactly the same way over and over again may have accumulated 10,000 hours of ‘practice’ during that time, but he is no better at playing the piano than he was 30 years ago. Indeed, he’s probably gotten worse.”

Deliberate Practice

Woman Playing Polished White CLP 700 Upright Piano Close UpThe article referenced above contains excerpts from their book, “Peak: Secrets from the New Science of Expertise,” in which Ericsson and Pool provide greater detail about each kind of practice and make a distinction between deliberate and other kinds of purposeful practice. They describe deliberate practice as a highly focused kind of purposeful practice that is essential for developing the highest level of expertise or command in a specific field, including mastering a musical instrument.

This kind of practice entails strategies and activities in which students must constantly challenge themselves during practice sessions in order to improve. It also requires a high degree of already acquired competence in the specific skill area, and an expert teacher or coach who is able to assign specific practice tasks and strategies to the student who seeks to become an expert. To this point, the teacher must be familiar and have prior experience in training others to the desired expert skill level.

Varied Practice

Ericsson and Pool also believe that the solution to making progress and improving is generally not about trying ever harder but rather about doing something different instead — what is referred to as varied practice, which is also called variable practice.

Gerald Klickstein, a guitarist and author of “The Musician’s Way: A Guide to Practice, Performance, and Wellness,” defines varied practice as encompassing a practice technique that sees musicians “working on a musical passage from diverse angles.” He further asserts that “the key is to mix up our practice approaches so that we cultivate easeful control as well as broad awareness of the music and our execution.”

Long before I knew about any scholarly research in the area of practice, I found that changing up my practice strategy or procedure, or what I call implementing “repetition with variety,” benefitted my progress at the piano tremendously. In fact, this notion of varying the procedure during practice has been so effective in helping me improve that it is one of the core tenants of my philosophy on practice. It is therefore a principle I like to share with my students early on. In my article, “12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies,” I provide more detail about this.

Blocked and Interleaved Practice and More

Dr. Barbara Fast is director of piano pedagogy at The University of Oklahoma and an expert in the field of music practice research. Like Ericsson and Klickstein, her research has shown the importance of changing things up during practice in order to improve and develop music proficiency. In the article, “Change It Up!: Interleaved Practice – What It Is, Why It Works,” Fast makes a distinction between blocked and interleaved practice.

Blocked practice can be described as skill acquisition by “work[ing] on improving one skill at a time, usually with much repetition, until gains are made” in an environment that does not change. She illustrates blocked practice as AAABBBCCC with each letter representing one specific skill or task practiced in a block of time. Fast asserts that musicians “often return to the practice room the next day to find that the skills learned yesterday with much repetition [through blocked practice], did not stick.” Blocked practice is also sometimes labeled fixed practice.

male piano pexels cottonbro 10251756In interleaved practice, “a student practices an identified problem area for a brief amount of time, leaving it to begin practicing a different skill area. The performer is alternating and intermixing the practice tasks. The long-term retention is better with interleaved practice, even though the short-term satisfaction isn’t as great.” She illustrates interleaved practice using the letters ABCBACACB. In other words, in interleaved practice, certain material is practiced, then left alone but interspersed with, or revisited back and forth, between other practice material.

Two further types of practice bear mentioning here. Similar to blocked practice is massed practice in which one skill or task is practiced repeatedly but without rest or breaks. As such, massed is different to spaced practice. According to the article, “Student Practice: Spaced vs. Massed,” spaced practice “refers to conditions in which individuals are given rest intervals within the[ir] practice sessions.”

Dr. Bill Moore is a performance psychology consultant who has helped musicians, athletes and others overcome self-doubt and performance anxiety to achieve high levels of performance and expertise. In his book, “Playing Your Best When it Counts: Mental Skills for Musicians” (see pages 69-70), Moore describes his 80-20 rule as it relates to blocked and variable practice, and how to practice for a performance mindset versus practicing for skill acquisition. Moore states that early on in the process of learning a piece in which we are developing certain technical skills and refining musical details, a maximum of 80% of practice time should be spent utilizing blocked practice and a minimum of 20% spent on variable practice.

As the date of the performance nears and the repertoire has been thoroughly learned and memorized, the amount of time spent on the two kinds of practice should switch so that 80% is spent doing variable practice and 20% on blocked practice. Moore asserts that unlike athletes, many musicians simply do not practice performing enough (i.e., playing through their pieces in a performance setting) and that implementing more of this kind of practicing is vital for developing the needed confidence and mental skills to perform well under stress. Dr. Fast calls this kind of practice for performance in which we run through a program “the cold start.” It could be viewed as a type of massed practice in which students play through a recital program once or possibly more times in a single practice session without a break.

Distributed Practice

A further practice type is what Klickstein calls distributed practice, which he describes in his article, “Varied, Distributed, and Interleaved Practice,” as follows: “Instead of focusing on a single piece in one extended practice session (blocked practice), with distributed practice, we practice the same music in separate sessions, perhaps over the span of a day.”

As such, we might work on a specific movement of a Beethoven piano sonata and first practice it under tempo in the morning using various strategies (varied practice), review the piece in the early afternoon and continue working on building up the tempo later on in the day (using further varied practice strategies). A benefit of distributed practice is that we can take breaks in our practice, rest and receive extrinsic or external feedback on the quality of our playing or practice from a teacher, coach or mentor.

In short, there is evidence that changing the sequence or organization of our practice sessions through interleaved or distributed practice — or the practice strategies themselves, utilizing varied or variable practice — enhances the quality of our practice and benefits our development and proficiency as musicians.

Mental Practice

Girl Playing PianoA final type of practice is known as mental practice. This kind of practice is undertaken away from our instruments and does not entail any playing whatsoever.

One subtype of mental practice that has been used successfully by various musicians to learn and memorize music quickly is known as mental visualization. This kind of practice takes place before we play a piece on an instrument, or rather instead of learning and memorizing at the instrument. It is described in the book “The Shortest Way to Pianistic Perfection” (contained in the Dover publication, “Piano Technique”) by the great French-born German pianist Walter Gieseking (1895–1956) and his teacher Karl Leimer (1858–1944). While this practice method of learning and memorizing music away from the piano seems daunting to those of us who are used to learning and mastering music by first practicing at our instrument, the proponents of learning through visualization swear by its effectiveness and efficiency.

When I am learning a piece, some initial mental score study as described by celebrated American pedagogue Robert Pace (1924–2010) in his article, “Productive Practicing,” is invaluable. In addition, when committing a work to memory that I have already learned and polished at the piano, visualization of the score to cultivate the visual memory as described by Cora B. Ahrens and G.D. Atkinson in “For All Piano Teachers” is an indispensable memorization practice technique.

Another subtype of mental practice encompasses what is sometimes called mental rehearsal. This type of practice involves spending time imagining ourselves performing to our best on stage as well as sometimes mentally rehearsing for the worst-case scenario. We know that sports superstars like swimmer Michael Phelps have used this technique to achieve exceptional results. Phelps’ coach Bob Bowman was interviewed by Dr. Laurie Santos, a Yale psychology professor, on her podcast, “The Happiness Lab” (episode “Don’t Accentuate the Positive”). Santos shares how Phelps actually improved his practice and swimming technique through mental training and the art of visualization to achieve his unprecedented Olympic record. She goes on to say that research done on the brain indicates that mental practice, in which we imagine ourselves playing etc., can have the same beneficial effects on our learning as when we actively practice at our instrument.

To help achieve this type of benefit from mental practice, Dr. Bill Moore advocates for the use of performance scripts in his book “Playing Your Best When It Counts.” Crafting a written performance script entails describing the ultimate or optimal musical performance of a specific recital, audition or competition program in rich sensory detail. Creating and then reading a completed performance script regularly in preparation for a performance has certainly proven beneficial in my studio.

Sports psychologist Dr. Don Greene has worked with the U.S. Olympic Diving Team and with musicians, such as conductor Michael Tilson Thomas. Greene provides valuable suggestions about how musicians can develop the necessary mental skills in practice to best prepare for high-pressure performances in his various books, including “Performance Success: Performing Your Best Under Pressure,” as well as on the “How To! podcast (episode “How To Perform Under Pressure”). Greene asserts that “musicians can learn a lot from the world of baseball. Auditioning musicians, like major league baseball players, need to anticipate routine circumstances as well as the unexpected and prepare [in their practice] properly for both.”

Put It All Together

It is important that we make it plain to our students that naïve practice is ineffective, if not detrimental to their progress. Students should also understand that while blocked practice can feel good and satisfying, the research shows that it is not as effective as interleaved practice. In addition, students need to know that varying the procedure or the activity itself utilizing varied practice can be highly beneficial and enhance mental engagement during practice sessions. Moreover, deliberate practice in which we constantly strive to challenge ourselves to achieve expertise using the expert guidance of the teacher might be the goal. Furthermore, mental practice away from our instrument not only helps us learn and memorize music quickly and more effectively, it can help better prepare us to perform with success. Lastly, practicing for a performance mindset versus practicing for skill acquisition are different and therefore necessitate distinct approaches and types of practice.

In writing this article, I wish to thank Dr. Barbara Fast for sharing her expertise on the various types of practice with me.

In my article, “The Teacher’s Role in Developing Good Practice Habits,” I provide ways in which teachers can help their students improve the organization and quality of their practice sessions. In “12 Practice Tips, Suggestions and Strategies,” I present practical guidelines that music educators can employ to help students practice more effectively.

Sources and Resources

122 Tips for First-Year Music Educators from the 2022 “40 Under 40”

Starting a new job is exciting, but it’s also stressful! You must familiarize yourself with your new school and forge relationships with administrators, staff and fellow faculty members, not to mention your students, parents and the community. Then there’s concerts, competitions, lesson plans, assessments — the list is long.

Our 2022 “40 Under 40” educators offer tips to first-year music educators. Heed their advice as you start your career and remember that as demanding as the work may be, the rewards are limitless, especially when you consider the lifelong impact you will have on a generation of music students.

 

David AmosDavid Amos, Director of Bands at Heritage Middle School in Painesville, Ohio, offers these three tips to first-year music educators:

1. Don’t get stuck focusing on the little things. Mistakes happen in performances and in classrooms. Teach students how to recover, regroup and try again. It’s easy to become myopic but when you’re running a music program, remember to look at the big picture.

2. Teach with compassion. Students come from every walk of life to your music classroom. Each student is dealing with something that you may not know about or understand. Let music class be a place of respite.

3. Show your students how you love music. If you demonstrate your passion for music, students will buy in. My college band director, Dr. Stephen Gage, always said to “LOVE MUSIC.” Not all students will play after they graduate or pursue careers in music, and that shouldn’t be the end goal. If you live with that love of music, students will learn it from you and carry it with them for the rest of their lives.

Antos JustinDr. Justin Antos, Director of Bands and Orchestras at Dwight D. Eisenhower High School in Blue Island, Illinois, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Worry less about what other music educators have done with their programs. Instead, channel your energy into discovering your niche and realizing how your attributes can foster a love of music-making in your students.

2. Being a content expert is fundamental to your success as a music educator, but it is not as important as being creative in your lessons, empathetic toward your students and inclusive in your teaching.

3. Do not let the rigors of the job consume you. Carve out time to relax, do something you love outside of teaching music, and spend time with friends and family to keep a healthy balance in your life.

Bechard CassandraDr. Cassandra Bechard, Director of Bands and Assistant Professor of Music at the University of Northwestern St. Paul in Minnesota, offers these three tips:

1. Set a time that you stop reading and returning emails. If there is a true emergency, your administrator will call you. Emails will ALWAYS be better composed after you take a break.

2. Realize that you cannot — and in most cases should not — change everything during your first year. Instead, create a working to-do list and slowly chip away at it over the years.

3. We all make mistakes on and off the podium. My greatest advice is to own your mistakes, apologize when necessary and reflect on what/why the mistake happened to gain clarity and hopefully not repeat the same mistake again.

Blanco StephenStephen Blanco, Director of Mariachi Studies at Las Vegas High School in Nevada, says:

1. Work hard ­— nothing can replace that. I often get asked by peers, “What’s your secret? How are you doing what you are doing with this new mariachi program?” My answer is always that there is no secret. There’s just hard work. I instill that in my students as the only way to be successful because even winning the lottery can’t replace working hard and succeeding at your goals … Although the beach sounds nice sometimes!

2. Find out what drives you— that’s what will get you through the dark times. A few months ago, I was being interviewed for a new podcast by Mickey Smith Jr., discussing my recent semifinalist status for the 2022 Grammy for Music Education (Smith was a previous winner). We discussed that not every day is going to be a great day, but that by finding the things that can “get you through,” the hard days can be easier to manage. For me, it’s an afternoon coffee, listening to new music or taking a quick walk outside during lunch.

3. Be kind — your kids need you. This is something I often forget. We never know what our students are going through. My expectations of them are so high that sometimes I forget that they have many other things flooding their brains or fueling their emotions. I often have to ground myself and remember that a little bit of compassion goes a long way — yes, even for that kid who forgot their field trip paperwork for the 10th day in a row — because honestly, that kid was me 10 years ago!

Bryant RobertDr. Robert Bryant, Music Education Coordinator and Assistant Professor of Music at Tennessee State University in Nashville, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Know your purpose. Understanding the “why” behind your motivation to teach music can help you to focus on what is really important, mitigate distractions and inspire others toward greatness.

2. Know your students. Our students must be our top priority. Know your students’ names, their interests, fears, hopes and dreams. This helps to build trust and inspire confidence, which is critical to success as a music teacher.

3. Know your craft. Be actively involved in as many professional associations as possible. Make friends with colleagues and collaborate with them. Seek out opportunities for leadership in your school, profession and community.

If you are intentional and work on these aspects of your job consistently, not only will you be successful and enjoy a satisfying career in music education, you will also change the world for the better in more ways than you could possibly imagine.

Calus AdamAdam Calus, Executive Director of Education Through Music — Massachusetts in Boston, offers these three tips:

1. There is no magical curriculum out there that will help you be good at teaching music. There are lots of tools for the toolbox and it is up to YOU to find which ones work best for you by studying many and synthesizing your own style based on what you have learned.

2. Pace yourself mentally, physically, spiritually, etc.

3. Everyone makes a lot of mistakes during their first year. Go out there and fail. Fall super hard and learn what it takes to get back up.

Chandler KristopherKristopher Chandler, Director of Bands at Gautier High School in Mississippi, says:

1. Surround yourself with successful people. Study their practices and enjoy being a life-long learner!

2. Never be afraid to ask questions about ALL aspects of your career — not just pedagogy. Ask about organization, choosing literature, even maintaining a healthy work/personal life balance.

3. Find your person — or a small group of people — who you consider your biggest mentors/band family. These people need to be successful in their own careers, but also genuine friends who can help you no matter the situation. Every day will not be “sunshine and rainbows,” and you will need this support system to help you keep your passion for teaching!

Collins DanielleDanielle Collins, Director of Music, Media, Entertainment Technology Department at the Academy for the Performing Arts at Huntington Beach High School in California, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Breathe! You will make mistakes — learn and grow from them. Things are hectic around change. Breathe through it and take things in small bites.

2. Balance. Make sure you create time and space to get outside and spend time doing other things you love. Spend time with friends or family, even if it’s virtually. Balance is very important for our well-being, and our students will model it back to us!

3. If a door opens, take it, even if it isn’t the door for which you waited. Sometimes life nudges you in a different direction for which you planned — the door you’ve been waiting on may never open, so when a door opens, take it!

Dame NathanDr. Nathan Dame, Director of Choral Activities and Fine Arts Department Chair at Wylie East High School in Texas, says:

1. Seek out a mentor who you trust, aspire to be like and with whom you can be open without fear of judgment.

2. A growth mindset is everything.  Go to conferences and conventions, network with others, arrange and advocate for professional development days where you can observe exemplary music educators.

3. Instill the important values in your students that will inspire them for whatever future that will meet them. Remember that we teach kids music (in that order).

Felder BrandonBrandon Felder, Fine Arts Music Director at SHABACH! K-8 Christian Academy in Landover, Maryland, and Music Director at Georgetown University Gospel Choir in Washington, D.C., offers these tips:

1. Take your time: Know that music education is a marathon and not a sprint. You will not see results immediately but just stay consistent and stay the course!

2. Assess your strengths and weaknesses quarterly: Assess your needs, take stock of your resources to utilize your assets to address your needs as a teacher.

3. Be the solution: There are challenges in learning the culture of a school. My toughest class in my first year of teaching was a 5th-grade class, but I learned to teach them. I taught that class consistently every day like I was being observed by the principal and the state department. Within a few months, it became my favorite class and the students didn’t want to leave my classroom! Be the solution!

Finney BrysonBryson Finney, Artistic Director of We are Nashville Festival and Learning Technology Specialist at metro Nashville Public Schools in Tennessee, recommends that first-year educators:

1.Be your authentic self — this may take some time to find, but don’t ever try to be someone else in your classroom because your students will always be able to detect a “phony.” Be YOU, it’s the most effective way to teach!

2. If you’re not enjoying your lesson, neither are your students — remember your students will always “play” off of you. If you seem uninterested or you don’t enjoy your lesson, how can you expect your learners to stay interested and learn anything? Be creative and teach in a way that you enjoy! I promise it will communicate much more effectively.

3. Dream big! Don’t settle for where you are. If you have aspirations and goals, hold on to them and keep working at them. Even when today looks so far from where you may want to be, take a step/do something, even if it’s a little something each day and keep your dream in front of you!

Goindoo AlainAlain Goindoo, Director of Bands at Jeaga Middle School and Executive Director of Hope Symphony in West Palm Beach, Florida, says:

I’ll give you 5 tips.

1. Identify the areas you place your personal value. If your value is based on how well the students perform, you are not loving yourself enough.

2. Find out your students’ favorite foods. Conversation centered around FOOD is a doorway to learn more about your students, such as their likes and their cultures.

3. Make it fun. Students who are having fun will progress further and recruit their friends to join, and as a side benefit, tell their parents how much fun they are having, which encourages parental participation.

4. Build relationships with current and retired band directors. No one is an island.

5. Make it about the students. Music proficiency is important, but investing in your students’ passion for music, their cultures and their personal growth will yield dividends. When you invest in children, you never lose.

Hayes JaymeJayme Hayes, Director of Bands at Mayberry Cultural and Fine Arts Magnet Middle School in Wichita, Kansas, offers these tips:

1. Love yourself first and keep your family at your center. When you love yourself and can keep those most important to you as your priority, you will have more to give to your students because you will be grounded and happier. Fill your bucket with joy first, then you can share it with others.

2. Be true to your own way of teaching, don’t try to be someone else. Learning from veteran teachers is vital but finding ways to tailor that knowledge and advice to fit your classroom is when it is the most beneficial.

3. Be honest, transparent, consistent and forgiving. If you make a mistake, admit it and move on. If students make a mistake, address it and then move on. Mistakes are part of the learning process. Just as you are learning and will make mistakes, so are they. You wouldn’t want your principal to dwell on a mistake you made, so don’t dwell on theirs.

Helmick JonathanDr. Jonathan Helmick, Director of Bands and Associate Professor of Music at Slippery Rock University in Pennsylvania, says:

1. “Hug the cactus, embrace the vulnerability.” You will make mistakes. Making mistakes in front of students is an excellent opportunity to teach students how to make mistakes and grow gracefully.

2. Put your first year in perspective: Treat yourself with the respect and understanding that you give to your students. This means taking care of your own needs. It also means monitoring your own self-talk, goals and expectations. So, be realistic and kind. Offer grace to yourself and celebrate the small things. This is a marathon, not a sprint.

3. Become part of an “us.” Develop relationships, grow community and make friends fast. This is true for your classroom, your colleagues and the community outside of your school. The first year is very much about listening to others. Furthermore, being a part of an “us” will make that first year more fulfilling and help you to find balance.

Homes AnastasiaAnastasia Homes, Director of Bands at San Elijo Middle School in San Marcos, California, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Set small achievable goals during your first couple years of teaching. You will fail more than succeed, but it gets better.

2. Be organized with not just your lesson plans but all aspects of your program. This could be boosters if you have them, scheduling concerts/performances or the setup of your room and storage areas. When you are not organized, kids misbehave  because they like structure and knowing the plan.

3. Laugh with your students and get to know them. I hate that old saying “don’t smile until Christmas.” Your students need to trust you before you can get them to respect you, and it starts with creating that bond. I joke with my students all the time, but they also know when it is time to work. Find a balance that works for you.

Jones AmirAmir Jones, Director of Bands at Thomas W. Harvey High School in Painesville, Ohio, offers these tips:

1. Regardless of where you are, you are not constrained.

2. Do not be intimidated by larger programs

3. Place emphasis on the environment you create. Your students are capable of so much when they are in a good environment.

Knepper DamonDamon Knepper, Director of Bands and Orchestras at Ironwood Ridge High School in Oro Valley, Arizona, says:

1. Don’t be afraid to ask questions.

2. Expect the unexpected. You will not have classes that teach you about many of the daily occurrences you will have in a classroom. These new experiences will change you as a teacher, and THAT IS OKAY!

3. Remember why you got into this profession. That initial dream will keep you going during hard times.

LaBrie KatieKatie O’Hara LaBrie, composer, conductor and clinician from Fairfax, Virginia, offers these tips:

1. The best thing you can do is make memories for the students. It doesn’t always have to be a musical memory — it could be having a bonding day, a pizza party or a concert that they organize from start to finish.

2. Teach students tools and then let them lead the way. If you teach them how to practice and how to rehearse you can create amazing rehearsals and amazing student leaders.

3. Rotate your seating. You never know what you can learn from that kid in the back row.

Lowe WesleyWes Lowe, Director of Instrumental Arts at The King’s Academy in West Palm Beach, Florida, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Be authentic: Students don’t care how much you know until they know how much you care. Be genuine and honest even when you don’t know all the answers. It’s okay not to know everything as long as you continuously strive for excellence.

2. Be team-oriented: Surround yourself with a great team of people to support you, your program and your vision. Be proactive in inviting guest artists and clinicians to work with your students. Watch other professionals teach and instruct — thisis one of the best ways to improve your own craft.

3. Be creative: Look for new and innovative performance opportunities and experiences. Stay modern with your approach. Find the best experiences that will benefit your students’ growth as musicians and people. Here’s a quote by Ellen Johnson Sirleaf, the former president of Liberia (and Africa’s first female head of state), that I strive to live by: “If your dreams do not scare you, then they are not big enough.”

Meldrum Tracy 1Tracy Meldrum, Director of Bands and Fine Arts Department Chair at Verrado High School in Buckeye, Arizona, says:

First, find your own voice. Don’t try to be someone else. It’s AMAZING to have a mentor, but you are you. Use your own voice to teach, not your mentor’s. It is far more authentic and students will respond far better to it.

Second, have that mentor or someone you can trust to bounce ideas off. This is far more helpful than you realize. Not only for your teaching, but your mental health.

Third, have fun! If you love your job, and you love your music, and you are having fun, your kids will too!

Miller TammyTammy Miller, Artist Faculty of Piano, Omaha Conservatory of Music in Nebraska, offers these tips:

1. Love your students as much as you love the music you are teaching them.

2. Continue to learn new things! This can help you relate to your students and is important for your own growth as a musician and educator.

3. Be creative and think out of the box! There is more than one way to teach a concept and some of the most memorable and impactful teaching moments come from a creative approach!

Molina Gabrielle2Gabrielle Molina, Executive Director of Project Music in Stamford, Connecticut, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Be ready for a lot of work! Aside from being in the classroom, which is exciting but also very tiring, there are a lot of other responsibilities that come along with the job, even more so now with COVID.

2. Be able to advocate for what you do. Part of being a music educator is being able to speak to the importance of music, the impact it has and why it’s a VITAL part of a well-rounded education.

3. Be able to shape shift and code switch. You will have to be a teacher, coach, advocate, administrator and so much more in your role as “music educator.”

Moniz JustinDr. Justin John Moniz, Associate Director of Vocal Performance and Coordinator of Vocal Pedagogy at New York University — The Steinhardt School of Culture, Educator and Human Development in New York, says:

1. When you find yourself in a moment of uncertainty (there will be many!), pick up the phone. Reconnect with those teachers and mentors who have enabled you to follow your own path and pursue your passions.

2. Prioritize your own mental and physical health. For me, it means an early morning workout to clear my mind before jumping into course content, lecture material or grading. My ability to be an effective communicator is reliant upon my capacity to maintain balance and clarity for myself.

3. Be flexible. No matter how well you plan, good teaching is often dependent upon one’s ability to reroute, sometimes mid-flight.

Montalvo BryantBryant Montalvo, music teacher and Choir Director at Central Falls High School in Rhode Island, offers these tips:

1. Connect with your students in ways that exist outside of the curriculum. When you take a step back from drilling the foundations of music literacy and sight singing and musicianship, you will see your students as individuals which will strengthen your teaching and the students’ learning.

2. Establish your own support system and connect with different teachers across multiple disciplines. Many times, music is “othered” in schools and put in a side category instead of being included with the “core” subjects. Sometimes you may be the entire music department. Whatever the case may be, it is necessary for music teachers to feel supported if you want the program to succeed. Sometimes, administrators do not know how to support music teachers. Therefore, it is essential that new music teachers guide not only their administrators, but other faculty and staff members on how best they can support them and their music program (especially if music is new to the school). It is also helpful to establish connections with other teachers in other disciplines within your building. You will come to find many cross-curricular connections which will help other faculty to see and understand the importance of music education.

3. Try everything! Find what works best for you AND your students. Just because you read it out of a methods book or learned it as part of your music education teacher training program does not necessarily mean it’s the best fit for you and your students. There is no one-size-fits all approach to teaching music. Even the most well-known and popular methods within music education will show their limitations in your classroom. Take a bit from everything until you find the way that not only allows you to be your most authentic self but also the way that is most accessible to your students.

Newman CodyCody Newman, Director of Bands at Forney High School in Texas, recommends that first-year educators:

1. You MUST, repeat MUST, get a trusted mentor to work with you. There are so many great organizations that provide mentorship, many for free, so use those resources! MANDATORY!

2. You WILL, repeat WILL, make mistakes in your teaching. We don’t ask our students to be mistake free — why should you ask that of yourself? Recover from errors, modify and adjust, just as if you were performing on your instrument.

3. You NEED, repeat NEED, to keep your eyes focused on the real reasons we do this job instead of being seduced into the chasing of trophies and medals. Those are all great, but they are hollow inside. Find your true reason for going to work each day and remind yourself of it often!

Nguyen TerryTerry Nguyen, lecturer at the University of California, Riverside, offers these tips:

1. You can learn a lot from your students! In such a diverse music program at University of California, Riverside, I have met students who are talented composers and audio engineers. My students have helped me with audio set-ups for recording music as well as navigating hybrid, online teaching.

2. Talk to your colleagues. Ask questions. It’s always good to stay on top of professional development opportunities — for example, requesting funding to continue to grow your own skills as a musician and educator.

3. Keep more seasoned students engaged by giving them opportunities to teach new students. Giving students a sense of investment and ownership in the program really elevates the experience for all involved.

Otto TannerTanner Otto, Orchestra Director at Sycamore Community Schools in Cincinnati, Ohio, says:

1. Set your classroom routine and expectations from day one, it will save you a lot of time later on. Your students should know exactly what they need to do when they come in the room. Continue to look for ways to make the start of class as efficient as possible.

2. Really get to know your students — relationships are everything. Make a point to have at least one meaningful conversation with a student each day. I find that there is usually time while students are coming into the room and getting settled.

3. Strive to be the best teacher you can be by finding areas for growth, while also giving yourself lots of grace. Your colleagues and mentors are there to answer questions and to help you improve. Having at least one person to bounce ideas off of may ensure that they are well thought out and ready for your program and your students. Having a “go-to” list of colleagues and mentors will help you throughout your career.

Perkins KennethKenneth Perkins, music teacher at Joseph Keels Elementary School in Columbia, South Carolina, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Always be open to try new things.

2. Remember that iron sharpens iron so surround yourself with teachers who are amazing role models, and find success in simple things.

3. Don’t be afraid to ask for help or say plainly, “I don’t know how to do this thing.” That is perfectly fine — in fact, it shows that you are always willing to learn. Your students and colleagues will respect your honesty.

Pohland JoelJoel Pohland, Band Director (8-12) and Assistant Band Director (5-7) at Pierz Healy High School in Minnesota, says:

1. Build relationships: Take time to get to know your students beyond their instruments and the music classroom. Ask what they like to do and try to connect, even if it means trying something new as a teacher/person. Students love when you are invested in them as people and go out of your way to make connections beyond music, especially when you remember their activities or interests out of the blue.

2. Have fun with your students: This goes with Tip No. 1 above — building relationships. Joke with students and make them know you are human. Read the manga comics they talk about, play Spikeball with them, shoot hoops as you pass by, play video games with them before events when the entire band is hanging out in the music room. Students want to see us as human beings and the more we can be on their level, the more they will get on our level when we want to work hard and make music together.

3. Go home (work will always be there tomorrow): This took me the longest time to learn, and I am still not great at it. The lesson plans, the trip planning, the schedules, the information for events, it all must be done, but it must be done at work and not at home. When you go home, disconnect. Do the things you enjoy, and you will find that you are way more refreshed and ready to take on the tasks to be done the next day. You, your family and your students will all benefit.

Powell AlecAlec Powell, Director of Choirs at Mountain Ridge Junior High in American Fork, Utah, offers these tips:

1. Make sure your artistic bucket is filled with things that make you happy. It is easy to get lost in the devotion to your program. I find I have the most fulfilling teacher moments when I pursue artistic endeavors outside of the classroom.

2. Know the value of your time. My students know that I will never answer an email outside of school hours unless it is a true emergency. I don’t take work home with me, and that means redefining what are the most essential elements of my curriculum. Don’t let teaching become your personality trait. That is just one facet of your life — you are so much more than that.

3. Failure is the mark of someone who is trying. Whether that is lessons, concerts, festivals, etc. This not only applies to you, but your students and program as well. Give yourself grace when things don’t go exactly the way you envisioned. Allow yourself to laugh off a bad lesson, remember the growth that happened in the weeks leading up to a poor rating. This mindset has greatly enhanced my experience as a teacher and made for a fulfilling career.

Rogers BenjaminBenjamin Rogers, Director of Choirs at Liberty Middle School in Spanaway, Washington, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Make self-care a part of your weekly schedule. Our nation’s mental health crisis has affected teachers, and I see many leaving the profession every day. Just like our students, we need to consider our own needs in Maslow’s Hierarchy because we cannot enrich others if we don’t take care of ourselves.

2. Teach the students first. Take time to get to know them. Build community first. Great literature is great literature, but first and foremost, you are teaching people. My students do a community circle every week and activities like these help foster a collaborative spirit while supporting each other in the classroom.

3. This may be more of a tip for a future educator: If you get a chance, work a job in customer service. Nothing prepares you for talking with parents more than working on the front lines of customer service.

Schoolland AmandaAmanda Schoolland, Music Director and computer coding instructor at Metlakatla High School in Alaska, says:

1. Relationships are everything! Make positive connections with students, families and colleagues. Be genuine and always assume the best intentions.  Everything else will fall into place.

2. Have a sense of humor! Laugh with your students as much as possible. Tell anecdotes, listen to their stories, have class jokes. Not only will your students be more comfortable, but you will enjoy your role so much more.

3. Be flexible. Students, staff, admin and parents will constantly throw curveballs. Try not to stress about it.  Go with the flow and adjust, that way when you ask colleagues/students/staff to adjust for a concert or extra rehearsal, you have a bank account of positive interactions to draw on.

Stadler JenniferJennifer Stadler, independent piano teacher at Jennifer Stadler’s Piano Studio in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, offers these tips:

1. Learning doesn’t end when you finish school. Continue to hone your craft as a teacher and musician. Find an experienced teacher to keep you accountable. And, apply for grants to help cover the cost. In my first year of teaching, I received a grant from my local chapter of MTNA toward a mentorship with Dr. Rebecca Johnson, who helped me write lesson plans, troubleshoot issues and hone my studio policies. She provided constructive criticism of my teaching and connected me with seasoned teachers to observe. Our work together was invaluable in establishing a successful studio. I also continued private piano lessons with my undergraduate teacher Dr. Christopher Durrenberger. The pace of our work was slower than in an academic setting, but it helped me maintain my skills and, more importantly, stay connected to the experience of being a student.

2. Carve out uncompromisable time for yourself each week outside of work. Spend time with family and friends, pursue recreational activities and try new things. It may seem counterintuitive to take a break when you have a massive to-do list, but it’s important to rest so that you can be more productive when you are working. And, although it may be tempting to center your life around music, spending time outside of your field will broaden your knowledge and increase your creativity as a teacher. Some of my best lessons in the classroom were learned outside of it. For example, comedy improvisation taught me how to get out of my head and into the moment, which translated into exercises to help my students struggling with performance anxiety. And, my current hobby, rock climbing, has increased my bodily awareness and problem solving, which has helped me troubleshoot technical challenges with my students.

3. Document your successes in a way that’s meaningful to you. For example, create a folder for student thank-you notes, composition projects, awards, etc. Or, keep a journal of positive experiences or simply make a photo album of memorable moments. Make sure that these items are easily accessible and refer back to them often, especially on difficult days to counteract your brain’s negativity bias. I implanted this practice three years ago and I wish I had started sooner because it has had a tremendous impact on my confidence as a teacher.

Stanford Mark 2Mark Stanford, Director of Bands and music teacher at Springfield High School in Pennsylvania, says:

1. Avoid making major program changes in your first year. You are an outsider stepping into the community. Change will be most impactful when you are able to create it as a member of the organization and culture.

2. Seek advice from your colleagues. Experienced music educators are not just a resource for pedagogical practices, they can help you better understand your community and how your decisions will be received.

3. Build positive relationships with students, colleagues, administrators, community members. While our job is to teach music, we must remember that we teach music to and with people.

Tambellini BrandonBrandon Tambellini, Band Director at Blackhawk High School in Beaver Falls, Pennsylvania, offers these tips:

1. Inspire your students to love music instead of instructing them to. Students who are inspired to create music are stronger musicians.

2. Know three facts or interests about each student you teach. The more you are able to connect and relate with your students, the easier it is to educate them.

3. As a music educator, you have an obligation to possess and demonstrate strong musicianship to your students. Perform the musical details you are rehearsing instead of verbally explaining them.

Taylor Heather2Heather Taylor, instrumental music teacher at Lakeshore Elementary School in Rochester, New York, says:

1. Don’t be afraid to ask for help! There are so many people willing to offer their guidance and expertise!

2. Observe other music teachers! I found my own style of teaching by watching what worked and didn’t work for others.

3. Build relationships with students! I have worked in seven different buildings in my district, and I always start by building relationships with my students first. When you win over your students the rest will follow (staff, parents, etc.).

VanDoren KatieKatie VanDoren, Associate Director of Bands at Vandergrift High School in Austin, Texas, recommends that first-year educators:

1. Plan: Always have a plan for how you are going to teach something, your timeline and your goals. When we look at contest prep, a concert cycle or a full year of band, it is very easy to become overwhelmed or lost in where to begin. I always start with my long-term goals by writing them down and then build my short-term goals off of them. This helps me break a large goal into smaller, more manageable chunks to achieve benchmarks. Spreadsheets can help organize this and show you where you are, where you want to be and how long you have to get there.

2. Ask Questions: We never want to feel uneducated or “less than,” but the only way to grow is to put yourself out there and ask. No matter how many years you’ve been in the classroom, there is always something new to learn. This is especially true for young teachers, and the more questions you ask, the more you will learn. Ask questions about anything and everything (timeline, lesson planning, sequencing, pedagogy, classroom management, team teaching, etc.). As uncomfortable as it is and as difficult as it may seem to find someone to help with all these things, there are people who would love to help you and answer these questions — all you have to do is ask!

3. Get Help: Find mentors and get their help! Not everyone has a built-in mentor within their program. However, everyone came from somewhere and is a teacher because someone inspired them to do so. Start there! Use your previous teachers as mentors, to ask questions of and to listen to your groups. If there are other teachers in the fine arts department, ask them for help with classroom management and lesson planning. There are also incredible online resources these days with veteran teachers who would love to help you with sequencing, pedagogy, music selection, etc.

Vitale ChristopherChris Vitale, Director of Bands at Westfield High School in New Jersey, says:

1. Never put the product over the process. The process drives the student experience, and nothing is more important than the experience you provide your students.

2. Invite mentors into your rehearsals. Feel comfortable admitting that you have a lot to learn and be open to getting help from anyone who will offer it.

3. It’s OK to admit when you are wrong, especially to your students.

Walter ArmondArmond Walter, Director of Instrumental Music at Meadville Area Middle School and Meadville Area Senior High School in Pennsylvania, offers these tips:

1. Communicate. Don’t be afraid to ask for help. Mistakes are going to happen.

2. Student success must be a priority. Measuring success will be different for each individual student. Make sure your students feel and see their success.

3. Be yourself and have fun! Let your students and colleagues get to know who you are. Be involved with your school and public community.

Wilga AlexanderAlex Wilga, Director of Bands at Davenport Central High School in Iowa, recommends that first-year educators:

1.Ask for help. There are a lot of things that you don’t know. Ask those around you for answers to the things you don’t know. Don’t worry, as soon as you learn what you don’t know there will be a lot more that you don’t know. I don’t know if that ever ends.

2. Make sure you are creating a program that you would want to be in and not one that you think others expect you to have. Your students will have a lot more fun if you are having fun.

3. Don’t try to compete with others, just be you. You know what is best for your program and your community, and if you ever get stuck, refer to tip 1.

Read tips for first-year music teachers from the 2025 “40 Under 40,” 2024 “40 Under 40,” 2023 “40 Under 40” and 2021 “40 Under 40” educators for more invaluable advice.

MTNA Conference

Yamaha grand piano

Music Teachers National Association 2023 Conference

Welcome music educators! 

Our team is looking forward to meeting you at this year’s MTNA Conference in Reno, Nevada, and serving your professional needs in any way we can.

SEE OUR SHOWCASE AT MTNA

The Music Teachers National Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

Yamaha is committed to supporting music education and organizations like MTNA. Please email us at educators@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

See our Product Videos

Yamaha Showcase at MTNA

Demystifying the Remote Lesson: Three Ways to Help Connect with Your Students

March 27,  8:00-9:00 a.m.

Presented by Mona Wu DeCesare, Yeeseon Kwon, Pamela Pike and Heratch Touresian

During the pandemic, remote lessons exploded in popularity as many music teachers became experts in new technology. As we all know, distance learning is not going away. In this showcase, we have assembled a panel of experts to demonstrate three ways to conduct remote lessons utilizing three types of pianos.

Yamaha Artist Presentations at MTNA

Saturday, March 25

  • 9:15 – 10:15 a.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Omar Roy: What Autism Looks Like (Southern Pacific CD)
  • 9:15 – 10:15 a.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Angelin Chang: Keys to Unlock Musical Mastery and Wellness (Sierra 2)
  • 2:15 – 2:45 p.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Omar Roy: Appropriated or Authentic?: Unlocking Cultural Engagement (Cascade 4 and 5)
  • 3:30 – 4:30 p.m. — Pedagogy Saturdays Omar Roy and others: New Faculty Panel (Cascade 3)

Sunday, March 26

  • 8:15 a.m. — National Finals: MTNA Senior Piano Competitions (Sierra 5)
  • 9:15 – 10:15 a.m. — Lara Downes: Keynote Address (Nugget Grand Ballroom 1)
  • 2:15 – 3:15 p.m. — Rochelle Sennet: Bach to Black: Piano Suites by Composers of African Descent (Sierra 2)
  • 5:00 – 6:00 p.m. — Announcement of Senior Performance Competition Winners (Cascade 3)

Monday, March 27

  • 8:00 – 9:00 a.m. — Yamaha Showcase with Heratch Touresian, Pamela Pike, Yeeseon Kwon and Mona Wu DeCesare (Sierra 2)
  • 9:15 – 9:35 a.m. — Andrea McAlister: Building Better Habits: Consciously Choosing our Unconscious Behaviors for Successful Practice and Performance (Redwood 6)
  • 9:15 – 9:35 a.m. — Christopher Creviston: Branded Degenerate: Voice Silenced (Southern Pacific CD)
  • 11:45 a.m. – 12:05 p.m. — Pamela Pike: Musical Star or Supernova? Preventing Burnout of 21st Century Professionals (Cascade 3)
  • 2:15 – 3:15 p.m.— Ka Man “Melody” Ng: Discover Hidden Abilities: How You Can Use Everyday Psychology to Unleash Students’ Potential to the Max (Cascade 3)
  • 2:15 – 3:15 p.m.— Omar Roy: Setting the Foundation: Strategies for Addressing the Unique Needs of Adolescent Beginners (Southern Pacific EF)
  • 3:30 – 5:00 p.m.— Winners Concert: National Winners of the MTNA Senior Performance and Composition Competition Winners (Sierra 5)

For a complete schedule, please check the MTNA Conference page.  

Professional Development Resources

Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

PRODUCT SHOWCASES

Yamaha Disklavier with Dan Tepfer

Yamaha AvantGrand Concept Video

Yamaha Concert Grand Piano

CVP-800 Overview


PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System

Remote Music Education and Live Streaming


SOFTWARE

Dorico for iPad

Cubase Recording Software

Dorico Music Notation Software

Introduction to Dorico for iPad

Continue reading

How to Cast Oculus Quest to Your TV With Sound

Ah, virtual reality. The most immersive sensory experience for the person wearing the headset. And, arguably, the goofiest spectacle to witness as a bystander.

Long have we waited for a friend’s turn to be over so they can relinquish the headset and give us the opportunity to try our own luck in the virtual realm. Perhaps a demon is waiting around the bend, or a welterweight is warming up in the corner (almost literally!). It’s a different world altogether once you don the goggles, but it doesn’t need to be an exclusionary action.

By streaming (“casting”) your Oculus Quest experience to your TV with sound, the incredibly personal experience becomes an activity where everyone can be involved. There’s a reason the functionality is built in. Here’s how to activate it.

Casting with Oculus Quest 2

It’s simple to stream from the headset to your TV. Just follow these three steps:

1. Ready Your TV

Your TV needs to be connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your phone and headset. Before you try to cast from your Oculus, make sure you can stream any video content from your phone to your TV. That will confirm you’re ready to stream from your headset to the TV:

  • Smart TVs and Chromecast-enabled devices are your best bets for casting to a TV from an Android™ phone.
  • For Apple® devices, the most seamless screen mirroring will be with an Apple TV® or a smart TV enabled with AirPlay®. If you don’t have either, there are streaming options available from other connected devices, such as AirScreen on Firestick.

2. Cast from Oculus

You can turn on casting from both the headset and the Oculus App. If you’re already wearing the headset, it’s easier to do it from there, since it’s covering your eyes. Here’s how:

  • Start by going to the home screen and opening the menu at the bottom of the screen.
Screenshot.

This is where you open new apps, see which friends are online and adjust settings. It’s also where you can access Sharing functions via this icon:

Graphic of three balls with two connected to one central one.
  • Click the Sharing icon to open sharing options. Click the one called “Cast.”
Screenshot.
  • A “Cast From This Headset” menu will appear. Select the TV / device you want to stream to and click “Next.”
Screenshot.
  • Check your TV screen to confirm that the casting was successful.

If you instead want to cast from the Oculus App, follow these steps:

  • Open the Oculus App on your iOS or Android smartphone.
  • Click the screen mirroring icon in the upper right corner of the app.
Screenshot.
  • Press the dropdown arrow to cast to a different device other than your phone, such as your TV or a streaming device.
Screenshot.
  • Select the TV / streaming device you want to cast to.
Screenshot.
  • Return to the main casting menu above, confirm your casting device / TV is selected, and click “Start.”
Screenshot.
  • Check your TV screen to confirm the casting was successful.

To stop casting, return to the share menu on the headset or casting menu on your phone and click “Stop Casting.”

3. Adjust the Audio

As with any video streaming between devices, there may be a lag between what’s seen (and heard) on the headset and what’s cast to your TV. Depending on the game and level of involvement of those in the room, you’ll probably want to drop the volume of one of them (likely the headset) so others can hear just one audio stream.

For the best audio playback from your TV, the following are recommended:

  • If using a sound bar with your TV, choose “Stereo” or “Gaming” sound modes.
  • If using an AV receiver, choose “7 Channel Stereo” or “Gaming” sound modes.

Recommended Party Apps

Not all Oculus Quest 2 apps are fun to play with an audience watching, but some are fantastic additions to a party. Try these five games for starters:

  • Beat Saber
  • I Expect You to Die 2
  • The Room VR: A Dark Matter
  • Keep Talking and Nobody Explodes
  • Vader Immortal

A Song for You

Whenever Valentine’s Day rolls around, I can’t help but wonder if there’s a better way to tell a partner how we feel, a friend how special they are, a secret love how we cherish them from afar, than with flowers, candy or a card.

How about sharing a song?

We can press play when we’re out for a drive, slip a pair of headphones over the ears of our beloved, serenade the unsuspecting before dinner, or compile a playlist of the songs that say it best. I’d never turn away a dozen roses, but let’s face it: Flowers die. Music doesn’t.

Songwriter/producer Darrell Brown, who was a recent VIP guest in a class I teach, said it best when he told my students that there are three hard and fast ways we look at love when expressing it in song: you either have it, lost it, or want it.

This made me smile. I never thought about it that way!

Another colleague — “songwriting whisperer” Marty Dodson — has observed in his online Songtown Newsletter that, “In many ways, love is the simplest and yet [most] profound human emotion or feeling. From the love we first feel for our mother as an infant to the love that first breaks our heart and beyond, the story of love is the one we all chase in the pursuit of a hit song.”

Even though I write ’em, I listen to them (and for them) too, and as I listener I seek a story that describes the feelings I’ve experienced in love or loss so that I feel understood. There are a spectacular range of classic examples to choose from. The magnificent “At Last” and the poignant “Song For You” have been serenaded and danced to at weddings for decades. Then there are more obscure ballads like Katie Melua’s “The Closest Thing To Crazy,” in which the singer becomes aware that she’s acting more like a teenager than her age in being unable to control her romantic feelings. I discovered this beauty while on eternal hold with an airline. True, it played over and over again because the wait was so long, but it was actually the very first listen-through that caught my heart off-guard. And despite the frustration of that endless call, it was the only song I listened to for weeks.

The sweet thing about sharing a song that’s new to the palate is that it tells someone that your feelings for them are also unique — not just words that have been sung to thousands of brides. Or grooms.

One of the most stellar three-minute confessions I’ve heard recently is Gary Barlow’s “This Is My Time.” From the title, one might think the song is a narcissistic brag about reaching stardom or fame but it is anything but. In the stunning lyric, Mr. Barlow confides that if he is to be done in by love, then it’s his time to perish, to die by the sword, to drink the poison.

Your choice of share doesn’t necessarily even need to have words as long as the music does its job. Take Santo And Jonny’s whimsical “Sleep Walk.” My husband (then boyfriend) won my heart when he strummed it into my answering machine (there was no such thing as voice mail in those days) so that when I came home from the world’s frazzled pace, I’d feel his love.

It worked.

Whether it’s unrequited, undecided or misguided — even if you don’t know if someone could ever love you back — a song-share can be a most charming, flirty, clandestine, brave moment of truth.

Or, as Indie artist Hotel Mira once said, “Dig deep and pinpoint something beautiful, ask a hard question, take a stand.” So put it out there. Start a fire. And if you feel certain the object of your affection truly is the one you would take a bullet for, I don’t see how you can miss with the gift of some music that has deep meaning to you.

Happy Valentine’s Day, lovebirds. If you’re a bird who doesn’t currently have a love, I hope that you find a song that brings you closer to it.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

What’s the Difference Between Alto, Tenor and Bass Trombones?

Trombones are one of the more interesting and unique instruments that you’ll see anywhere. Unlike saxophones, pianos, guitars or virtually any other musical instrument, trombones have no reeds, keys or strings. With trombones, it’s all about moving their long slides.

That said, like trumpets, cornets and other brass instruments, the sound that trombones make is largely dependent upon the intricate tubing that comprises the horn. Also significant to the instrument’s sound is its bell size and the shape of its bore (interior chamber). In this article, we’ll explore the things that differentiate the three most popular types of trombones: alto, tenor and bass. But before we do, let’s talk about some of their history and commonalities.

Origins of the Trombone

Originally developed in the mid-15th century, trombones have changed rather significantly over time. Until the 18th century, the instrument was called a “saqueboute” (in French) or a “sackbut” (in English). Some sources suggest the name comes from the French “sacquer,” which means “to draw out” (as in a sword from its sheath).

The current name simply means “large trumpet.” In German, it’s called a “posaune,” which was also an early term for trumpet. The two horns are relatives and share the same early predecessor. Throughout history, the trombone has been used in many different musical settings, from concert halls to churches to basement jazz clubs, though when it first rose to popularity, it was primarily found in the courts of aristocrats and used by military bands. Beethoven is credited as the first composer to use trombones in a secular symphony (in 1808). Today, the trombone is a mainstay of myriad musical genres, from classical to jazz, marching bands to Afrobeat.

Similarities

The three most popular types of trombones in use today — alto, tenor and bass — were all designed to mimic the range of the human voice. (There are also higher range soprano trombones, but they are less common). As mentioned previously, with trombones, it’s all about the slide; moving it serves to lengthen or shorten the tube, thus changing the note. (The tightness of the players’ lips in the mouthpiece — the embouchure — also has an effect on pitch, though it’s more subtle).

While each of these three trombones look much the same and act in a similar fashion, there are some significant differences too. Let’s take a closer look.

Alto Trombone

Alto trombones are somewhat less popular than their tenor and bass counterparts; for the most part, they are employed to perform the symphonies of yesteryear with historical accuracy.

As the name would suggest, alto trombones play higher notes than tenor or bass models. To accomplish this, their bodies, bells and bores are smaller. And because they (and their slides) are shorter, the slide positions used to make notes are also different from other types of trombones. Alto trombones are pitched in the key of E-flat.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-872 alto trombone.

Tenor Trombone

The most common type of trombone is the tenor — so much so that it’s considered the “standard” trombone. Tenor trombones are tuned in B-flat and have a characteristic piercing, bright sound that pokes through in even the densest musical sections. This makes them perfect for large jazz ensembles where the playing involves strident accents and raucous solos, as opposed to the more subtle demands of classical music.

That’s also why tenor trombones are often a staple of marching bands, though in recent years there has been a trend to replace them with baritone horns, which are more maneuverable (since they don’t have slides, less space is needed between players) and can be easier for young students to learn.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-881 tenor trombone.

Tenor trombones are sometimes made with F-attachments (sometimes called F-triggers.) These are levers that increase the inner length of the instrument’s tubing, allowing players to more easily play lower notes, with decreased wind resistance and without the time and effort it takes to extend the slide all the way out. Yamaha offers several tenor trombone models with this feature.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-882OR Custom Xeno tenor trombone with F-attachment.

Bass Trombone

To the untrained eye and ear, tenor and bass trombones are essentially the same instrument. They look similar and are the same size in terms of total length (both are 2.7 meters); in addition, both are tuned to B-flat, and their lowest and highest notes are the same.

However, there are two important differences, the most significant of which is their bore size (the diameter of the interior tubing that blossoms up to the bell of the horn). Bass trombones feature a wider bore than tenor trombones, making it easier to to play low notes. In addition, they have a bigger bell. For these reasons, bass trombones produce a lower, mellower tone than tenor trombones. As a result, they are more often employed in orchestras than jazz ensembles and are typically used to play classical music instead of jazz.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YBL-421G bass trombone.

Valve Trombone

A variation on the tenor trombone is the valve trombone, first developed in the early 19th century, around the same time that valves were first incorporated on the trumpet. Instead of a slide, valve trombones use a series of three piston valves (similar to those on trumpets) to change pitch. This makes it easier for student trumpeters and euphonium players to learn and also makes fast, difficult passages easier to perform. As a bonus, valve trombones match visually with standard tenor trombones since they have the same type of bell, mouthpiece and overall length. The tradeoff, however, is that they have a slightly less “open” tone than traditional slide trombones.

Trombone seen in profile.
Yamaha YSL-354V valve trombone.

Interestingly, a hybrid instrument called the “Superbone” was developed in the 1980s for legendary trombonist Maynard Ferguson. This was a combination valve and slide trombone that had both a complete valve section and a working slide. The Superbone can be played as a slide trombone, a valve trombone, or in combination; alternative slide positions are available when valves are depressed.

Trombone Mouthpieces

One final note: When it comes to trombones, not all mouthpieces are equal. Generally, larger trombones require larger mouthpieces. If the bore of an instrument is wider, then the shank or “arm” of the mouthpiece must be larger as well … and so must be the cup of the mouthpiece, where players put their tightened lips. Conversely, the smaller the trombone, the narrower or smaller the mouthpiece. For more information about brass mouthpieces, check out this blog posting.

 

Yamaha offers a wide variety of alto, tenor, bass and valve trombones. Click here for more information.

Creative Vocal Tricks, Techniques and Tracks to Listen to on Vinyl

The analog smoothness that only vinyl can offer really lends itself to vocals. The more complex the harmonies and styling, the better. Here are a few of my favorite vocal-centric tracks for you to investigate. Curl up in your listening chair, relax and get in the mood for some deep listening … and by all means, sing along!

The Beatles – “Because” (Abbey Road)

Beyond their obvious flair for writing memorable songs, John Lennon and Paul McCartney (along with, sometimes, George Harrison) had a remarkable ability to blend their voices together. From the Everly Brothers-like tight harmonies of “Please Please Me,” “This Boy,” “If I Fell” and “Two of Us” to the soaring countermelodies of “Help” and “I’ve Got a Feeling” (not to mention the astonishing 6th-chord “yeah” that ends “She Loves You”), The Beatles combined and refined their influences — primarily English music hall music and 1950s R&B — in unusual and sonically challenging ways, in the process redefining rock vocals for all time.

Perhaps nowhere is this more in evidence than on the track “Because” from the group’s final album, Abbey Road. Nearly completely a cappella (the only accompaniment is a harpsichord playing arpeggios derived from the chords to Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony played backwards), the track consists of nine gorgeously intertwined vocal lines, sung to perfection by Messrs. Lennon, McCartney and Harrison. Amazingly, according to their engineer Geoff Emerick, they recorded these vocals live in just five hours, with the three Beatles gathered in a semi-circle singing their different parts simultaneously (with Paul giving hand signals to ensure proper phrasing and drummer Ringo Starr sitting on a nearby stool lending moral support), then repeating the process twice more. If you want to dig even deeper into this stunning display of vocal mastery, you can find remixed (and completely a cappella) versions of “Because” on the 1996 outtakes compilation Anthology 3, as well as on 2006’s Cirque du Soleil mashup Love.

The Beatles – “I Am the Walrus” (Magical Mystery Tour)

This track stands out not so much for the Beatles’ vocals (though John Lennon, who reportedly hated the sound of his voice, insisted on singing his lead into a cheap microphone put through a fuzz box) but for the histrionics of the Mike Sammes Singers, hired by producer George Martin to liven things up by adding assorted “whoo”s,” “ha ha ha hee hee hee”s and pig snortings. Towards the end of the (very long) fadeout, Lennon had the idea of superimposing the sound of a radio broadcast, and you can hear various snatches of dialog from the Shakespeare play The Tragedy of King Lear as Ringo twiddles the dial, further adding to the wash of psychedelia. Turn on and tune in, man!

The Rolling Stones – “You Can’t Always Get What You Want” (Let It Bleed)

While many associate the Beatles with studio creativity, the Rolling Stones were no slouches in that department either. This legendary track, long a Stones concert staple, opens with a chorus sung by a choir of 60 schoolchildren, double-tracked for a huge, expansive sound. The female backing vocals that later soar in and out of the mix lend an atmospheric effect that flattens out when merely streaming this classic or listening to it on CD.

The Beach Boys – “God Only Knows” (Pet Sounds)

Brian Wilson is the unquestioned modern master of vocal harmony and arrangement, and with such a broad catalog of work, it’s hard to know which Beach Boys song to choose. But I’m going to go with “God Only Knows,” not because Paul McCartney considers it the best song ever written, and not even because it comes from Pet Sounds, which many critics consider to be one of the greatest albums ever recorded, but because of the clever way it makes use of the centuries-old musical device known as a round. (Think “Three Blind Mice” or “Frère Jacques,” where a simple melody is repeated but at different starting times so as to create varied harmonies with each occurrence.)

Here, Wilson not only has the first line of the chorus sung repeatedly during the fadeout, each time staggered by a few beats, but he has a different group member singing it — even little-used Bruce Johnston, whose voice is rarely featured so prominently on Beach Boys records — adding a striking tonal variation to the ever-shifting harmonies. For an example of more Wilson wizardry on that same album, check out the sudden, and stunning, a capella breakdown in the middle of “Sloop John B.”

Crosby, Stills & Nash – “Helplessly Hoping” (Crosby, Stills & Nash)

CSN’s debut record, released in 1969, is a marvelous example of how three voices can blend together so seamlessly, the whole becomes greater than the sum of the parts. In numerous interviews, Messrs. Crosby, Stills and Nash have talked about the first time they heard themselves sing together, and the magic that ensued. When you listen to “Helplessly Hoping,” you can hear it! All three sing lead, with equal volume and presence as they enter in turns before singing together to create a big wall of sound. This track lends itself especially to vinyl, because a great analog setup illustrates the nuances in each of their voices, instead of just sounding like one big, fat, overdubbed vocal.

Michael Jackson – “Billy Jean” (Thriller)

Thriller is one of the biggest selling records in history for a reason — it’s that good, and Michael Jackson was a supreme sonic craftsman as well as an amazing vocalist. (Fun fact: Even though recording engineer Bruce Swedien did 91 separate mixes of “Billie Jean,” the second take is the one that appears on the album.)

Like a great movie that reveals more nuance with repeated viewings, this track is loaded with musical tidbits. Take, for example, the strident “don’t think twice” echoed vocal you hear answering Michael’s lead at around two minutes in. Producer Quincy Jones had MJ sing it through a six-foot long cardboard tube. Once you hear it, you’ll never be able to un-hear it! Crazy.

Squeeze – “Tempted” (East Side Story)

This Brit band hit the scene in 1974, featuring signature harmonies from co-founders Glenn Tilbrook and Chris Difford, where Tilbrook goes way up high and Difford goes way, way low. By the time Elvis Costello took the reins to produce their fourth album, East Side Story in 1981, the music press was calling the pair “the next Lennon and McCartney.” Every track on this record offers interesting vocal work, but “Tempted” is the jewel. New recruit Paul Carrack sings the lead vocal, with Difford and Tillbrook solidly backing him up. If you listen really closely, you can hear Elvis Costello singing backup as well.

Shriekback – “Underwaterboys” (Big Night Music)

Old-school rock magazine Trouser Press once said Shriekback records “always featured insidiously weird vocals.” They came by it honestly, with lead singer Barry Andrews having worked with the likes of XTC, Robert Fripp and Gang of Four.

Andrew’s voice is heavily processed here, layered over the main vocal, along with at least two female vocal tracks above him. The better your system, the more nuance you’ll hear, and you can’t stream this one, at least not at the time of this writing. The CD versions are only mediocre, so a vinyl pressing is the way to go … or, if you’re in a totally ’80s mode, choose the cassette instead. Don’t laugh: Cassette copies of Big Night Music fetch over $50 each if you can find them!

Laurie Anderson – “O Superman” (Big Science)

This was the song that launched Laurie Anderson’s career. She put multiple layers of her voice (some recorded through the then-new Vocoder) over a looped “ha, ha, ha, ha,” then added a harmonizer effect for a totally weird yet compelling sound. Though this track is packed with layers of information, it manages to still have a lot of space and ambience. It’s hard to believe that it was produced on a $500 budget and recorded in Andersons’ hallway.

Joni Mitchell – “Car on a Hill” (Court and Spark)

Court and Spark is Joni Mitchell’s most successful record in terms of airplay, record sales and critical reviews. This album, her sixth, also marks a solid transition from Mitchell’s folky beginnings to a jazzier, more experimental path.

Always known for having a wide vocal range, Mitchell hits some of the highest notes of her career in the chorus of “Car on a Hill.” She also employs a harmonizer effect extensively, along with major multitracking to thicken the presentation. Graham Nash, David Crosby, and even the comedy duo Cheech & Chong provide backing vocals elsewhere on the record, but this track is all Joni.

How to Keep Falling in Love with Guitar

My love affair with the guitar began in my early teens. I was initially drawn to the physical shapes and vibrant colors, but I think the sound of the instrument is what really got to me. The fact that a plank of wood with six strings stretched across it could evoke so many tones, musical styles and emotions was mind-blowing!

Yet it wasn’t until I picked the instrument up for the first time that I realized it could not make a harmonious sound until my hands coaxed it into doing so. Over many years, and with concerted effort, those sounds would eventually work together to form progressions, songs, and a wonderful career in music for this wide-eyed newbie.

I remember being absolutely intrigued by the symmetry of the chord shapes. I’d take a D major triad shape, then move the same triangular shape along the strings to create new sounds, new chords, new melodies … and new emotional content.

Chord chart for guitarists.

Sometimes I’d add or subtract a note from that basic shape and be amazed at how big a change that simple alteration made to the overall sound. My untrained hands and mind then went in search of new shapes and music along the length of those pain-inducing wires. I felt like an explorer, roaming the fretboard wilderness for an oasis of repertoire and harmonic vistas, and along the way, I discovered that some positions and shapes created pleasing “happy mistakes,” while others were downright cringe-worthy. I remembered the successes and learned to avoid the minefield of dissonant explosions.

The Challenge

I was brought up to work hard, honor my word and complete projects and tasks to the highest possible standard. So when I started to learn the guitar, I had the distinct feeling it would be a lifetime investment in time, money, and above all, myself. I didn’t think it would turn into a career, but life has a funny way of taking you on a journey … especially if you are listening intently and allowing opportunity to present itself to you.

Sometimes we also need to take the initiative and make the decision to improve by taking lessons, going to music school and working on our craft. None of this can be done for you, so you have to be proactive, make a commitment and prioritize your time.

Even when I was training to be a visual artist, I would keep coming back to the guitar. It soothed me, intrigued me and gave my fingers a constant challenge that could not be found by holding a brush, decorating a surface or completing an interior design. It’s that chance to improve that keeps me returning to the strings and constantly drives me forward to be a better musician.

Sometimes It’s Okay To Say No

I feel extremely blessed and fortunate to play the guitar for a living. But this also means that, sometimes, the last thing I want to do is see a guitar, play one, or even listen to music.

I’ve realized over the years that this is normal. So when a friend asks me to go and see their band — something I equate to asking a dentist to watch someone pull teeth after a day at work — I’ve learned that, at times, it’s okay to say “no thank you.” Taking time off from the instrument can be extremely helpful. No one wants to eat sushi and drink carrot juice every day. Take a break and renew your passion for the familiar flavors again.

New Discoveries

Nothing ignites my passion for the guitar more than discovering a new concept, approach or epiphany that I can share with my students. I often think of these ideas while lying in bed. I try to do all the theory in my head that very night; in the morning, I take a few hours to prove to my satisfaction that this new concept actually works on the instrument. This can often lift me from a playing “funk” (no pun intended) and inspire my next phase of enlightenment on the guitar.

Another great way to exit a rough patch in your playing progress is to simply take your guitar out of your typical playing environment or practice room and let new surroundings inspire you. Trust me, it works.

The Video

During the first half of this video, I’m using double-stop sixths and thirds to outline the chord changes of a popular (but very complex) blues progression. This demonstrates how shapes can make musical sounds that keep me inspired to learn even more simple symmetrical fingerings.

The second half of the video shifts to improvising with arpeggios (chord tones played as single-note melodies). I’m using these to outline each of the chord changes in order to solidify the harmonic structure underpinning the top-line melody. Think of arpeggios and chords as smaller shapes within the larger shape of a scale — something I like to call “shapes within shapes.”

The Guitars

The CSF-TA is the smallest (parlor-size) member of the Yamaha TransAcoustic lineup of guitars. This tiny powerhouse is perfect for fingerstyle blues like the tasty double-stops you see and hear in the video. It features a solid spruce top, mahogany back and sides, plus a wonderful array of onboard chorus, room and hall reverb effects, all without the need for external amplification.

Acoustic guitar propped on leather couch in masculine living room.
Yamaha CSF-TA.

The Yamaha Pacifica 612VIIFM takes the lead guitar role in this video. It features an alder body with a flame-maple veneer top (in this particular instrument, finished in translucent Indigo blue). The neck is a medium profile maple with a rosewood fingerboard. I’m using a blend of the Seymour Duncan neck and middle single-coil pickups to create the authentic blues tone you hear.

Closeup of body of a blue electric guitar propped up on a blue leather couch.
Yamaha Pacifica 612VIIFM.

The Wrap-Up

We all fall in love with the guitar for different reasons: the way the wood resonates with our body, the feel of the instrument in our hands as we coax new sounds out of it, the roar of the strings when we play amplified. Many of us stay infatuated and committed to the relationship, while others may take some time away from the connection to explore other desires of the heart.

The flame burns bright at first and may flicker at times, but I truly believe it never burns out. Sometimes we just need to find new ways to fan those musical embers in order to spark a passionate new love affair with guitar.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha CSF-TA TransAcoustic guitar.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha Pacifica 612VIIFM electric guitar.

Top 10 Romantic Movies to Stream … That Aren’t Too Sappy

If you’re staying in this year for Valentine’s Day, you might be at a loss for what to watch. We’ve gathered our list of the 10 movies you should check out for date night — some that are funny, some that are thought-provoking, but none that are overly sentimental. (Warning: spoiler alert.)

1. 50 First Dates (2004)

Here’s a movie that offers a different take on romance. Adam Sandler plays the role of a veterinarian who’s living on Oahu, studying marine animals. He’s your typical bachelor, whose standard has become a slew of one-night stands. However, when he falls for a local art teacher named Lucy (Drew Barrymore), she presents a unique challenge: a car accident from the year before has left her with short-term amnesia. Because she forgets him, he has to figure out how to win her over every day. Find out where to stream it here.

2. The Notebook (2004)

No Valentine’s Day is complete without this cult classic. Based on Nicholas Sparks’ 1996 novel of the same name, this romantic drama stars Ryan Gosling and Rachel McAdams, who play a young couple from the 1940s. While McAdams’ character Allie Hamilton comes from a wealthy family, Gosling’s Noah Calhoun decidedly comes from the wrong side of the tracks, which causes the couple to part ways. However, they find their way back to each other years later, as a testament to the undying nature of love. Find out where to stream it here.

3. Pretty Woman (1990)

This film is equal amounts romance and comedy. Julia Roberts’ character Vivian Ward is a sex worker who meets wealthy businessman Edward Lewis (Richard Gere). While Ward is initially hired to accompany Lewis to just a few functions, the two grow close over a week’s time, revealing exactly where their similarities and differences lie. Named after Roy Orbison’s 1964 hit song “Oh, Pretty Woman,” the movie is also the source of the famous line, “Big mistake. Huge.” It’s what Ward says to a high-end retail store worker on wealthy Rodeo Drive after the employee turns Ward away for how she’s dressed. Find out where to stream it here.

4. The Proposal (2009)

This is a tale of a green card marriage gone right. The movie follows an overbearing book editor named Margaret (Sandra Bullock) and her assistant Andrew (Ryan Reynolds), who embark on a sham engagement so that Margaret won’t have to face deportation back to Canada. They initially start out as an unhappy couple, forced to be together for Margaret’s benefit, but things fall in their favor and Margaret’s tough exterior surrenders. Find out where to stream it here.

5. The Big Sick (2017)

The Big Sick is one big, romantic culture shock. The story centers on an unexpected relationship that unfolds between Kumail Nanjiani and Zoe Kazan’s character Emily. After the pressure from Kumail’s family to have an arranged marriage leads to the couple breaking up, Emily becomes hospitalized for an illness. Her parents arrive and they tell Kumail his presence isn’t necessary, but he sticks it out and slowly wins them over while continuing to stand firm against his own family’s wishes. Will the battle he wages to make his own choices prove worthwhile in the end? Find out where to stream it here.

6. The Apartment (1960)

Here’s the perfect throwback film to watch on Valentine’s Day. It’s the story of an insurance clerk named C.C. “Bud” Baxter (Jack Lemmon) who climbs the corporate ladder by allowing his managers to use his New York City apartment for their illicit affairs. Bud ends up falling for Fran Kubelik (Shirley MacLaine), an elevator operator in his office building. There’s just one thing: She’s taken, by his boss no less. Now Bud has to figure out whether she’s worth fighting for. Find out where to stream it here.

7. Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind (2004)

Love isn’t always perfect and this movie is proof of that. Here, we follow the erstwhile couple Clementine Kruczynski (Kate Winslet) and Joel Barish (Jim Carrey), who, in a science-fiction twist, have their memories of each other erased. Yet they somehow find each other again and have an iconic date where they ponder their fates as they lay on their backs on the frozen Charles River in Boston. Is it too late for love to return? Find out where to stream it here.

8. Crazy, Stupid, Love (2011)

This film tells the timeless story of a married couple who find themselves in a rut and eventually divorce. After Cal Weaver (Steve Carell) gets his wife Emily (Julianne Moore) to admit that she is cheating on him, he moves out, only to meet Jacob Palmer (Ryan Gosling), who teaches Cal how to flirt with women at bars and gives Cal the boost of confidence he needs. The movie closes with a glimmer of hope: Will Cal and Emily find their way back to one another? Find out where to stream it here.

9. Just Friends (2005)

Reformed playboys are often at the heart of romantic comedies like this one. It starts with an overweight New Jersey high school student named Chris Brander (Ryan Reynolds) who is in love with his best friend, Jamie Palamino (Amy Smart) even though she ultimately friend-zones him. Years after leaving his hometown with his tail between his legs, Chris returns, having shed the excess pounds and with a cushy job in hand. He reconnects with Jamie and, while he wants to treat her like all the other women before her, he ultimately stops himself when he realizes her friendship is important to him. Find out where to stream it here.

10. The 40-Year-Old Virgin (2005)

While this film isn’t your typical romantic fare, it will have you laughing. It stars Steve Carell as Andy Stitzer, a 40-year-old virgin who works at an electronics store. Once his coworkers — played by Paul Rudd, Seth Rogen and Romany Malco — find out, they’re determined to help him lose his virginity. While he picks up some game from them, he seems like a hopeless case … until he meets Trish (Catherine Keener). Find out where to stream it here.

How to Create Flowing Keyboard Accompaniments

If you’re a keyboardist looking to create a flowing backdrop for supporting a vocalist or instrumental player, you’ve come to the right place. Let’s explore how to develop this technique, which can be a valuable addition to your musical vocabulary.

The fundamental building block of this playing style is the use of arpeggios, which are chords played one note at a time. For example, here’s a C major chord arpeggiated across both hands:

Musical annotation

(Note: You should use your sustain pedal when playing in this style in order to create a “wash” of sound. But you should always re-pedal [that is, release and then re-press the pedal] when changing chords, or when the sound gets too muddy. The first time through in this audio clip is played without pedal; the second time through uses pedaling.)

Learning to play arpeggios this way is the first step in developing this style of accompaniment, so be sure to practice it across all different chord qualities and in all twelve keys. When you are comfortable with that simple version, try expanding the range covered by each hand like this:

Musical annotation.

Note that the fingerings shown require you to be able to pass your thumb under your hand, and to cross over fingers as well; these skills are developed in traditional piano teaching. Watch this video for a good primer on these techniques.

Just playing root position chord arpeggios is pretty basic. But if you use a wider interval in the left hand, you’ll get a fuller sound:

Musical annotation.

The first two bars use an octave in the left hand, the next uses a fifth in-between the octave; and the last one uses a wider jump after the fifth.

Now we’ll apply this style to an example where the chords change:

Musical annotation.

This works okay, but the right hand is a bit choppy since it is always changing position. Using chord inversions instead (something we covered in this blog posting), allows you to use closer note choices to keep the right hand sounding smoother:

Musical annotation.

To get a fuller sound, try extending the right-hand range to cover beyond where the three-note triad sits:

Musical annotation.

More Sophisticated Two-Handed Styles

To create an even bigger sound, try working on playing left-hand arpeggios such as these:

Musical annotation.

Once you are comfortable doing this, you can start to add some right-hand parts to your playing. Here’s one of those left-hand patterns, and some right-hand parts that work nicely against it:

Musical annotation.

In the second bar, I chose some notes that complete the chord, so when the hands play together you are clearly outlining the harmony. In the third bar, I was not that strict, and moved instead into a melodic figure to finish the phrase. In the last bar, I played broken arpeggiated figures in both hands, with a small melodic pick-up at the end. Note how the right-hand rhythms help to give each a different feel. The second bar has a little syncopated push into beat 3; the bar that follows is almost all offbeats in the right hand. Compare that to the last bar, where everything occurs on the beats, making it more relaxed. (Note that each bar repeats twice.)

Now let’s apply this concept to our chord progression:

Musical annotation.

If you use more complex chords than just triads, this can sound pretty sophisticated. Staying in a pop vein, we can add a few other notes to a chord to add some nice color, as described in this posting. For a major chord, adding the 2nd is a great choice, and sometimes the 6th or major 7th will work nicely as well. On minor chords, both the 2nd and the 4th work beautifully, as does the 7th. On a suspended fourth chord, adding the 2nd works well, along with the 7th.

Using these additional colors we can develop this flowing accompaniment style even further. Here’s an example that uses some of those color tones as melodic fills between the right hand voicings:

Musical annotation.

This next example makes those added notes part of the chord voicings themselves … but let’s also start to explore a different concept for the left hand. By simplifying the left-hand part to syncopated octaves, we can get a stronger sense of rhythm for our accompaniment:

Musical annotation.

Now we’ll add some right hand figures using some of the color tones, this time keeping the rhythm similar in both hands to make it easier to play:

Musical annotation.

Here’s a variation with an arpeggiated figure in the left hand alternated with the octaves:

Musical annotation.

One More Approach

Having an element in your accompaniment pattern that repeats can give your playing a nice anchor. In this example, a repetitive melodic figure has been added to the right-hand voicing:

Musical annotation.

Notice how a little more melodic movement has been added to the left-hand pattern to connect into each coming chord. The effect of the constantly repeating right hand helps to draw your ear to the left-hand part, which becomes a sort of melody.

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Recording and Mixing Background Vocals

Almost all recorded songs that have lead vocals also include background vocals — harmony parts, oohs and ahhs, call-and-answer sections, you name it. In this article, we’ll offer suggestions to help make your background vocal recording and mixing as efficient as possible.

Use the Right Mic

Although you often see live performances with multiple singers on separate mics, such a setup isn’t usually practical in a home studio. Beyond space issues, having more than one open vocal mic in a room will lead to a lot of leakage (“bleed”) between the microphones and possibly some phase problems as well. That’s why, in most cases, you’ll get the best results recording background vocals one part at a time after the lead vocal is done. Another advantage to this approach is that it gives you the ability to focus on each part as it’s being recorded and thus make sure the performance, pitch and timing are as good as they can be.

For such overdubs, you want to set up the same way you would for lead vocals, with a pop screen in front of your best quality vocal mic (preferably a large-diaphragm condenser). If that mic offers selectable polar patterns, set it to cardioid (unidirectional) so that only picks up signal from the front. (This is the standard setting for most mics.)

That said, many singers are so used to blending their parts live that can be difficult for them to adjust to overdubbing their parts individually. In those cases, you’ll be best off recording multiple singers simultaneously singing into one mic. Here, the microphone’s polar pattern is key. If there are just two singers, you can get by with the mic set to a standard cardioid pattern, or, if the mic offers a bi-directional figure-8 pattern, you can use that and place each singer on either side of the mic, as shown here.

Two female singers on either side of a microphone.
Place two singers on either side of a mic set to a bi-directional (“figure-8”) polar pattern.

If there are more than two singers, you’ll need a vocal mic that offers an omnidirectional pattern. These mics pick up equally from all sides, so you should be able to get a good balance after experimenting with how far back everyone is standing. Start by positioning everyone about five inches or so away and do some test recordings. If one part sounds too loud, move that person back a little. If they’re too soft, move them forward. Since you’ll be recording this mic on a single track, you won’t be able to adjust the blend afterwards, so make sure it sounds right before going for a take.

Bear in mind that you’ll also need to have enough headphones on hand for however many singers there are, plus one for yourself if you’re in the same room with them (few home studios have the luxury of a soundproofed control room, as you’ll find in a professional studio). Here, devices known as headphone amplifiers or headphone distribution boxes will come in handy, as they not only split a single incoming headphone signal into multiple outputs but often also allow each person to independently adjust their own headphone levels.

Double-Track or More

If you want the backing vocals to be spread across the stereo spectrum (which will make them sound bigger and wider), you’ll need to record them several times on several tracks. Not only does this thicken the sound, it also allows you to create better balances and more interesting panning configurations. The screenshot below shows two harmony parts — one high and one low — each double-tracked and evenly balanced on either side of the lead vocal.

Screenshot showing music levels.
Doubled harmony parts panned symmetrically.

If you’re going for a more minimal sound, you can get by with just one pass of each harmony; however, this gives you fewer options for panning.

Screenshot showing music levels
Here, there’s only one part on each side of the lead vocal.

In addition to harmonizing with the lead vocal, consider doubling it — in unison or an octave up or down — during the parts of the song where the harmonies are. This can add additional heft to the vocal sound as a whole.

Artificial Doubling

If you want to thicken the vocals but the singers are no longer available to do another performance, consider doubling their parts by duplicating the original in your DAW. Doing this isn’t as impactful as using doubles that are actually sung, but it can help fill out the sound.

However, you can’t simply use the Duplicate command on a track, pan it opposite and expect it to sound like an actual double. It won’t. Two of the same parts panned to either side will just sound like a louder mono part panned to center. To make it sound like two separate parts that are panned in stereo, you need to make the duplicated track sonically different by changing its timing or pitch (or both) slightly.

For a start, try delaying the copied track slightly. This can be accomplished by inserting a mono delay on the copy, setting the mix (dry/wet) control to 100% wet and setting the delay time to 40 or 50ms as a starting point:

User interface of Steinberg Cubase delay plug-in.
Use delay to help differentiate an electronically doubled part.

You can also use a plug-in to apply a few cents of pitch shift up or down to the copy. Just don’t shift it so much that it perceptibly affects the tuning.

Clean It Up, Line It Up, Pitch It Up (or Down)

It’s essential to make sure that all vocal parts are cleaned up, lined up and pitch-corrected where necessary.

For the clean-up, edit out any extraneous noises picked up during the recording of each part.

For the line-up, make sure that the harmony parts match the lead vocal’s phrasing. That includes not only when notes start but how long they sustain. You can usually see alignment issues by visually comparing the waveforms of the lead and harmony tracks. If the start- and end-points of lines are inconsistent, you can edit the waveforms to correct them. This might entail sliding the first note of a harmony forward or backward in time to make it starts at the same time as the lead, or it might require shortening the end of a harmony line so it cuts off at exactly the same time as the lead vocal. Steinberg Cubase offers an Audio Alignment feature that can be quite helpful in these situations.

Lastly, pitch correction functions or plug-ins, such as the VariAudio feature in Cubase, can be employed if you hear singers going flat or sharp on certain notes or phrases.

All Together

When mixing harmony parts, think of them as a single instrument rather than as individual tracks. For that reason, it’s helpful to route them — especially if you have a lot of them — to stereo aux channels (called Group tracks in Cubase). That way, you can globally adjust their level and process them, which will help them sound more integrated.

For example, if you have two different harmony parts that you’ve tripled, you’ll end up with six background vocal tracks. You’re going to want to compress them all together to make them more similar from a dynamics standpoint, and you might also want to equalize them the same way, or add the same amount of reverb to all of them. By routing them all to a stereo aux track, you can insert a compressor, EQ or reverb plug-in.

Screenshot showing music levels.
The four harmony tracks here are routed to a single Cubase Group track.

You’ll probably want to do most of your panning on the individual tracks beforehand and leave the vocal bus panned hard left and right (in Cubase, you can switch to the Stereo Combined panner for your bus track, which lets you pull the left and right sides inward).

Listen Up

Here are some audio clips of a three-part vocal harmony (one lead and two harmony parts). First, here’s what the harmony sounds like with the two parts panned wide. Particularly if you listen on headphones, you’ll notice that it sounds a little unbalanced.

In this second clip, the harmonies are panned close to the center. The result feels more glued together.

Now, we’ll add doubles of each harmony part and give them a wide, balanced panning treatment.

Next, we’ll bring the higher harmonies closer to the center.

In this last example, the lower harmonies are panned on the inside and the higher ones on the outside.

To my ears, this is the most balanced approach. Whether or not you agree, one thing is certain: panning placement can drastically or subtly impact the background vocals.

The best way to become adept at recording and mixing background vocals is by doing it. Even if you’re not yet producing final tracks in your studio, try recording songs with separate lead and harmony vocals as an exercise. This will also give you an excellent opportunity to practice your arrangement and mixing skills.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

 

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

Wes Lowe

Back to 40 Under 40

Wes Lowe

Wes Lowe

Director of Instrumental Arts
The King’s Academy
West Palm Beach, Florida

Imagine teaching at the school that not only you attended as a child, but where your mother went to school and was the drum major. “I understand and appreciate the culture of excellence that has been established at The King’s Academy (TKA),” says Wes Lowe. “My heritage and ties to the band program here inspire and motivate me to lead the program in a way that continues to have life-changing impact on my students. I love teaching at TKA and want to uphold the legacy of the instrumental arts program.”    

One way Lowe is doing this is by increasing band enrollment numbers. “Teaching at a K-12 school that is housed on one campus has some great benefits, such as being able to streamline the program so I can be involved in each band class,” he explains.

Lowe schedules performance trips to Disney World, Atlanta and Boston to provide motivation and incentives for his middle and high school students. “But the key to have a successful program is to have a strong beginning band program,” he says. “I took the lead in these classes and opened up band instruction for 4th-grade students for the first time. With research and study, I implemented proper fundamentals and training to these beginner band students all while making the class fun and enjoyable.”

Another area that has really taken off at TKA is the jazz program. Lowe credits this growth to three things: 1) He sets the bar for his students to perform at a professional level. “We take recordings of professional jazz bands and aim to play and perform at that level,” he says. 2) “Night of Jazz” concerts are scheduled throughout the school year where the jazz ensemble performs 14 or more jazz charts to sold-out audiences. Special guest artists like Duffy Jackson and Wayne Bergeron have performed with the band. 3) The jazz band consistently performs for the community. “This is a vital part of the program. Performing at retirement communities, charitable events and downtown marketplaces allows us to share the joy of music, and it opens the eyes and minds of my students to fully realize the power and impact that music can have on people,” Lowe says.

Lowe also spends time planning for the marching band’s halftime shows. “My goal with my halftime show is to produce a show that is modern and contemporary while creating an experience that isn’t typical for a high school marching band,” Lowe says. “I plan to the strengths of my program, which change each year. This year, I have an amazing singer, so I designed the show around her.”

The show included pyrotechnics, a specially choreographed dance routine and costumes that fit the style of the music. “I knew we would be compared to a Super Bowl halftime show because that is the standard and level that we aim to achieve,” Lowe says. “This was the first year we did a performance like this, and it surprised and shocked the audience in an impressive way. But next year might be completely different, and I am completely fine with that because it allows me to be creative and modern with my approach and design.”

Continue reading

Wilga Alex

Back to 40 Under 40

Alex Wilga

Alex Wilga

Director of Bands
Davenport Central High School
Davenport, Iowa

The Davenport Central High School band has a 136-year history, and Alexander Wilga is only the school’s eighth head director. “I am incredibly proud and very humbled that I get to work where I do,” he says. “The band program means so much to the community, and we do everything we can to give back to our area and make those who came before us proud. I know that I am just a placeholder, and my job is to make sure the program is in better shape when I am done than when I started.”

One way Wilga is doing this is by growing band enrollment to more than 240 students. “Our biggest recruiting success has been fostering a strong relationship with our junior high band program,” he says. “We participate in our 7th- and 8th-grade band rehearsals, we invite the junior high concert bands and jazz bands to share concerts with the high school, we share a halftime performance during the marching season, and we share our first public performance of the year called the Ice Cream Social, which happens on the third day of school.”

Wilga also focuses on retaining high school students by making sure that every student has a voice in the direction of the program and by providing more participation options for students. “We require every band student to be in concert band but from there they can choose to be in marching band, jazz band, color guard, winter guard, show choir band, brass choir, woodwind choir, percussion ensemble, steel drum band, as well as a whole host of solo and ensemble opportunities,” Wilga says.  

The biggest change that positively affected enrollment numbers was that the financial burden of band participation was taken away from Davenport Central families. “We are a 75% free and reduced lunch district, so asking families to spend money to rent or purchase an instrument can put music education out of reach for many of our students,” Wilga explains.  

He was involved in coordinating a proposal that secured guaranteed funding for music programs across the district. “I can be very persistent when I have to be,” Wilga admits. “I was very fortunate to have an amazing associate superintendent who knew how important the arts are to our students and our community. It was also wonderful — and risky! — to stand as a united district music department and tell the school board that we would no longer be able to provide music programs if there wasn’t going to be district funding.” Thankfully, the gamble paid off. 

Wilga goes on to say, “I am always pushing for my students to have every experience that is possible through band.  I don’t want them to worry about quality instruments, quality facilities, adequate funding or the other administrative things that come with a large program. I don’t want students to have a single roadblock so that they are free to become the best versions of themselves that they can possibly be.”

A final note from Wilga: “The machine that slices bread was invented in Davenport, so you are all welcome!” 

Continue reading

Taylor Heather

Back to 40 Under 40

Heather Taylor

Heather Taylor

Instrumental Music Teacher
Lakeshore Elementary School
Rochester, New York

Working at a Title I school can be challenging, but Heather Taylor isn’t deterred. “My students are amazing! They live in a low-income suburb of Rochester and receive free breakfast, lunch and many other school and family services,” she says. “While some live in a typical family unit, others live with their grandparents, in a foster home or have even been homeless. But even with these circumstances they are THRIVING in music!”

Taylor’s students take the bus one hour before school starts to make it to early morning band. If they miss the bus, they will walk to school in the freezing upstate New York winter weather. “They give up lunch and recess time to help me organize music or sort handouts,” she says. “They make me want to be a better teacher and provide them with the proper materials to succeed!”

Her can-do attitude obviously works because her music program at Lakeshore Elementary School is the largest elementary program in the district. She credits her high enrollment numbers on having high expectations and building relationships with her students. “I hold my students accountable for practicing at home and making music together in lessons and rehearsals,” she says.

Relationship-building comes naturally for Taylor. “I am so fortunate to be able to work with students not only in a large ensemble setting but in small group weekly lessons as well,” she explains. “These small group lessons allow me to get to know my students on a personal level, which basically eliminates any misbehaviors in my classroom. I want my students to know that I am a trusted adult and that my classroom is a safe space for them. They can come down to my classroom anytime — if they need a break, if they want to have lunch, etc. Sometimes that is all it takes for a student to want to come to school, to want to learn, to want to participate in music.”

Taylor did not want finances to be a barrier for students to participate in music. So she looked for ways to get instruments, accessories and classroom materials for her band program. “This continued to grow as I found alternative ways of getting these supplies (other than school/district budgets), such as instrument drives, #clearthelist movement, grants, Donors Choose, etc.,” she says. “All the materials I have received are immediately put into the hands of my students so that we can continue making music together!”

Continue reading

Antos Justin

Back to 40 Under 40

Justin Antos

Dr. Justin Antos

Director of Bands and Orchestras
Dwight D. Eisenhower High School
Blue Island, Illinois

“I believe that being a music educator is less about the ornate spires and more about the individual bricks that build the castle,” says Justin Antos. And he has amassed a number bricks to form a strong foundation for his students at Dwight D. Eisenhower High School, Saint Xavier University where he is the band director and Trinity Christian College where he is an adjunct professor of music.

Antos’ formula for growing his music program? Building morale and establishing a culture of respect and encouragement is an integral first step. “I celebrate little victories constantly to enhance my students’ sense of pride,” Antos says. “I also try to be as visible as possible. I talk with students in the cafeteria during their lunch periods, I walk with them in the hallways during passing periods and I attend their athletic events and non-musical performances. When students see than I am committed to them and that our program provides a safe and familial environment, new students flock to take music classes.”  

Eisenhower’s population is 90% low-income, and most students in the band and orchestra learn an instrument for the first time once they arrive at the school. Antos doesn’t let these statistics deter him. He discovers what they enjoy and then structures his curriculum and classroom activities to align with those interests. “When students contribute to the design of the educational landscape, learning happens organically,” he says.

He has had students earn full rides to competitive music schools and Ivy League universities who go on to become professional musicians or music educators. “On the same token, I have also had students struggle to produce a beautiful sound on their instruments for the longest time to then one day FINALLY be able to play with great tone quality,” Antos says. “In the end, the accolade means less to me than the sense of accomplishment.”

Antos’ musical advocacy goes beyond Eisenhower High School, Saint Xavier University and Trinity Christian College. He donated the honorarium he received as a top 10 finalist for the Grammy Music Educator Award in 2021 to Advocate Children’s Hospital of Oak Lawn’s music therapy department. The hospital provided a wish list of instruments, and Antos purchased hand drums, Gato boxes, wood blocks and pitched handheld instruments.

Continue reading

Amos David

Back to 40 Under 40

David Amos

David Amos

Director of Bands
Heritage Middle School
Painesville, Ohio

After the isolation created by the pandemic, many students “craved a place where they can unwind and express themselves,” says David Amos. “And band might be the only class in which they feel that is possible.”

Amos finds creative ways to introduce his students at Heritage Middle School to the many facets of music. He started a nine-week “Careers in Music” class that looks at various non-performing careers in the music industry. “Students learn about music journalists, concert planners, promotors, radio DJs and sound production,” Amos says. The class also explores job descriptions and the necessary training and qualifications for each position. Throughout the course, students “create songs in AB, ABA and verse-chorus form to learn how the music they hear on Spotify and TikTok is made.”

Painesville is located within a primarily middle-class county, but more than 85% of the Painesville City Local Schools’ students qualify for free and reduced lunch. To allow students to participate in band, 70% of students use school-owned instruments. In spite of these challenges, the PCLS band program is the third largest in the county.

More than half of the district’s population is Hispanic and Latino, and a quarter of the students are identified as English language learners. Amos works hard to include “music pieces that are comprised of folk melodies representative of the cultures in my classroom.”

For the 2021 winter concert, his band performed a piece called “Kwanzaa Celebration” that included a Liberian folk melody and the famous spiritual “Kum ba yah.” Amos and his students looked at the cultures and traditions represented in the music while learning to perform the songs. “I would love to see more middle school repertoire written by composers of color or queer-identified composers. Authentic representation of diverse individuals and the cultures they represent is extremely important to the growth of all students,” he says. 

Amos always finds ways to “push students to be a better version of themselves as an individual and in music,” according to one of his students. 

“Remember, music is worth it. … While music is the content we teach, our first goal must be to teach students the skills they need to be successful in this changing world,” Amos says.

Continue reading

Bechard Cassandra

Back to 40 Under 40

Cassandra Bechard

Dr. Cassandra Bechard

Director of Bands, Assistant Professor of Music
University of Northwestern St. Paul
St. Paul, Minnesota

At University of Northwestern St. Paul (UNW), Cassandra Bechard oversees several bands and ensembles that are diverse in musical backgrounds (including music majors/minors and non-music majors/minors) that come together to create exhilarating concerts. “What I am most proud of is not only the level of music-making, but the community building that the ensembles strive for,” she says. “Band rehearsals end at dinner hour on campus, and as a result there are daily band dinners. The community aspect of the program is strong and filled with kindness, care, respect and love for each other — it’s a very special program.”

Bechard plans to add an honor band day, something she started when she worked at the University of Dubuque in Iowa, where she saw an opportunity for more university-sponsored honor bands in the region. She collaborated with her colleagues in the fine and performing arts department and admissions to create an annual high school honor band day. Students are nominated by their band directors and if selected, they have a day full of rehearsals, a campus tour and a free concert that is open to the public. Bechard says that the University of Northwestern St. Paul will host its first high school honor band day in January 2023.

Prior to joining the faculty at UNW, Bechard taught high school band in South Dakota and encountered a common problem that she and her colleagues around the state faced — finding appropriate repertoire that fit the instrumentation of their ensembles. She tackled this problem head on, and during her doctoral degree, she focused her research on finding and cataloging repertoire for small wind chamber ensembles (8 to 16 players) that are at or below the grade level of IV. Bechard reached out to composers to write music, and she continues to support this area of research through presentations with her colleague, Dr. Melanie Brooks, from Winona State University and by joining consortiums for adaptable music.

Bechard’s proudest moments as a music educator is when former students connect with her to share their accomplishments. “What a privilege to be thought of and sought out to share exciting news with years after they have left my rehearsal space — there is nothing better,” she says.

Continue reading

Blanco Stephen

Back to 40 Under 40

Stephen Blanco

Stephen Blanco

Director of Mariachi Studies
Las Vegas High School
Las Vegas, Nevada

In 2018, Clark County School District welcomed a new mariachi program to Las Vegas High School. This program was “founded for a community that embodies what it truly means to be American, and its members have stepped up to show their families what the American Dream can really look like,” says Stephen Blanco, who was tapped to lead this new program.

In the years since its inception, the group, called Mariachi Joya, has grown and experienced tremendous success, including performing “La Tierra del Mariachi” for the virtual Parade Across America for the 2020 inauguration of President Joe Biden and Vice President Kamala Harris. “We hadn’t seen each other in nearly a year, so the inauguration performance was taped and recorded in seclusion,” Blanco says. “The school gave us special permission to meet in the gym to watch the inauguration. Standing back and seeing my students watching their hard work … well, there is no greater feeling in the world!”

Blanco says that Mariachi Joya “isn’t a normal class that performs four to five times a year. They perform nearly 100 times a year,” including events with Las Vegas Mayor Carolyn Goodman and Nevada Governor Steve Sisolak. The group recently traveled to Washington, D.C. to perform for the Mexican Embassy and to meet with Senator Catherine Cortez Masto.

Blanco spent his first week in Las Vegas at Music Education Consultants’ mariachi conference learning implementation strategies and stylistic nuances of mariachi music. Blanco created a five-year plan that included all the needed materials, curriculum and marketing strategies for the program. He says, “We are now ending year four of that five-year plan, and things are going great!”

Mariachi is more than a specialized ensemble at Las Vegas High School. “My students consistently give me reasons to be proud of them, whether it be laughs during rehearsal or them performing for sold-out crowds of thousands of people,” Blanco says.

According to one of his students, Blanco tells them to “rock that stage no matter where we are at and to release energy into the crowd.” Blanco and his students rally before every performance because they know that they have a job to do. “Every person in the audience is expecting a show, and we give them the best show they’ve ever seen,” Blanco says.

Continue reading

Bryant Robert

Back to 40 Under 40

Dr. Robert Bryant

Music Education Coordinator,
Assistant Professor of Music
Tennessee State University
Nashville, Tennessee

A third-generation music educator, Robert Bryant grew up singing in church and playing several instruments at a young age. “I always knew the power that music had in shaping identity and inspiring hope,” he says.

His passion for teaching others started as a high school drum major and section leader, and in college, that passion became more focused — Bryant wanted to work and serve in those areas that need him the most: marginalized and often forgotten communities of color. While working in urban areas like metro Atlanta and in rural settings like Americus, Georgia, Bryant “found my voice and purpose as a teacher by working with students who I saw a piece of myself in and who saw a piece of themselves in me.” At Tennessee State University (TSU), he helps his students find their voice and gives them the strategies, tools and techniques that will help them thrive as music teachers.

Prior to working at the collegiate level, Bryant worked as a band director at Miller Grove High School and Stockbridge Middle School where he increased enrollment in band by at least 20%. He also had his bands participate in solo and ensemble festivals for the first time.

“I am a data-driven teacher with a personalized approach for each and every student,” Bryant says. “Many of my students have made district and all-state ensembles, and my high school senior classes regularly amassed more than $1 million in music scholarship offers at colleges and universities throughout the country.”  

In addition to his work at TSU, Bryant is a guest lecturer and capstone supervisor for the master’s in curriculum and instruction degree at Florida A&M University, his alma mater. “It is my goal to work with these students to help them continue their education, transform their knowledge and experiences into research-based and data-driven instructional praxis, open their eyes to the possibilities they have with a graduate degree, and help them develop curricula and instructional techniques that allow them be better teachers to their students, as well as leaders within their school,” he says.

Bryant credits his “truly awesome” students for his success. “They have allowed me to push them when others had relegated them to lowered expectations and did not believe in their greatness,” he says. “They have embraced my ideas and approaches that sometimes were different and outside of their experience.”

Continue reading

Calus Adam

Back to 40 Under 40

Adam Calus

Adam Calus

Executive Director
Education Through Music — Massachusetts
Boston, Massachusetts

Adam Calus builds relationships wherever he goes. He founded the music program at Charlestown High School and after six years there, he moved to become executive director of Education Through Music — Massachusetts (ETM-MA) so he  could create more music programs for Boston Public Schools (BPS), especially at the many district schools that do not have them.

ETM-MA is a nonprofit that is committed to keeping music alive in all Massachusetts schools, starting in Boston. The organization partners with principals to create, strengthen and sustain music programs for schools that currently do not have them; and makes music a core subject in its partner schools. Calus says that another ETM-MA goal is to use music as a catalyst to support learning in other areas, including overall general development, motivation toward school and attendance, parent engagement and community investment in the school. 

Presently, Calus oversees the development of three new music programs for BPS at Brighton High School, Dudley Street Neighborhood Charter School and he supports the BPS music teacher at David A. Ellis Elementary School.

Through his prior role as a public school music educator, and his current work at ETM-MA and as a private music instructor, Calus talks and listens to his students, their parents, music teachers and the community. When it comes to repertoire, Calus recommends having a simple conversation with students and their families. “The music that students love and connect with should be one of the core components that drives a lot of learning,” he says. “Parents and students appreciate that they have agency in what happens in the music learning space. The music that students know and love is already inside of them. Parents and students enjoy when the music space taps into that love in order to learn and become proficient musically.” 

He uses that same relationship-building model to find performance opportunities around Boston. “Students should get out into their community and make music regularly because that’s what musicians do,” Calus says. “They go out and perform in places they care about and are connected to. I talk with my students and encourage the teachers I train to do the same with regards to which community spaces mean something to them, then reach out to those spaces and find out how we can facilitate a student performance there.” 

Continue reading

Chandler Kristopher

Back to 40 Under 40

Kristopher Chandler

Kristopher Chandler

Director of Bands
Gautier High School
Gautier, Mississippi

Adapting to changes and being flexible have been essential for music educators during the pandemic, which Kristopher Chandler was forced to do. He came up with some creative solutions — one planned and one not — to help his music students at Gautier High School.

In the spring of 2021, Chandler hosted a Rehears-A-Thon weekend for his wind ensemble students to help them with their performance on their spring assessment literature and to reignite their fire and passion for music that was damaged during the ongoing pandemic. “We invited band directors from all over the state to lead sectionals, and had Dr. Colin McKenzie from the University of Southern Mississippi rehearse the full ensemble segment — all while remaining socially distant and wearing the necessary PPE,” Chandler says. “In total, the students and clinicians experienced approximately 12 hours of intense, yet engaging and enjoyable, learning!”

That summer, Band Camp 2021, was moved to a virtual platform after the first day because Chandler and several staff members tested positive for COVID, despite being fully vaccinated. The band staff and student leadership team devised a plan for the virtual camp including instructional videos, individual practice plans, music and marching fundamentals pass-off videos, and daily check-ins with staff and student leaders via Google Meets. “While we have a talented band staff, our incredible student leadership team was the driving force behind making our virtual band camp a success,” Chandler says.

The Gautier Band Program prides itself on operating each day as a true team, which includes four full-time band directors, one color guard coordinator and one part-time guard tech. “Our team sees every student in our program every day by teaching courses on multiple campuses,” Chandler says. “We truly complement each other and it’s a joy working with these incredible educators every day. But we cannot do our job without great students and a great educational community. The Gautier band program has high goals for the future, and we are eager to continue working!”

Continue reading

Collins Danielle

Back to 40 Under 40

Danielle Collins

Danielle Collins

Director of Music, Media, Entertainment Technology (MMET) Department
Academy for the Performing Arts
Huntington Beach High School
Huntington Beach, California

The Music, Media, Entertainment Technology (MMET) Program at Huntington Beach Academy for the Performing Arts is personalized and student-led, “meaning our students choose a path for the year (or sometimes even the show), and each is responsible for different aspects of the production, beyond performing the songs,” says Danielle Collins, the director of the MMET department.

About 25% of the 150 students in the Pop Music Program in MMET help arrange or record their colleagues’ original songs. According to Collins, students run rehearsal blocks and sound engineer in each of the academy’s studios, as well as oversee production of each song in preparation for live performances, which include three annual mainstage rock shows (each with 12 to 15 groups performing) and three to four dozen community gigs and performances. Through community outreach by Collins and her students, MMET performances run the gamut from holiday parties, parades, street fairs, restaurants and coffee shops, and other events in Huntington Beach.  

“We try to provide students as many options as they may find in the music industry, while still maintaining a level of quality,” she says. These options include recording holiday albums and original songs for which media students design music videos. “We focus on producing, recording, performing and event managing,” Collins says.

According to one of her nomination letters, Collins encourages students to try, fail and eventually succeed. Calling MMET a “program of grit,” Collins says that students hold themselves to such a high standard that failure usually isn’t an option. “We create safe opportunities for healthy fails and the space and time built into productions to recover and succeed,” she explains. “We reflect weekly and ask students to recast what they may feel is a ‘fail’ to merely a ‘try,’ and this mindset helps our students take more risks because they know they’ll be supported through the process.”

In addition to running the Pop Music Program at her school, Collins helps other music educators establish their own programs. She shares that at a previous school, she started her pop music groups during every ensemble class — for example, jazz band had a rhythm section, and those students were given class time to select and rehearse pop songs to perform. She recruited students into concert band classes, planning to have them in the pop music group. According to Collins, this initial enrollment is vital while building your program.

Collins also says that you must have your administration’s support in understanding that not all students on campus have an interest in participating in a traditional music program. “You will absolutely triple your program if you can create space for the other 80% of students on your campus who find passion in popular music.”

Continue reading

Dame Nathan

Back to 40 Under 40

Dr. Nathan Dame

Dr. Nathan Dame

Director of Choral Activities,
Fine Arts Department Chair
Wylie East High School
Wylie, Texas

Described as an “empire builder,” Dr. Nathan Dame says it’s all about inspiring and enabling those around you to find musical success and to become empowered stakeholders throughout the building process. “When I accepted the position at Wylie East High School, my co-director — I am blessed to teach with my wife and better half every day! — and I built a strategic plan grounded in the musical, social and interpersonal values of what we wanted our program to look like, how we wanted our students to sing, how they would hold themselves in the school and community, and how we wanted to involve others in the process,” he says

They revisit the strategic plan each year and make necessary changes as the program grows — which it has! The program now includes 300 students in 10 choral ensembles. A third full-time choral director has been hired at Wylie, and a staff member was added to the feeder programs at the middle schools.

A key to the growth of the choral program is Dame’s recruitment and retention efforts, which are grounded in three main areas: 1) musical success, 2) visibility and 3) strong relationships with students. “I have been fortunate to work in three different schools where enrollment has tripled,” he says. “Our goal is to create an inclusive environment for all students where we create outstanding music, share it with others frequently and purposefully, and care about our students as people before musicians.” 

Each year, Dame creates a theme for the choral program. The first year’s theme was “Elevate,” which focused on the development and expectations of exemplary musicianship. Subsequent themes have been “Ignite” to spark the fuel within each student, and “Odyssey” as everyone navigated the unknown challenges of the pandemic. “Breaking Ground” is this year’s theme as the choral program opens a new facility and will travel internationally for the first time.

The fine arts building expansion was supported by a bond proposal and the district administration. “Our superintendent of schools was quick to say, ‘students don’t come to school for algebra … they come to school for fine arts and other programs,’ and he put his money and actions where his mouth was,” Dame says.

The new facility has a large choir room with skylights, new computers and sound technology, recording equipment, seated risers, equipment and uniform storage, two offices and six practice rooms. Additionally, there is a specific ensemble room where three sections of classes can overlap, which are outfitted with portable risers, and pedagogical and technological tools.

“I am inspired daily with our program and what it has become,” Dame says. “After our recent winter concert, a staff member came up to our team and said, ‘You promote excellence from every student and it is so neat to see.’ This makes me so proud, and I feel that our expectation of excellence at all levels is evident in our program’s results at contests and in concert.”

Continue reading

Felder Brandon

Back to 40 Under 40

Brandon Felder

Brandon Felder

Fine Arts Music Director, SHABACH! K-8 Christian Academy
Landover, Maryland
Music Director, Georgetown University Gospel Choir
Washington, D.C.

“Bloom where you are planted” is Brandon Felder’s teaching philosophy. “Music represents time, and like a seed that is planted and takes root, it will sprout, grow and bloom. Music should take form and dissolve as music has the power to transform,” he says.   

At SHABACH! K-8 Christian Academy, Felder makes his classroom and rehearsal room safe spaces for creativity, transparency, peace, harmony and respect where his students experience freedom of expression. “If students can feel an educator’s passion, they will gain inspiration and then work toward excellence,” he says.

Intentional music programming is something that Felder takes pride in. “It is a meticulous process in which I consider the culture of the community, sensitivities and student abilities,” he says.  “I envision the end result — performances, end of semester, assessments, etc. — and what skills students need to accomplish these outcomes. Then I weave programs, concerts, recitals and formal and informal performances to support this.”

At SHABACH! and at all his previous positions, Felder first establishes involvement and connection within the school through pep rallies, assemblies, flash mobs and sporting events. Once the music program is visible at the school, he says to seek community involvement and performance opportunities in the community, first at locations (senior homes, hospitals, churches, nursing homes, malls and shopping centers, sporting events and city government events) within a 5-mile-radius of the school. As the school’s music program grows, continue to expand its footprint in 5-mile increments.

“Just as chicken makes its own gravy and bacon makes its own grease, I want to create musical citizens who are a product of my experiences,” Felder says. “I consider myself a teaching artist who continually fuels my own creative experiences through personal performance and objective opportunities. Once I am charged artistically and creatively, it is my responsibility as a music educator to provide innovation and fresh ideas to the classroom experience for students to expand outside of the four walls of the traditional classroom mindset.”

Felder is also the music director of the Georgetown University Gospel Choir. “I oversee the talented student singers who celebrate their spirituality through song and support Protestant Ministry services and special campus events while singing diverse musical selections,” he says.

In addition to his work at SHABACH! and Georgetown University, Felder serves on the GRAMMY Recording Academy Board, Washington, D.C. Chapter and its D.C. Education Committee, which identifies top programs across the region as well as recognizes economically underserved schools and their efforts in music education.

Continue reading

Finney Bryson

Back to 40 Under 40

Bryson Finney

Bryson Finney

Artistic Director, We Are Nashville Festival
Learning Technology Specialist
Metro Nashville Public Schools
Nashville, Tennessee

We Are Nashville is an annual music festival for Nashville area vocal and instrumental programs that takes place in March, during Music in Our Schools Month. Music programs are invited for a “Day of Music,” which was housed this year at the Schermerhorn Symphony Center in downtown Nashville.

“My heart behind the event is to expose students and young aspiring musicians to the array of opportunities that exist in music,” says Bryson Finney, the festival’s artistic director, coordinator and co-founder. “Providing this enriching platform for students can be life-changing. I believe a dream needs three essential steps to grow: 1) exposure (see the artistry), 2) identification (workshop opportunities/learning experiences) and 3) action (joint performance opportunities). This not only plants seeds but also builds our city’s artistic community.”

Finney spent the first nine years of his career as a general music, piano and choir instructor at an elementary school. After earning his master’s degree, Finney embraced music tech and digital music composition and became a Metro Nashville Public Schools learning technology instructional coach. He led district-wide professional development opportunities supporting technology integration. He also worked with the Nashville Symphony as the Accelerando Program coordinator, equipping students from diverse ethinic backgrounds for careers in music.

During the pandemic, Finney worked with the CMA Foundation’s United Voices for Music Education Initiative and collaborated with music educators nationwide, collecting innovative ideas for the music classroom.

Finney returned to Metro Nashville Public School as a Learning Technology Specialist and works with educators to integrate district-approved digital tools and applications into instruction. “Most of my school-based work happens with our elementary schools and involves consultations with school leadership, school-wide/grade-level trainings, co-teaching and modeling,” he says.

The We Are Nashville Festival clearly holds a special place in Finney’s heart. “It’s a wonderful opportunity for exposure, education and engagement with student ensembles and local artists,” he says. In 2020,

In 2020, a We Are Nashville video project was created in collaboration with the Nashville Symphony and its Accelerando Program, which received a 2021 Regional Emmy. Finney was the songwriter.

Continue reading

Goindoo Alain

Back to 40 Under 40

Alain Goindoo

Alain Goindoo

Director of Bands, Jeaga Middle School
West Palm Beach, Florida
Executive Director, Hope Symphony INC.

Alain Goindoo created Hope Symphony to provide access to music, tools and resources to children and families from communities in need. “I wanted to bring hope for the future and level the playing field,” he says. “Hope Symphony brings together a village of difference-makers who provide essential resources, equipment, personnel, camps and life-changing opportunities that would otherwise pass by these children due to lack of access.”

The Hope Symphony Summer Band Camp was established in 2017 and serves approximately 100 Title I students. “The purpose of the camp is to promote more than music proficiency — the camp generates excitement for learning and gives hope for their future one note at a time,” Goindoo says.

Students at camp receive music lessons from qualified instructors, free food, method books and equipment. They engage in successful learning on a college campus with their peers. The camp experience provides college readiness skills and establishes the idea that the pursuit of a higher education is a reality and something that they can achieve.  

In a “40 Under 40” nomination letter, Goindoo, who is also Jeaga Middle School’s band director, is described as a nurturer who is touted for putting children who live in communities affected by drugs and gun violence on a “completely alternate trajectory thanks to music.” 

“We create a safe space for students to learn and grow, as well as set goals that give them ownership, a sense of pride, value in themselves and their work, and, most importantly, a place to belong,” Goindoo says. “As music teachers, we find our students’ passion for music and nurture that passion through  developing effective rigorous programming, building healthy and meaningful relationships, teamwork, leadership development, setting goals, learning to never give up and preparing them for college readiness — all this on top of building music proficiency!”

Goindoo has raised more than $380,000 in grants to support music education. “I pray, then I work diligently outside of school hours writing grants, raising awareness and building community relationships with parents, local universities, city and county officials, and nonprofit organizations to meet the needs of the children. After explaining the needs and showing how the resources will be used, most people want to help,” he says.

Continue reading

Hayes Jayme

Back to 40 Under 40

Jayme Hayes

Jayme Hayes

Director of Bands
Mayberry Cultural and Fine Arts
Magnet Middle School
Wichita, Kansas

When the world went into lockdown because of the COVID-19 pandemic, Jayme Hayes tackled online learning with gusto. “I became a content-creating maniac,” she said. “Resources like method books, online theory tools, even YouTube instructional videos were not made for 100% online teaching, and that was the biggest problem I faced at first. I realized I needed to create content that matched my program and me as a teacher. I created practice and assessment tools with Boom Cards, YouTube and Flipgrid for almost every lesson.”

Much of what Hayes learned, experienced and taught during remote and hybrid teaching has now become a central part of her classroom at Mayberry Cultural and Fine Arts Magnet Middle School. She effectively reaches students at their level of understanding by providing more resources and chances for them to succeed. “I still incorporate online tools like Boom, Flipgrid and YouTube, but they are more spread out throughout the week or quarter,” she says. “We use iPads for composition projects, tuning activities, aural skills activities and listening evaluation. Students are given multiple opportunities to show their level of proficiency as we learn and develop music skills.”

She was so adept at teaching remotely that the Kansas Music Educators Association (KMEA) asked her to speak at its virtual convention. Her presentation focused on how virtual teaching did not have to be any less effective, impactful or educational than in-person teaching. “It was a session about our mindset when it came to teaching online,” Hayes explains. “We were/are still educators who are passionate about our students and music. I refused to allow the screen to remove that from my classroom, and I tried to empower others to do the same. I do not teach music to young people, I teach young people through music. A camera wasn’t going to stop me from doing that.”

How did Hayes find ways for students to make music remotely? “With comic relief mixed in with high expectations, honesty and transparency,” she says.

Each quarter had a theme and everything was planned around that theme. Hayes used poems and children’s books to learn about improvisation, composition, teamwork and performance. “Every day we played with recordings, metronomes, call and response, singing and playing,” she says. “We played interactive games using rhythms and our instruments like charades, Pictionary, Clue and a very creative version of Among Us that I got from the Band Directors Facebook page because there are other teachers who are a lot more creative than me.”

Hayes admits that honesty was the biggest part of the shared creativity with her students. “I told the kids that I was trying my best with these new crazy ideas, and they were eager to try them out,” she says.

Continue reading

Helmick Jonathan

Back to 40 Under 40

Jonathan Helmick

Dr. Jonathan Helmick

Director of Bands,
Associate Professor of Music,
Slippery Rock University
Slippery Rock, Pennsylvania

Jonathan Helmick’s booming laugh will draw you in — and you’ll be glad that it did because this thoughtful and caring music educator has established a welcoming culture at Slippery Rock University. “Part of establishing that culture is living it,” he says. “I take time to get to know my students and meet their parents and family. I also try to intentionally engineer a culture within the program where current students reach out and connect to first-year members.”

Helmick teaches more than musical skills and knowledge. “It is my responsibility to curate a space where students have the opportunity to grow in the area of their dispositions and embrace vulnerability,” he says. He emphasizes this point by telling his students to “hug the cactus, embrace the vulnerability.“

Helmick explains, “As musicians, we understand how vulnerable it is to make music. Encouraging students to take healthy risks, step into the spotlight and actively own their trajectory and growth always run parallel to the curriculum on paper.”

He also tells students to see music as a game with purpose and to focus on building skills, confidence, independence, self-efficacy that transfers to all facets of their lives.

During the pandemic, Helmick surveyed his students on how to stay connected with each other when they were completely apart. One topic overwhelmingly captured their interest: diversity in the wind band. During the rest of the spring semester, Helmick and his students explored music by diverse composers and music that was connected to themes of diversity.

“When the semester was over, students wrote to me explaining that this unit provided them with the first opportunity to see themselves in much of the music that they listened to and performed,” Helmick says. “This was particularly true for LGBTQ2S+ students.”

Helmick went a step further for the fall 2020 semester and gave the SRU Symphonic Wind Ensemble a special project. “They were to analyze the content of our library to see if the composers in our library proportionally mirrored our ensemble and society,” he says. “The students went so far as to compare the demographics of our music building, campus and country to the composers listed in our library.”

The results of this project are being leveraged to write grants to commission underrepresented composers to write for SRU’s ensemble, “giving our students actionable ways to meaningfully impact equitable programming practices,” Helmick says.

Continue reading

Homes Anastasia

Back to 40 Under 40

Anastasia Homes

Anastasia Homes

Director of Bands
San Elijo Middle School
San Marcos, California

A student in the San Elijo Middle School (SEMS) band described Anastasia Homes as “strict but chill” — and she considers that high praise, indeed. “I have high expectations and standards, but I am always there to encourage the kids, help them through it and try to make light of the mistakes,” she says. “Kids have so much stress these days, music should be a place where they can enjoy being creative and develop skills to a level of their desire. My goal as a music teacher is to teach them about what it is to be a good person through music and give them a lifelong appreciation for the arts.”

Homes has found creative ways to instill music appreciation in her students. She worked with percussion coach Zachary Elliott to start a world music course, an after-school percussion class that meets once a week. In the class, which is supported by an expanded learning opportunities (ELO) grant, students pick out instruments and music to expand on music elements from other parts of the world. “The kids are working on an African piece right now that they plan to perform at a percussion festival later this year,” Homes says. 

Homes saw how well a mentorship program worked for the band at San Marcos High School and worked with the high school band director, Geoff Radant, to develop a step-by-step plan to integrate the mentorship program at the middle school. Homes and her co-director, Shannon McInnis, created outlines for students to follow that included how to first contact their mentee, things they could work on in meetings and just how to break the ice. “High school students mentored our 7th graders, and 8th graders mentored our 6th graders,” she explains. “We tried to pair kids based on personality and instruments. All students volunteered their time and met when it worked for them. It is still a small element in our program, but my hope is that in years to come we can make it something even better. The students involved love meeting with older kids to hang out and improve their playing.”

Homes credits the entire community — administration, fellow teachers, directors throughout the district and parents — for her program’s success. “Our program at SEMS is amazing not just because of one person, but many,” she says. “This is a special place, and I feel lucky every day that I am here, inspiring our musicians to do their best and have fun.”

Continue reading

Jones Amir

Back to 40 Under 40

Amir Jones

Amir Jones

Director of Bands
Thomas W. Harvey High School
Painseville, Ohio

Amir Jones opens the doors for his students at Thomas W. Harvey High School to experience success. “Some of our students come from challenging socioeconomic situations, but this does not stop them from achieving at top levels and rising to every challenge,” he says. “When a student enters this program, they are given the best opportunity we can offer despite what other obstacles they may experience outside of our program.”

Jones makes this possible by taking a lot of the financial burden away from band families. More than 80% of his students are provided with instruments from the district, and the band fundraises as much as possible to help students travel. “We have a group of alumni that gives back through our booster program to help provide additional lessons and instruction so that students who may have a difficult time getting private lessons still have access,” Jones says.

When Jones started at Harvey High, he approached everything “as if we were a larger, more affluent ensemble,” he explains. “We started to travel yearly, we play music that pushed our limits, we purchased quality equipment, we performed on our local news and participated in as many performances as possible.”

Jones’ emphasis on recruitment and experiences has paid off. “The first time we performed at Large Group Contest, we received a superior rating,” Jones says. “As we continue to move forward, we hope to perform at the state level as well as at professional development conferences.”

To address more advanced players in the band, Jones started an Honors Band, which was “initially a volunteer group that met after school,” Jones says. “Then the Honors Band turned into the Wind Ensemble, and the 35 to 50 students in this ensemble play more difficult music and earn honors credit. My top goal for this band is to help students push themselves musically and play high-quality music at levels they have not experienced before.”

Jones is thankful for his community — from district administrators and parents to his music staff, colleagues and local band directors — for their overwhelming support of the arts. He regularly collaborates will all of them “as we continue to find ways to best serve our students.”

Continue reading

Knepper Damon

Back to 40 Under 40

Damon Knepper

Damon Knepper

Director of Bands and Orchestras
Ironwood Ridge High School
Oro Valley, Arizona

Damon Knepper is described as the “king of calm,” which he says comes from watching his favorite leaders and teachers remain strong in the face of adversity. “Remaining strong doesn’t mean ignoring the problem or brushing it aside, but rather to be the rock for your students so that they have somebody to latch onto in times of crisis,” he explains.

Knepper had to rely on this inner strength when he and his program suffered a tragic lost in April 2021 when his brother, Nicholas, who was a percussion director at Ironwood Ridge High School passed away from complications from epilepsy. “I got through this — the most tragic event I have ever faced — by being authentic and vulnerable with my students,” he says. “During this time of immense grief, I needed them as much as they needed me. If students were sad and wanted to talk, I provided a safe and calm place for them to do so.”

Knepper has been a rock at Ironwood since he completed his student teaching there in spring 2016. During this learning period, he formed relationships with students, parents and other teachers in the department, which made the transition to becoming part of the faculty as a percussion director much easier. He then worked alongside Mark Hodge as associate director bands before taking over the program this year.

“The bands culture was already healthy, but I am a believer in reinventing oneself every so often,” he says. “The biggest changes I made this first year as director of bands was a major rebranding of our music programs with a new logo and push to be more visible in our community because it’s the 20th anniversary of our school. I am only in year one of this process, but it has really reinvigorated my students about being part of something bigger than themselves.”

Knepper has brought a unique creativity to Ironwood. “I arrange and compose much of the perfomed music for my pageantry arts ensembles, including marching band and indoor percussion,” Knepper says. “The collaborative design process is one of my absolute favorite parts of my job!”

Two years ago, the show for the indoor percussion team was based on the life cycle of the agave plant. “The Arizona agave plants’ lifecycle is incredibly beautiful, but sadly, it dies shorty after blooming,” Knepper explains. They performed Bon Iver’s 22 (OVER_s∞∞n), which is about “the fragility of one’s existence and how life could be over at any moment, which resonated with our students and audiences throughout the competitive season,” Knepper says.   

He also is on a constant quest to find new sounds for his students. “I am a huge fan of choosing repertoire that exposes my ensembles to extended techniques on their instruments,” he says. “Bowing metallic instruments, muting/muffling surfaces and running live instruments through filters in DAWs [digital audio workstations] are frequent occurrences in my music classroom. I want to expose my students to 21st century technology and how musicians use these tools to enhance their performances. I want my students to be able to not only record themselves, but manipulate sounds to expand their creative sound palettes as artists.”

Continue reading

LaBrie Katie O’hara

Back to 40 Under 40

Katie O'Hara LaBrie

Katie O’Hara LaBrie

Composer, Conductor, Clinician
Fairfax, Virginia

Despite many ups and downs health-wise during the last six years, including some that have taken Katie O’Hara LaBrie away from the classroom, she has remained committed to advocating for music education. “Whether I’m mentoring a fellow teacher, Zooming with an orchestra across the country, creating content for a conference presentation, writing music for colleagues or creating guides to learning, I have kept the creative nature and the spirit of music education close at hand, despite my physical setbacks,” she says. “In some ways, having my own physical hurdles has kept me open to others in a unique way. Understanding that you never truly know what’s going on in someone’s day or someone’s life is a valuable lesson that has changed how I approach students and situations over time.”

When the pandemic started, LaBrie’s band director husband was looking for materials to use during distance learning. “I came up with ‘Distance Duets,’ which is a set of five progressive duets from grades 1 to 4,” she explains. “The idea was to let students create ensemble-based music when live ensembles weren’t possible. Students could record and play along with their own recording or share with a friend. I gave these compositions away for free and was excited to see students from elementary through high school using them both during the start of the pandemic and today.”

At the same time, LaBrie wrote “Epic Quest,” which was commissioned by the Fairfax Arts Coalition for Education in memory of Larry Ferris, who ran the county’s Instruments for All program. “This is a flexible recruitment piece that goes along with a story, ideal for encouraging new young musicians, with versions written for different ensemble types and levels,” LaBrie says.

Early in LaBrie’s career, she discovered that music students often don’t know how to practice, so she put together strategies to help students achieve “OMGs” (Obtainable Musical Goals). “Over time, I developed a method of practicing that focused on quality over quantity which created vast improvement of students’ understanding of the fundamentals of music as well as marked improvement in our rehearsals,” she says.

She  then worked with her band colleague, Tracy Magwire, to further develop practice strategies with “The Big IDEA” (which stands for Identify, Decide, Execute and Analyze). They created a website of free resources to share with the music community at practicewithpurpose.net

“One of the keys to teaching The Big IDEA is to teach the concepts in chunks and provide background knowledge,” LaBrie explains. “Through our resources we ease students into learning how to practice with purpose step by step. One of my big goals as a music educator is to share! Share music, share ideas, share resources.”

Continue reading

Meldrum Tracy

Back to 40 Under 40

Tracy Meldrum

Tracy Meldrum

Director of Bands, Fine Arts Department Chair
Verrado High School
Buckeye, Arizona

Harmony is Tracy Meldrum’s superpower, according to one of her nomination letters. Like “a composer arranging notes to create rhythms, chords and melodies, Tracy wields harmony to create symphonies of great people. She champions her students to harmonize their originality, voices and talents into a dynamic ensemble of unison,” the letter states. 

“It is extremely important to me that we all are accepting of each other above everything else. It’s okay if a couple of people don’t get along, that’s normal; but they MUST respect one another,” Meldrum says. “It is important to me that I am helping to raise good humans who are kind to each other and who realize they are a part of something larger than themselves. I think coming together in music is a wonderful vehicle to help teach all those other life lessons in addition to their musical education.”

Her students have definitely heard and understand her message. This year, Meldrum’s drumline was warming up before a football game, and they invited the other team’s drumline to warm up with them. “I love to see them accepting each other and other bands with open arms and kindness. That’s when I know I’m getting through,” she says.

A tradition for the Verrado High School band is singing “Bridge Over Troubled Water” after every performance. Meldrum explains that for their first competitive marching band season, they played several Simon and Garfunkel songs, and that particular ballad conveys a timeless message. “I really wanted a song that would be truly meaningful to the kids no matter what year they were a part of the program, but also one that would hold sentimental value throughout the history of the entire program,” she says. “Now, all alumni and staff can come together and sing, and it is beyond powerful, and so special.”

Meldrum believes that music should not be an elitist program, so she has implemented several ways to offset band costs. In addition to fundraisers where students sell things like chocolate and sponsorships where donors are mentioned in programs or on banners, Meldrum started a “student X” fund. “Sometimes parents will donate a little extra to go where I want it to go, and I will put it into ‘student X,’ so if someone is coming up a little short, I have the means to help them,” she says.

Meldrum has also taken advantage of Arizona’s tax credit program where residents can indicate that they want their tax credit money ($200 for individuals or $400 if filing jointly) to go to their school and even to a specific program and a specific student. She created a form letter that students can slightly edit and send to their family and neighbors. “We have done ‘mailing days’ where I provide envelopes and return envelopes, and students provide stamps and addresses. We stuff envelopes with the letters, proper forms and return envelopes and send them out,” she says. 

Continue reading

Miller Tammy

Back to 40 Under 40

Tammy Miller

Tammy Miller

Artist Faculty of Piano
Omaha Conservatory of Music
Omaha, Nebraska

As a private piano instructor, Tammy Miller has found a unique way for her students to feel like they are part of a larger musical community. “Each year, I do a studio challenge that each of my students participate in,” Miller says. “I teach an average of 40 students who range in age from 4-78! The yearly studio challenge is an extra special aspect of their experience in my studio, and it increases their excitement toward learning and provides added engagement in their music lessons!”

For this year’s challenge, “Piano Olympics,” students participate in a different Piano Olympic event each month. September was a practice challenge where students were given an individual 30-day practice chart. “If they practiced 30 days, they earned a gold medal that they write their name on and post on my studio wall; 20 to 29 days of practice earned silver, and 10 to 19 days was bronze,” Miller explains.

October was music history where students listened to four different episodes that Miller pre-selected on the Classics for Kids website and completed the activity/quiz. During November, or “Note-vember,” students came up with a new mnemonic device for the lines and spaces on the treble and bass clef. Piano Olympics will continue through May with upcoming events on sight-reading, rhythm, improvisation, technique, etc. “To date, everyone in the studio has participated in every Piano Olympics challenge and earned at least a bronze medal,” Miller proudly proclaims  

In addition to her private piano lessons, Miller serves as the artist faculty representative to the Omaha Conservatory of Music board of directors for the next two academic years. “This role allows me to be a voice for the faculty and give feedback to the board to assist with their strategic planning efforts and improvements or new programs/offerings within the organization,” Miller says. As an artist faculty representative, Miller participates on the Educational Programming and Community Outreach Committees, which allows her to work a little closer with the directors of both committees on how the organization can have a greater impact on students at the conservatory and throughout the Omaha Metro area.

Miller is also the founder and president of the National Composers Orchestra (NCO), the first professional musical ensemble and chamber music series in Council Bluffs, Iowa, and the artistic director and founder of the NCO Chamber Music Series that operates in partnership with St. Paul’s Conservatory of Music. “The goal of the Chamber Music Series is to promote the music of living composers and provide immediate access to high-quality musical performances for the Council Bluffs community and the students at St. Paul’s Conservatory of Music,” Miller says. “In addition to high-quality live performances, students and audience members have the opportunity to meet and talk with guest artists and composers in a post-concert meet and greet.”

Continue reading

Molina Gabrielle

Back to 40 Under 40

Gabrielle Molina

Gabrielle Molina

Executive Director
Project Music
Stamford, Connecticut

Project Music is so much more than just an after-school music program. “We are cultivating change makers through music,” says Executive Director Gabrielle Molina. The program is open to young music students in the Stamford, Connecticut, area and includes free instruments, music instructions, mentorship and opportunities to perform.

“I’m most excited about our newest initiative that we are calling our ‘Learn & Earn Program’ where we train and pay our student leaders to help around Project Music,” Molina says. “These jobs include music librarian, equipment manager, speaker and tour guide for guests, a performance track and so many more. The students have to interview, present a resume, work on a budget for how they will use their money, and learn skills that will be directly translatable to college or a job.”

Prior to being named executive director, Molina was program director and focused on embedding Project Music even further into the community and working alongside other community partners that care about the kids, community development, education and the arts. “Now as executive director, I have to think about our sustainability and future positioning of the organization as we continue to grow and evolve to meet the needs of our community,” she says.

Currently, Project Music serves more than 100 students, but Molina’s goal is to more than double enrollment to 250+ through growing partnerships in the community. “I really believe that you have to meet students where they are, but with that being said, you have to also show them where they can go, all the possibilities that are open to them if they work and are ready to tackle challenges,” she says.

The approach Molina takes at Project Music is: If you want to go fast, go alone, but if you want to go far, go together. “We — and I say we because I don’t do this alone, this truly is a together effort — have engaged more community partners and asked ‘how can we get involved, how can we enroll more students?’ There’s so much great work being done in our community, so it’s really just about finding a way to work together because we all ultimately want to see a better, brighter community and future,” she says.

Molina also founded Teaching Artists International (TAI), a nonprofit whose mission is to “develop global citizen musicians that support music education around the world,” according to its website. TAI partners with music institutions worldwide to provide teaching artists residency opportunities to travel, perform and teach.

Continue reading

Moniz Justin John

Back to 40 Under 40

Justin John Moniz

Dr. Justin John Moniz

Associate Director of Vocal Performance, Coordinator of Vocal Pedagogy
New York University — The Steinhardt School of Culture, Education and Human Development
New York, New York

Taking a class taught by Justin John Moniz is an experience you won’t soon forget. “I work to create a classroom environment that in many ways parallels that of a theater. I rehearse my lectures, tech my visual aids and spend considerable time working through my pacing and transitions,” he says. “I venture to create interactive, thoughtful and immersive pedagogical experiences, which enable students to take an ‘intermission’ from the outside world in order to discover their truest potential.” 

The vocal pedagogy program at New York University (NYU) — The Steinhardt School of Culture, Education and Human Development is unique because it explores the “intersection of psychological health, the arts and communication,” Moniz says. “Our work enables us to build bridges and connect people around the globe by way of vocal music and individual expression.”

Moniz started the NYU Steinhardt Vocal Pedagogy Outreach Program to provide a platform for his graduate students to put their theoretical work into practice by working and engaging with disadvantaged communities across the state.

“The mission of the program parallels that of NYU Steinhardt: To advance the education, health and well-being of people and communities around the world. We achieve this by fostering knowledge, creativity and innovation at the crossroads of culture, education and human development,” he explains. “The graduate students in the vocal pedagogy program devised five unique workshops surrounding the themes of vocal efficiency and sustainability, technique versus style and vocal health. Each of the workshops engaged students in various virtual modalities.”

Moniz plans to continue to develop the vocal pedagogy program, and “I hope to broaden our reach by facilitating workshops with a growing number of geographically, culturally and economically disadvantaged communities across New York State,” he says.

Observing the impact of his teaching and mentorship when his students find success in their own teaching, research or performance pursuits “inspires me to be a bigger, bolder and braver lifelong learner myself,” Moniz says. 

Continue reading

Montalvo Bryant

Back to 40 Under 40

Bryant Montalvo

Bryant Montalvo

Music Teacher, Choir Director
Central Falls High School
Central Falls, Rhode Island

Bryant Montalvo was teaching abroad when the COVID-19 pandemic started, and he knew it was time to come home. When the opportunity to begin a new choral program at Central Falls High School presented itself, he couldn’t pass it up — even though his classes would be taught 100% remotely. “Most students who were on my class roster didn’t even know that music was being offered! Because of distance learning, creating traditional music ensembles was not feasible, so I created and developed the current curricula for Music Composition and Music Production classes solely around music technology to give my students an immediate, hands-on learning experience with music,” Montalvo explains.

In Music Composition 1 and 2, students utilize music notation software to build the necessary foundational skills of music literacy. Students create their own melodies and compositions and with the software’s playback capabilities, they can immediately hear what their work sounds like on various instruments.

In Music Production, students learn how to use a digital audio workstation to create their own beats, loops, remixes and original work through solo and collaborative tasks. The class also listens to and analyzes pop, hip-hop and current top-chart songs. “By utilizing the music that is currently streamed into the headphones of my students, the music room becomes a student-led learning environment,” Montalvo says. “I designed this course to be project based, so each student has useful, lifelong skills as well as a digital portfolio of work to share.”

Watch this fun YouTube video that Montalvo made at the end of the last school year where he raps about the new music courses! 

Central Falls is a Title I school where the majority of students are immigrants. Montalvo tells his classes that “in music, it takes everybody. You cannot leave a single person out when creating music, and everyone has to work together,” he says. He builds community among his students by ensuring that everyone learns and uses others’ names in the classroom to ensure that all students feel valued and respected. Montalvo’s students also drive their own learning and select repertoire they want to work on.

Montalvo also uses movement activities and games (which, Montalvo says, aren’t reserved for elementary students). “My high school students love a challenge when they have to work together, such as games that require beat making, keeping time and collaboration,” he says. 

The music program at Central Falls was started thanks to a portion of ESSER funds granted to the school. Montalvo also applied for five grants in the last year — and received all of them. “One of the grants we received was from the National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) and National Association for Music Education (NAfME) to start a new Tri-M Music Honor Society Chapter,” Montalvo says. “I am excited to be the first music teacher at Central Falls High School to induct students into this honor society this year at honors night.” 

Continue reading

Newman Cody

Back to 40 Under 40

Cody Newman

Cody Newman

Director of Bands
Forney High School
Forney, Texas

Cody Newman says his daily calling is empowering students to be in the band program. “It is so important to give away the reins to our young leaders as they will soon be given the reins to determine the direction of their lives and the lives of their future families,” the director of band says. “What more important job do I have than to empower young people to rise to overcome the challenges they will encounter?”

The goal of the band leadership team at Forney High School is to create “a culture of unity through selflessness, positivity and encouragement,” Newman says. “When our students strive to accomplish these things, our music and performance goals are simply byproducts of their true success.”

In 2021, Forney High was in the news because Micah Diffee, a student in a wheelchair, wanted to join the band. “Micah is exceptionally capable and any issues he came across were solved by him and his friend around him,” Newman says. “There is, of course, the feel-good story about Micah, but what was much more important were the day-to-day operations that the rest of the students took part in with him. My hope is that the students who were Micah’s bandmates see people differently in the future. I hope that they won’t focus on perceived disabilities, but rather on the opportunities. It was a daily inspiration watching the students all working together.”

Inspiration and spreading positivity are reverberating themes in Newman’s program. After a great performance, instead of listing off all the accomplishments that the band has had, Newman decided this year to use that time to continue to spread the message that the Forney band directors teach daily. They recite Longfellow’s poem, “The Arrow and the Song,” which is about “the importance of words,” Newman explains. “Some words stick with you and hurt you like the arrow, while other words build you up and are carried in your heart like a song. This message is so important and helpful to the daily operations and culture within our program that I thought, why not continue to spread that message like wildflower seeds at each venue we participate in throughout the fall season.”

Newman knows that he lives a charmed life. “I have been so blessed to have been a part of several incredible teams of directors that molded and shaped me into the teacher I am today. I look at directors I get to work with daily and recognize that I get to do this with them. I look at these students and recognize that I get to do this with them. I look at my young family and beautiful wife and realize that I get to do this with them. The ‘them’ is very important to me.”

Continue reading

Nguyen Terry

Back to 40 Under 40

Terry Nguyen

Terry Nguyen

Lecturer
University of California, Riverside
Riverside, California

If you’re a student at the University of California, Riverside (UCR) and have an interest in taiko drumming, just talk to Terry Nguyen! “Even though the UCR Taiko Ensemble is listed as a music ensemble in the Department of Music, anyone can join regardless of their major,” Nguyen says. “There are no audition requirements. Students are not required to have any prior musical experience. If they come to me with an open mind and a willingness to learn, then I will teach them!”

Nguyen is an alumnus of UCR, its Taiko Ensemble and Senryu Taiko (a student taiko drumming group). “I am not too far removed from the time that taiko started in Riverside,” she explains. “I am still in contact with the folks who laid the groundwork for taiko at UCR. It’s crucial to know this history, to have the first-hand experiences and to transmit the knowledge.”

Currently, Nguyen’s main focus is the UCR Taiko Ensemble, which is academic, and TaikoMix, a community-based performing ensemble that educates the public about the history and performance of taiko. “The majority of TaikoMix members are UCR and Senryu Taiko alumni, so it’s fun to have this living history that keeps growing each year,” Nguyen says. “The organizations support one another through sharing resources like taiko equipment and repertoire.”

Nguyen’s taiko class met off campus for nearly three years as she waited for the on-campus facility, The Barn Theater, to be renovated. Then came the pandemic. During the 2020-2021 fall quarter, some instructors were presented with an option of submitting worksite plans to offer in-person classes. The Barn’s renovation and expansion had just been completed that summer, so Nguyen formulated a plan that allowed her taiko class to convene in-person while also livestreaming for a synchronous class. Students who opted to come to class at the Barn complied with the strict sanitization protocols, including wearing masks and distancing themselves from one another. “As one of the first taiko/music ensembles to resume in-person rehearsals, I have shared the worksite plan with a couple of my fellow ensemble directors, as well as other taiko organizations, as they ramped back up to their in-person activities,” Nguyen says.

In addition to promoting taiko drumming, Nguyen finds ways to share Asian and Asian American cultural and traditional arts. “Aside from taiko, which I have been playing for nearly 20 years, I am one of few Tsugaru shamisen (Japanese three-stringed percussive lute) players in Southern California,” she says. “I am the principal shamisen player and artistic director of The Wagaku Collective, an all-traditional instrument ensemble that performs on shakuhachi/shinobue flutes, Tsugaru shamisen, Okinawan sanshin and, of course, taiko.”

See Nguyen’s shamisen (@tsugaruterry) Facebook and Instagram pages. Nguyen also appears as a guest artist with various taiko ensembles and musicians. She studies and researches the history of Japanese traditional instruments (wagakki) and folk music (minyo), which is reflected in her lessons and presentations.  

Continue reading

Otto Tanner

Back to 40 Under 40

Tanner Otto

Tanner Otto

Orchestra Director
Sycamore Community Schools
Cincinnati, Ohio

Tanner Otto admits to being a thief. “Most of my ideas have been ‘borrowed’ from other orchestra teachers,” he says. The idea for the marching orchestra came from his teacher, Brian Cole, whose middle school orchestra played and walked in the fall homecoming parade for years. “As a student I always enjoyed the experience of being in a parade and throwing out candy to those who came to watch. The homecoming parade at Sycamore Community Schools is one of my favorite events of the year. Most people expect to see the marching band in the parade, but seeing the orchestra is a fun surprise! The parade is a great way for us to be visible in the community and for our students to show their school spirit.”

The orchestra director adds that violins and violas walk the parade while cellos and basses sit on a flatbed trailer or in the back of a pickup — see the video of the marching orchestra in action.

Another “borrowed” idea was a concert that featured a glow-in-the-dark rendition of “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” Otto says, “We started by putting glow-in-the-dark stars on the instruments, then we took it to the next level by buying glow bracelets for each student in our school colors. In the moments before we played ‘Twinkle Twinkle,’ students cracked their bracelets and put them on their bow hands. Once the lights were off, it created a super cool look. I even used a giant glow stick as a baton!”

These out-of-the-box ideas make orchestra fun and engaging for his students. He supplements the method book for his second-year students with pop songs or music from movies or TV shows. “Students love to play music they recognize, and many of them have pedagogical merit,” Otto explains. “For example, ‘Havana’ by Camila Cabello is great for refining the C major finger pattern and off-beat 8th notes. ‘The Star Spangled Banner’ is perfect for forward extensions. Many of these songs can be arranged into different keys, depending on what students are working on.”

Otto adds improvisation, composition and digital music creation into the curriculum. He says, “While improv is something we work on all year, composing and music creation are great units to do after concerts or before breaks. Students really enjoy these projects and I love seeing how creative their final products are.”

Another unique teaching method Otto uses is to have students work with partners to refine their technique. “Working with a peer is less intimidating and makes orchestra more social,” he says. “I find it especially useful when we begin working with the bow. In no time, students begin acting as the teacher, recognizing mistakes and helping their partner.”

Even his classroom setup is forward thinking. “Even before COVID, we sat in a grid with a few feet between each chair,” Otto explains. “Having space between each student really helps with classroom management and gives me the ability to walk around the room and get to every student. I also don’t have a podium or stand at the front of the room and that keeps me from being tied to one spot. I often walk around with my instrument so that I can play along or demonstrate.”

Continue reading

Perkins Kenneth

Back to 40 Under 40

Kenneth Perkins

Kenneth Perkins

Music Teacher
Joseph Keels Elementary School
Columbia, South Carolina

Kenneth Perkins started the Joseph Keels Elementary (JKE) chorus in 2012 — his first year as a music teacher. That year, he had about 12 kids in the choir, and for the winter concert, they performed “a whopping five songs accompanied by me on the piano,” he says. After that first year, Perkins’ music program grew each year until 2020 when COVID hit.

An offshoot of his large chorus was the recorder ensemble that he assembled to play with the singers. Perkins says, “We played fun songs around the neighborhood, traveled to nursing homes, participated in festivals and even went to Carowinds [an amusement park in North Carolina]!”

Fun is a constant element in Perkins’ classroom. “I try to create a fun learning environment that is filled with plenty of movement,” he says. “Children learn by doing and because of that, I believe in having my students do and perform as much as physically possible. Music-making is at its peak level when all children can participate and feel like they are contributing to the process.” 

Even at the elementary level, Perkins actively seeks new and culturally relevant information that he can merge into his lessons. “This allows my lessons to be more fresh and unique,” he says. “In many ways, I give students a choice in the direction that our music lessons can go. They have shown me that they relish these opportunities — which may be as simple as allowing my kindergarten students to choose between playing instruments or playing a game — which encourages me to do even more.”

Outside the classroom, Perkins is just as enthusiastic. “Throughout the school, I try to do as much as I can to spread the joy and beauty of music to both adults and children,” he says. “For adults, I formed a faculty and staff choir and sought voices that were trained and untrained to join. It was a smashing success — the faculty choir performs for several programs throughout the school year.”

He continues, “For the younger grade levels, I am constantly seeking field trips to the ballet or to the local orchestra at the Koger Center. For the older students, I’ve showcased their talents on our acclaimed morning news shows. Students have played the recorder, violin and even sung on air!”

JKE is also involved in the University of South Carolina Strings Project that selects 25 students by lottery and offers them string lessons. Perkins has contributed to selected students for that program as well.

Continue reading

Pohland Joel

Back to 40 Under 40

Joel Pohland

Joel Pohland

Band Director (8-12),
Assistant Band Director (5-7)
Pierz Healy High School
Pierz, Minnesota

Being a band director is the Pohland family profession. Joel Pohland’s father, Glenn, and his brother, John, are both band directors, and Joel learned from both of them that the key to building a great band program is building relationships beyond the band room. And that is exactly what he has done at Pierz Healy High School.

Pohland has an open-door policy for his students and shows them that they can trust him to be more than their band director. “I am not afraid to share personal stories, trials and exciting adventures in my life, and the students appreciate this so much,” he says. “They want to know that their teachers are human and go through problems just like they do. I hope that by providing them room to express themselves outside of the band room and ask for help outside of music, that students will engage more completely in the band room and have trust in me to guide them to be the best versions of themselves — as musicians and human beings.”

In addition to providing support to his students, Pohland also challenges them musically. He searches for and discovers new music from new composers that push the boundaries of what has normally been done in the band world. “New composers are writing fun techniques such as using paper (as in “Paper Cut” by Alex Shapiro) and so much more that engages students to a new level, which in turn engages our audience,” Pohland says. “I always try to find a central theme to our music, and I think that the students and audiences have really appreciated this because it adds to the overall concert experience.”

One memorable concert was the first performance after the COVID hiatus in the spring of 2021. “The Comeback Concert was incredible,” Pohland says. “There was so much passion and energy from the students — I’ve never seen so much excitement in the band room prior to a performance. It had been over a year since our last live performance, and the students were overjoyed.” 

Pohland appreciates the support his program receives from the administration and community. “Pierz is a really special place to work,” he says. “We have an incredible music team … and together we have created an incredible music program in our community, and the students have a place where they feel like they belong. So many students comment on how the band room is like a second home or an unexpected home — this is the greatest compliment I can receive as a music educator.”

Continue reading

Powell Alec

Back to 40 Under 40

Alec Powell

Alec Powell

Director of Choirs
Mountain Ridge Junior High
American Fork, Utah

Alec Powell considers himself to be a perfectionist, but he realizes that that can be a problem when teaching middle school students at Mountain Ridge Junior High. But his students are hard workers who constantly push themselves to be better. “They rarely want an easy day, and always surprise me with their tenacity,” he says.

Powell recalls that after a recent concert, he was out sick. He left his students to work in sectionals on some new music. “When I came back, not only had they learned their new music, but they memorized it. They wanted to surprise me with how hard they worked.” 

How does the director of choirs instill this work ethic in his students? “I tell my students that the most important part of my class is becoming better people. I don’t care if they are musicians after they leave my room, but I do want them to leave better,” he says.

Powell understands that the middle school years can be difficult, so he connects with his students through honesty. “I strive to be as authentic as possible and model that same behavior in my classroom,” he says. “I talk about the losses as often as I do the wins. I speak openly about therapy, and how it and music have greatly affected my mental health. I give my students the space to say what and how they are feeling, and I act as a listener, not a fixer.”

During the pandemic, Powell saw the immediate need for a feel-good moment since the winter concert was canceled. “Normally I arrange our final number for the top three ensembles, but there was no way for this to happen. Seeing how other amazing educators were working with their virtual choirs, I decided to give it a go. After arranging/orchestrating the piece, we spent the beginning of November rehearsing and recording outside.” 

Enrollment in his choir classes have increased dramatically. “I wish I had the magic formula for this,” Powell admits. “I think it has to do with class culture. I remember latching on to teachers I connected with, so I share stores about my life and experiences to humanize myself in the eyes of my students.”

Continue reading

Rogers Benjamin

Back to 40 Under 40

Benjamin Rogers

Benjamin Rogers

Director of Choirs
Liberty Middle School
Spanaway, Washington

Empowering students to lead, embrace new ideas with a positive attitude and actively support one another are the foundations of Benjamin Rogers’ vocal program at Liberty Middle School. “We recently added a ‘Choir Shout-Out Wall’ in our classroom where students can give their peers compliments, and the focus on building community helps rehearsal attitude and retention,” he explains.

Rogers established a Choir Leadership Council for each choir, which has four main roles to help classes run successfully: 1) Directors Assistants typically lead the class through kinesthetic and vocal warmups and literacy activities; they also run choral rehearsals when Rogers is absent. 2) Secretaries take attendance and oversee any organizational aspects of the choral classroom, from numbering scores to collecting them after a concert cycle. 3) Marketing Chairs are the go-tos for fundraising efforts and the group’s social media. 4) Wardens encourage singers to meet classroom expectations and handle any emergencies.

But the biggest change Rogers implemented was creating and getting approval for four voice-based choir tracks — beginning, intermediate and advanced treble, and advanced bass — instead of grade-level choirs. During the prior academic year, the school piloted an advanced mixed choir with a beginning treble and beginning bass choir. “With a strong recruitment initiative, our numbers grew in size to accommodate the four voice-based choirs,” Rogers explains. “Our school has a fantastic counseling team that supports our music program wholeheartedly and forms our master schedule around our ensembles.”

This shift from grade-level to voice-based choirs was done not only at Liberty, but throughout the district, which “means that our community is empowering our arts programs and paving the way for higher achieving music ensembles,” Rogers says. “We are able to differentiate our instruction for the different levels and types of voices in each choir in a more efficient way than when all students are clumped together as part of a grade-level choir.” 

With such innovative changes, it’s no wonder that choir numbers have more than doubled — even in the midst of a pandemic. Rogers has strong, year-round recruitment. “Our choirs record and send ‘virtual letters’ to our feeder schools with our choirs singing, we’ve done choral pen pals, we share our concerts with our feeder schools, and I join our counseling team on visits to the elementary schools,” he says. “After initial registration, I call every incoming 6th-grade family to encourage them to join one of our music programs at Liberty. We also recruit from our current student population with bring-a-friend-to-choir events, and I recruit from teaching a 6th-grade general music class to students who aren’t in a music ensemble.”

Continue reading

Stanford Mark

Back to 40 Under 40

Mark Stanford

Mark Stanford

Director of Bands, Music Teacher
Springfield High School
Springfield, Pennsylvania

In this fast-moving world, it’s rare to encounter someone who thinks things through before acting. But that’s exactly what Mark Stanford does. “I make a conscious effort to take a step back and think about my response, answers and decisions,” he explains. “One way I have done this is by asking for the opinions of others, including students! And I seriously consider everyone’s opinions and suggestions — in fact, this year’s marching band show was entirely selected by the students.”

He took this same approach when he took over the band program at Springfield High School. “Not implementing too many rapid changes was important because each program has its own unique culture and expectations that must be learned and considered before making changes,” he says. “Upon my arrival, the Springfield band program already was headed in a positive direction. Keeping in touch with the former director and talking to colleagues helps me make decisions and changes that improve the program while honoring its legacy and traditions.” 

Recruitment has been a primary focus for Stanford as he grows the band’s enrollment. “We have a district tradition of doing a side-by-side concert with the 8th-grade and high school bands,” he says. “We also have an 8th-grade band night, where 8th graders rehearse and have fun with the high school marching band. I also host several recruitment meetings led by current band members who share their experiences, and we emphasize that students can be involved in band and athletics by working with the district media team to have our athlete/musicians featured on social media.”

With his training on Pro Tools software and music technology instruction during his master’s degree program, Stanford was asked to help set up the new music lab and develop the curriculum for the digital music production class. Along with his colleague, Mike Zubert, Stanford worked with the district to purchase Pro Tools along with desk-mounted microphones and MIDI controllers, which maximized desk space. “The new curriculum gives students the opportunity to learn about concepts of music by creating and producing on industry-standard software,” he says.

On top of band and digital music courses, Stanford teaches a guitar and ukulele elective for which he developed curriculum and content with Zubert.

Continue reading

Schoolland Amanda

Back to 40 Under 40

Amanda Schoolland

Amanda Schoolland

Music Director, Computer Coding Instructor
Metlakatla High School
Metlakatla, Alaska

Amanda Schoolland embraces the traditions of Metlakatla where she teaches. S’malgyak, the native language of the Tsimshian people who live in Metlakatla, is a dying language. “I work with members of the community and school to revive the language by using phrases in class,” Schoolland says. “In addition, we often sing songs in S’malgyak, and a local dance leader has gifted some of his original compositions to the high school band. We perform at least one of his pieces every year and use locally made hand drums decorated with Tsimshian Northwest Formline Art.” 

Music is a big part of Metlakatla culture, “creating a unique history on our isolated Alaskan island,” Schoolland says. “Because of this rich background, families encourage students in any and all musical avenues. When I proposed marching in the Fourth of July and Founder’s Day parades, students were eager to give it a shot. We rehearsed through the month of June and marched in our town celebrations. This was the first marching band in decades!”

The year before Schoolland joined the faculty of Metlakatla High School as the music director, the music department was all but gone. “It has been a wonderful experience to rebuild the program and see it flourish,” she says. “Even after school hours, the band room is often filled with students excited to share their accomplishments and gain more confidence in their musical abilities. My students are gifted artists and interesting, creative individuals that make our music ensembles unique, tightly bonded and uplifting.”  

Schoolland also helped revive the community choir, which used to sing Christmas carols for the holiday celebration in town. “Years prior to my move to Metlakatla saw the group perform sporadically,” she explains. “A piano player who began accompanying the school choir mentioned the community choir, and together we contacted former members and invited new singers. The first year was a small group, but consistency proved to be the key, and the next year was much larger, filled with incredible voices and camaraderie.”  

In her quest to grow the music program, Schoolland lobbied school and district administrations to introduce a strings program when she saw the lack of string ensembles at the elementary and middle school levels. She then sought out grants to secure instruments through the Mr. Holland’s Opus Foundation and Colorado Public Radio, as well as through local community donations. “The first year, students participated in beginning orchestra,” she says. “By the second year, we were expanding to two and three ensembles to accommodate the number of students and various skill levels.”

In addition to music, Schoolland also teaches computer science. She keeps organized by using checklists and reminders. “For instance, I choose music selections early so I can study scores and compile sheet music for students well ahead of deadlines,” she explains. “In computer science, students are required to ask others for assistance before referring questions to me, so they are learning and teaching constantly. That leaves me more time to work with individual students on complex coding concepts. I thoroughly enjoy all the different hats I wear, which makes it easy to stay motivated.”  

Continue reading

Stadler Jennifer

Back to 40 Under 40

Jennifer Stadler

Jennifer Stadler

Independent Piano Teacher
Jennifer Stadler’s Piano Studio
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma

You’ll experience more than just playing the piano when you take private lessons from Jennifer Stadler. “I work hard to keep lessons interesting for my students (and myself!),” she says. “I maintain a massive library of resources including physical and digital games, educational apps and practice incentives to keep my students motivated throughout the school year.”

Stadler also provides a variety of performance opportunities in her piano studio, and she makes sure to include fun elements. “Students attend regular studio classes where they perform solo and ensemble pieces for a small group of peers,” she says. “They also engage in cup rhythm ensembles, sight-reading relays, digital escape rooms and other fun group activities.”

Her students also participate in two formal recitals ­— one in the winter and one in the spring. “The winter recital always includes a group sing-a-long, which everyone enjoys. During the quarantine, we continued this tradition over Zoom (with extended family, thanks to the online format) and also played holiday trivia,” she says.

The spring recital is different each year, according to Stadler. “One year, students created a storyboard of images that was projected on an overhead screen while they performed,” she says. “Another year, students created green-screen performance videos, where they appeared to be playing in another time or place (e.g., playing ‘Hedwig’s Theme’ inside Hogwarts) using chroma key technology. This multimedia project fostered creativity and musical connection — and the students had a ton of fun doing it.”

Students also participate in events outside of Stadler’s studio like the Central Oklahoma Music Teachers Association (COMTA) Clavinova Ensemble Adventures, a collaborative event where they perform in an orchestra of digital pianos, and the Oklahoma Music Teachers Association (OMTA) Achievement Auditions, a non-competitive adjudicated event where they can earn ribbons, medals and trophies.

With her tech skills, it’s not surprising that Stadler is a member of the National Conference for Keyboard Pedagogy (NCKP) Technology Committee, which is responsible for planning all aspects of the preconference technology track. She has presented sessions on  a variety of tech topics, including multimedia and long-distance recital ideas, the role of virtual reality in music performance and education, and green-screen technology.

Continue reading

Brandon Tambellini

Back to 40 Under 40

Brandon Tambellini

Brandon Tambellini

Band Director
Blackhawk High School
Beaver Falls, Pennsylvania

Brandon Tambellini knows that high school can be a difficult time for students. He tells his students at Blackhawk High School that instead of focusing on “what I can do,” they must focus on “what we can do.” He says, “In every group, every private lesson, at every level, we put our energy into creating music together, and students have found that they have grown together, which has changed the culture of ‘me’ to the culture of ‘we.’ At its core, students join band because they want to make music, but they also create lifelong friendships, establish a positive work ethic and inspire each other to strive for success.”

When the pandemic forced the closure of the school, the band director continued to have his students focus on their ability to make music despite the inability to play together. “Although the world was shifting and changing around us, it did not eliminate our love for the craft,” he says. “My job was to teach music in whatever format possible. When we returned to school, we found that our love for music as a group was deeper, and we were able to give more to the process of learning and performing because of the independent growth of each student during our time apart.”  

The return to school after the shutdown made Tambellini analyze what the district needed from music education, which led him to make a controversial decision — he removed the Blackhawk marching band from the competitive season. “As much as I wanted to put together an impressive competition show, our students and community needed something else,” he explains. “Instead, we focused on a football-style show. At the same time, I still scheduled, rehearsed and treated the group the same as if they were competing. Good music is still good music.”

Another recent change to the music program was adding Jazz Band to the curricular school day. A unique aspect of Blackhawk High School’s schedule is that there are classes during the 30-minute homeroom period. “I decided that a jazz/homeroom class would be an easy way to have rehearsal every day without interfering with after-school activities,” Tambellini says. “My students were excited and felt that making music together would be a great way to start the day. Regardless of the 7:30 a.m. start time, the Jazz Band has doubled in size in one year and continues to grow.”

The Jazz Band recently attended the Winter Lights Festival in Beaver Falls. Even though it was a bone-chilling 20 degrees, the students performed extremely well and “the members of the community complimented them for weeks following the performance,” Tambellini says. “Music educators must teach our students to give back to our community by giving the gift of music. Businesses, nursing homes, charities and other community-sponsored events are continuously looking for ensembles to perform, and the students need to know that their music means something to the community.”

Continue reading

VanDoren Katie

Back to 40 Under 40

Katie VanDoren

Katie VanDoren

Associate Director of Bands
Vandergrift High School
Austin, Texas

The secret behind the success of Vandergrift High School’s marching band — including being crowned the 2019 Bands of America Grand National Champion — is teamwork. “We have been very fortunate to have an incredible team of educators working side by side at Vandegrift HS over the past eight years,” says Katie VanDoren, the associate director of bands. “Mike Howard [the director of bands] and I have worked together the whole time, and we complement each other well. We haven’t reached our limit yet!”

Not only has the band garnered awards at national competitions, the program has grown in numbers and quality. VanDoren believes that this growth is due to “the incredible work happening at our middle schools, and the profound support we experience from our school and district administration, and our community.”

This support was vital during the pandemic. “This year, after our students finished their last performance, I experienced one of my proudest moments as an educator,” VanDoren says. “For the  seniors and juniors who made it through the COVID years and the sophomores and freshmen who made it through a real year of marching band, it was a feeling of immense pride to watch them finish and be proud of themselves and their journey.”

VanDoren is involved in several other organizations that advocate for music education. She is the assistant brass caption head for Santa Clara Vanguard, a clinician for Music for All and a member of SASI Leadership (a student leadership organization where she works as a facilitator at site-based camps and on the education team for drum major camps). “Managing the different roles I play during the year comes down to having a great support system in my husband and those I work with in each arena,” she explains. “There is definitely a lot of time spent working, but I am fortunate that everyone I surround myself with is also passionate about establishing boundaries for free time and family time.”

VanDoren is a true believer of continuous improvement. “There is always something personally or within any given system that can be better, whether you are looking at efficiency or efficacy,” she says. “Gradual, small improvement over time is what makes the big things happen!”

Continue reading

Walter Armond

Back to 40 Under 40

Armond Walter

Armond Walter

Director of Instrumental Music
Meadville Area Middle School
Meadville Area Senior High School
Meadville, Pennsylvania

Instrumental Music Director Armond Walter weaves some of the valuable lessons he learned from his mother — for example, “you define what success looks like” and “it’s not always about winning, rather what you learn or how you grow in the process” — into his classrooms at Meadville Area Middle School and Meadville Area Senior High School. “I tell my students to ‘do your best,’” he says. “While this mostly pertains to auditions and performances, it is something they can use in all other aspects of life. We discuss that there’s always room for growth, and we should be constantly evaluating ourselves to not only be better musicians, but better individuals.”

Walter knows that activities, teachers and peer relationships are some of the strongest incentives for students to come to school and do well. “Music is my avenue to connect with a broad range of students who can feel at home in my classroom because they are comfortable to be themselves without fear of judgment,” he explains.

However, during the COVID-19 pandemic, going to school was not an option. At that time, Walter was the president of the District 2 chapter of the Pennsylvania Music Educators Association (PMEA), and he worked with other directors in his area to brainstorm and share ideas following the release of a national performing arts aerosol study and how to minimize the risk of COVID  transmission.

“There was a basic plan created that each director could customize to best fit their program and school district,” Walter says. “While the results of our efforts varied across the area, many schools were able to continue with in-person rehearsals for jazz band, concert band, orchestras and other ensembles. For those who were not able to return to performing right away, we facilitated Zoom meetings to ask questions and discuss what directors could do to keep students engaged.”

While Walter was earning his master’s degree, he was told to advocate for his students because “someone was once an advocate for you or else you wouldn’t be here.” This pay-it-forward approach is something Walter takes to heart. “The achievements we see in our department are not influenced by one person, but many,” he says. “Through band, chorus, orchestra and drama, we work to offer our students a variety of opportunities that they enjoy and take ownership of.”

Continue reading

Vitale Chris

Back to 40 Under 40

Chris Vitale

Chris Vitale

Director of Bands
Westfield High School
Westfield, New Jersey

The Westfield High School band has a hashtag — #BandFamily — that resonates with students, staff and families. According to Director of Bands Chris Vitale, “The key ingredients of #BandFamily at Westfield are kindness, acceptance, respect and support. We are proud that we have students from every walk of life within our school community in the band. Each year, I am amazed and inspired by how accepting our students are of each other no matter what the circumstances.” 

Vitale considers himself lucky not only because of his students and their families, but because he works in a supportive district filled with talented and dedicated music educators, including his co-director, Trevor Sindorf.

To motivate and inspire his students, Vitale maintains a good balance between high standards and positive support for his students. “And I have always tried to be bluntly honest with my students,” he says. “When they do well, I tell them … and when they don’t, I don’t shy away from making that known. They appreciate the honest approach and the sense of accomplishment that they feel when they reach their goals is far greater as a result.”

Every other year, Vitale runs a leadership book club that is open to any student. The club reads Stephen Covey’s “The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People” over the course of several months and meets before school every few weeks to discuss various topics covered in the book. “I keep things very casual and try to let the students drive the discussions,” Vitale says. “The agenda of the book club is for everyone involved to learn more about themselves, myself included. Each time we run the club I learn from my students, which I find very fulfilling!”

Vitale views high school band as a vehicle to build good humans. “Through music we can teach acceptance, empathy, communication, accountability, time management and teamwork, among other things,” he says. “I tell students that you don’t have to be best friends with everyone in our band, but you do have to learn how to work together and help each other be successful. By helping others, you create a better experience for yourself — a win-win. If I can teach that and foster a love and appreciation for music along the way, then I think I’m doing everything I set out to do as an educator.”

Vitale is also a leader throughout the state and helped start the New Jersey Marching Band Directors Association (NJMBDA). “After the 2019 marching season, directors throughout New Jersey began conversations regarding a need for an organization solely focused on providing an educationally sound marching experience for the bands of our state,” he explains.

The nonprofit NJMBDA had over 70 high school bands join in its first year. “We look forward to growing in 2022 as an organization run by directors focused on providing world-class adjudication at a low price,” Vitale says. “We have a fantastic team of dedicated educators working together to drive the organization forward, including my co-president Erik Lynch [from Verona High School].”

Continue reading

Celebrating Lunar New Year Around the World

Celebrated by 1.5 billion people in most Asian countries, Lunar New Year is an auspicious time. Some people call it Chinese New Year, but outside of China, it goes by different names. In Vietnam, for example, it’s Tết; in Korea, it’s Seollal.

Similarly, the customs vary by country. In Korean culture, families celebrate for three days, spending the time visiting each other and playing games together; in addition, they leave out food for their ancestors. Vietnamese people present flowers and fruits in elaborate displays in their homes and gather to burn incense at temples.

In the U.S., Lunar New Year is also celebrated widely. It’s become a statewide holiday in California, with festivals and parades in Los Angeles, San Francisco and San Jose, as well as in New York City (where it’s a public school holiday), Boston, Seattle, Philadelphia, Houston and New Orleans. In addition, annual concerts commemorating the event are staged by the New York Philharmonic as well as at the Kennedy Center in Washington, D.C., Davies Symphony Hall in San Francisco and other prestigious concert halls.

The dates for the celebration follow the lunar calendar, so they change every year. In 2025, the holiday begins on January 29 and culminates on February 14. Each Lunar New Year is matched with one of 12 Chinese zodiac animals. 2025 is the Year of the Snake — the snake being a symbol of introspection, mystery and intelligence.

Three coins depicting the Chinese symbol for snake.
2025 is the Year of the Snake.

The Story Behind the Holiday

The legend behind Lunar New Year is that, thousands of years ago, the Nián monster (“Nián” is the Mandarin Chinese word for “year”) would rampage villages at the beginning of each new year, so families hid in their homes and prepared feasts as an offering to ancestors and gods, using firecrackers to scare away the monster. The color red signifies good luck and happiness, so homes are decorated with red and gold paper poems and lanterns to chase out the bad luck. In modern times, the 15-day celebration includes fireworks and red dragon costumes, which symbolically chase away the Nián monster. It kicks off on New Year’s Eve with a family feast dedicated to health, abundance and happiness.

The Music and Performances of Lunar New Year

The music associated with Lunar New Year celebrations has evolved over the centuries from humble beginnings to the performances we see today in big cities and concert halls around the world — even theme parks like Disneyland!

In Lunar New Year parades, musical instruments such as drums, gongs and cymbals are played loudly to keep the “bad luck” monster away. One Chinese traditional instrument used during those celebrations is the bo lang gu. This double-headed drum, created about 3,500 years ago, was part of religious rituals in Tibet, Mongolia, India and Taiwan. Nowadays you’ll see it sold along parade routes, and it’s often made by kids as a fun craft to make some noise. Two pellets are connected to each side of the drum and revelers hold a rod at the bottom. When the drum is twisted back and forth, the pellets strike the drum in a steady rhythm.

traditional Chinese toy drums.
Traditional Chinese bo lang gu drums.

A popular Lunar New Year tradition is the lion dance, with performers donning elaborate lion costumes. Often, two people are inside, making the lion’s big eyes blink and head wag back and forth. Dancers perform a routine, sometimes jumping on each other’s shoulders to make the lion appear large.

Celebration on the street
A lion dance

While the lion cavorts, large double-sided drums called da gu or tong gu are struck and cymbals are played loudly to chase away bad luck. The huge drums and bamboo drumsticks (shown below) are often ornately decorated to match the lion, and the musicians wear costumes with similar colors. Usually there are eight performers (musicians and dancers in total) because the number eight sounds similar to the Chinese word for money, so eight is seen as a good number for the new year and beyond.

Youth playing percussion instruments on the street
Chinese da gu drums.

Different Asian countries play the drums differently. For example, in Malaysia, drummers create a tempo that is meant to sound like the lion’s heartbeat to make it seem more alive. Typically, people bring small red envelopes (hong bao in Mandarin Chinese) to “feed” the lion for good luck and prosperity. Elders also fill these envelopes with money to give to children as fortune for the new year. Yamaha Artist Steven Lin has fond memories of the tradition, saying that, “as a child, I remember looking forward to [Lunar New Year] because I would receive red envelopes from friends and family.”

Boy with Yamaha piano
There may be some new year money is this child’s hong bao envelope.

Lunar New Year festivities often feature gongs and cymbals as well. The gong (da luo) is beaten with a padded mallet. The cymbals, known as jing-bo, are played in synchronized tempo with the drums. How the cymbal is struck is paired with particular movements of the dancers. A soft single strike of one cymbal (or gently touching the edge of a rim) is used when the lion is resting. A droning sound created by sliding the cymbals together is played when the lion is sleeping. Light or heavy clashing of the cymbals is matched with bigger movements. In addition, the musician will use their chest to dampen the sound of the cymbals when it needs to be stopped. Lion dances are carefully choreographed, with musicians and dancers relying on each other in constant collaboration.

Over the years, modern Western instruments have begun playing an increasingly larger role in Lunar New Year celebrations. Pianos first arrived in China in the 19th century, and quickly became very popular. Today, piano ownership has become a status symbol, with more than 40 million Chinese children estimated to be learning the instrument.

A woman and a boy playing the piano and looking at each other
It’s estimated that more than 40 million Chinese children are learning piano.

The Spring Festival Overture is a work strongly associated with the Lunar New Year (the Spring Festival of the title is the Chinese New Year), with themes that come from the folk music of the Shanbei region. It exists in various versions, some employing more traditional Chinese instruments, others using modern Western instruments, and has been performed by many prestigious symphony orchestras, including the Los Angeles Philharmonic and the New York Philharmonic. You can see and hear this piece performed on solo piano in this video.

Another traditional Lunar New Year song is Mu Ge (Pastoral Song), composed by Shan Han Kun in 1953 and based on a folk song from the northern part of China. You can watch Yamaha Artist Jessica Chow Shinn perform this piece in the video below.

The Celebration Feasts

The large meal that kicks things off on New Year’s Eve features dishes that are tied to tradition. Dumplings symbolize wealth because their shape looks similar to ancient gold coins. Dishes with long noodles as the main ingredient are eaten for a long life. Steamed fish is also consumed in abundance because the Chinese word for fish (yú) has the same pronunciation as the word for “surplus.” For dessert, nián gāo, a glutinous sweet rice cake, is said to make each year sweeter and better than the last. Mandarin oranges are also regularly given as gifts and eaten during Lunar New Year because they represent good luck and abundance.

Many different small dishes laid out on a table
A selection of Lunar New Year delicacies

“The New Year in my family has always been a special time to connect with loved ones and to eat delicious foods together,” says Chinn. “I grew up in Wisconsin, where my parents owned the only Asian grocery store in town, so we were well-stocked! I also had an amazing, close-knit Chinese community of aunts and uncles who took care of me and kept me enveloped in my heritage.”

In every Asian community that celebrates Lunar New Year, the hallmarks of the holiday are similar: a wish for prosperity, family togetherness and good luck in the coming year. It’s a wonderful time — a very special event that families look forward to every year.

How to Set Up Your Bass

Your bass may be a workhorse, but even workhorses need some TLC from time to time. Seasonal temperature and humidity changes, getting jostled around in the back of a van on the way to a gig, or simply being played regularly are all enough to throw even a great bass out of whack. Tell-tale signs of mild distress may include buzzing strings, or notes that sound sharp or flat even though you just tuned up.

When this happens, some manual adjustments may be needed to get your bass back into optimal playing shape. These tweaks — adjusting the curvature of the neck, raising or lowering the string height and setting the intonation — are what’s known as a “set-up,” and you can actually do it all yourself if you know what you’re trying to accomplish, understand how to execute each step, and have the right tools to get the job done. Plus — and this is an important plus — you have to be willing to take things slowly.

That’s because set-ups aren’t something to take lightly. All the adjustments are interrelated, which means you can’t usually get away with doing one without doing them all. More importantly, if you don’t do them properly (and slowly), you can exacerbate issues or even damage your bass.

If this worries you, know that you can always bring your bass to a qualified guitar technician (“guitar tech” for short) or a luthier. Your local music retailer should be able to refer you to these kinds of specialists — in fact, larger stores may even have one on the premises — or ask a guitarist; they usually know a good set-up person. There’s no shame in turning to a professional, but even if you know that’s the route you’d prefer to take, I’d still encourage you to read this article. It’s important to know how the different parts and components of your bass work together even if you don’t want to make these adjustments yourself.

If you’re comfortable taking the DIY route, you’ll save significant money each and every time your bass needs a set-up. What’s more, doing it yourself puts you on much more intimate terms with your bass. Wine, chocolate and flowers won’t be needed, but what you give is what you’ll get back.

Here’s what you need to get started:

Must-haves:

  • Screwdrivers – Flat-head and Phillips types of various sizes, ideally steel-tipped so you don’t strip any screws
  • A full set of Allen wrenches and socket wrenches (in both metric and standard sizes)
  • A tuner

Nice-to-haves:

  • A new set of strings
  • A ruler with 1/64″ increments
  • A capo
  • A workbench or a large table with a soft cover (towels or blankets work well), or a couch, bed or other large, non-abrasive space on which to lay your bass down

1. ADJUST THE BOW

How much concave bend — commonly referred to as “bow” or “relief” — the neck of your bass requires is up to you. Players who want their string height (i.e., the “action” of the bass) high might add some bow because they have an aggressive style and like to dig in. Bassists with a lighter touch often prefer a straighter neck to get the action as low as possible without generating fret buzz.

To add or reduce the bow, you adjust the truss rod. This is a steel bar that runs underneath the fretboard roughly from the nut at the top of the neck to the place where the neck meets the body. It’s there to counteract the relentless string tension that would otherwise pull the bass’s headstock toward the bridge and render the instrument virtually unplayable. The truss rod can be adjusted by either a socket wrench, an Allen wrench or a screwdriver, depending on the manufacturer and the age of the bass. To access it, you have to use a screwdriver to remove the truss rod cover (usually located either just behind the nut or underneath the pickguard), as shown in the photos below.

Closeup of someone removing truss cover on bass guitar with screwdriver.
Closeup of bass guitar with truss cover removed and rod exposed.

Start by detuning your bass (this relieves string tension and makes the job easier), then remove the truss rod cover and identify the correct wrench or screwdriver needed, making sure it snugly fits the head of the truss rod. Slowly (yes, there’s that word again!) give the truss rod a quarter-turn counter-clockwise (to loosen and add bow) or clockwise (to tighten and straighten the neck).

Closeup of bass guitar with allen wrench adjusting the truss rod.

Now retune the bass, then use a capo (or your finger) to fret the lowest string at the first fret with one hand. With your other hand, fret the same string where the neck meets the body, as shown in the photo below.

Closeup of someone checking the string height on a bass guitar.

Look at the space between the top of the seventh fret and the bottom of that lower string. If there’s roughly .015 inches (1/64-inch) of space or less there, you’ve nailed it. If the string is touching the seventh fret, you need to add more bow by giving the truss rod another quarter-turn (or less) counter-clockwise. If your initial adjustment doesn’t give you the desired result, repeat the process, but do so carefully and slowly. (I know I’m repeating myself, but it bears repeating.)

CAUTION: If you feel heavy resistance while turning the truss rod clockwise, stop tightening it and turn it counterclockwise a quarter-turn, then take your bass to a qualified tech. An overtightened truss rod can cause stress cracks in the neck, or the truss rod itself can even snap, which is a serious and expensive problem to repair.

2. ADJUST THE STRING HEIGHT

This is accomplished by adjusting the height of the bridge saddles located on top of the bridge; there are two per string (one on either side of the string), as shown below.

Closeup.

Adjusting one saddle is relatively simple, but getting all of them to the right height can be a challenge. That’s because the string height off the fingerboard should create a consistent arc across the fingerboard’s radius, measured width-wise.

Start by determining the appropriate screwdriver or Allen wrench needed. Make sure you’ve got the correct size because the wrong tool can strip those small screws. Clockwise turns raise each saddle’s height; counter-clockwise turns lower it.

Closeup.

You can eyeball this as you’re making the adjustment, or for more precision, use a ruler to measure each saddle’s height. After each slight tweak, play a note at every fret to ensure there’s no buzzing. If there is any, or if you’re not completely happy with the overall “feel” of the fingerboard at this point (if the height of the saddles is uneven, you’ll probably notice it when playing), keep tweaking. It’s a precise adjustment, so be patient. When you’re satisfied with the results, it’s time to move on to adjusting intonation — the final step in the set-up process.

3. ADJUST THE INTONATION

Intonation is probably the most tedious and frustrating step to perform, but it’s absolutely necessary unless you enjoy being out of tune (which will likely result in your having to play solo for the rest of your life). Proper intonation requires that you set the saddle the correct distance from the nut so that a note played anywhere on the fretboard is identical to the mathematical pitch it’s supposed to match. How far off your intonation is becomes more obvious and pronounced the higher up the fretboard you play.

When a string’s saddle is closer to the nut than it’s supposed to be, notes will be increasingly flat as you go up the fretboard. Conversely, when the saddle is farther away from the nut than it’s supposed to be, notes will be sharp. You can fix this with slight turns of the saddle screws located on the bottom of the bridge, as shown below. This adjustment will serve to move the saddles forward or backward to their rightful position.

Closeup.

To start the process, plug into a tuner, then tune the bass. Now play the harmonic of the string you’re starting with at the twelfth fret and closely watch the tuner to ensure that the tuning is accurate. Then fret that same note at the twelfth fret and look at the tuner again. If the tuning is the same, that’s great, and you can move to the next string; if it’s not, you’ll need to move the saddle.

Before you make any adjustments, detune the string a bit so that the saddle screws glide easily across the bridge rather than scratch it under tension. Now locate the saddle screw for that string. If the note was sharp, turn the screw clockwise a half-turn, retune the string, and, using the tuner, check both the harmonic and the fretted note at the twelfth fret. If the note was flat, perform the same steps but turn the screw counterclockwise. You’ll know you’ve got it right when the harmonic and fretted note are exactly the same.

Closeup.

Repeat this for each string and retune the bass when you’re done to confirm that all the strings are intonated properly. This is necessary because, just as the tuning of one string affects all the others, the same is true of intonation. It’s common to have to fine-tune your intonation a number of times before you get it right, and it may take you a little while to get a feel for how much of an adjustment to make. As long as your eyes stay peeled on your tuner, you’ll eventually get it. (I promise you this process gets easier every time you do it.)

Before deciding that your set-up is complete, plug your bass into your amp and play it for awhile. You want to be sure the action is the way you like it, there’s no fret buzz, and the intonation is spot-on. Get all three right and playing your bass will become even more pleasurable than it is already!

All photos courtesy of the author.

NOTE: Yamaha cannot be held responsible for any damages that may occur to your instrument as a result of doing your own set-up.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

PMEA 2022

2022 Pennsylvania Music Educators Association Annual In-Service Conference

Welcome! We are thrilled to join the Pennsylvania Music Educators Association in presenting its annual in-service conference.

Pennsylvania’s 1.8 million public school students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. We applaud how you embrace the pioneering spirit of Pennsylvania as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you!

Meet Dave Clark and Matt Davis

Dave ClarkThe Pennsylvania Music Education Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We know how difficult these past two years have been as we have navigated through these uncertain times, and we want to express our appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

Matt DavisStop by and say hi to us in the exhibit hall. We’ll be showing some new instruments in the booth, including the Harmony Director, the YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone and the MS-9414 Marching Snare Drum.

If you need help or have additional questions, please feel free to reach out directly to us at Dave Clark or Matt Davis. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

Have a wonderful conference!

— Dave Clark and Matt Davis, District Managers,
School Services Division, Yamaha Corporation of America

Professional Development Resources

Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

Product Showcases

HARMONY DIRECTOR

HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1


HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


WINDS

NEW Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


STRINGS

YVN Model 3 Violin: The Most Innovative Student Violin


How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


PERCUSSION

NEW MS-9414 Series

NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum


NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


NEW CFM Series Concert Field Drum


Concert Chimes


SOFTWARE

Dorico for iPad


Cubase Recording Software


Dorico Music Notation Software


Introduction to Dorico for iPad


DRUMSETS

DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview


Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice


Stage Custom Hip – Full Sound and Compact Size


PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System


Remote Music Education and Live Streaming Can Sound Good!


KMEA 2022

Kansas Music Educators Association 2022 Professional Development Conference

Welcome! We are thrilled to join the Kansas Music Educators Association in presenting its 2022 Professional Development Conference.

Kansas’ nearly 470,000 public school students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. We applaud how you embrace the pioneering spirit of Kansas as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you!

Meet Wes Kreitz

Adam FrankThe Kansas Music Educators Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We know how difficult these past two years have been as we have navigated through these uncertain times, and I want to express my appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

Stop by and say hi to me in the exhibit hall. We’ll be showing some new instruments in the booth, including the Harmony Director, the YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone and the MS-9414 Marching Snare Drum.

If you need help or have additional questions, please feel free to reach out directly to me at wkreitz@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

Have a wonderful conference!

— Wes Kreitz, District Manager, School Services Division, Yamaha Corporation of America

Professional Development Resources

Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

Product Showcases

HARMONY DIRECTOR

HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1


HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


WINDS

NEW Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


STRINGS

YVN Model 3 Violin: The Most Innovative Student Violin


How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


PERCUSSION

NEW MS-9414 Series

NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum


NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


NEW CFM Series Concert Field Drum


Concert Chimes


SOFTWARE

Dorico for iPad


Cubase Recording Software


Dorico Music Notation Software


Introduction to Dorico for iPad


DRUMSETS

DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview


Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice


Stage Custom Hip – Full Sound and Compact Size


PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System


Remote Music Education and Live Streaming Can Sound Good!


CASMEC 2022

The 2022 California All-State Music Educator Conference

Welcome! We are thrilled to join the California All-State Music Educator Conference in presenting its 2022 Convention.

California’s nearly 6.2 million public school students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. We applaud how you embrace the pioneering spirit of California as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you!

Meet Jeff Queen

Adam FrankThe California All-State Music Educator Conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We know how difficult these past two years have been as we have navigated through these uncertain times, and we want to express our appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

Stop by the exhibit hall so we can chat, or you can email me at jqueen@yamaha.com with any questions. We’ll be showing some new instruments in the booth, including the Harmony Director, the YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone, and the MS-9414 Marching Snare Drum. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

Have a wonderful conference!

— Jeff Queen, District Manager, School Services Division, Yamaha Corporation of America

Professional Development Resources

Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

Product Showcases

HARMONY DIRECTOR

HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1


HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


WINDS

NEW Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


STRINGS

YVN Model 3 Violin: The Most Innovative Student Violin


How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


PERCUSSION

NEW MS-9414 Series

NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum


NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


NEW CFM Series Concert Field Drum


Concert Chimes


SOFTWARE

Dorico for iPad


Cubase Recording Software


Dorico Music Notation Software


Introduction to Dorico for iPad


DRUMSETS

DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview


Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice


Stage Custom Hip – Full Sound and Compact Size


PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System


Remote Music Education and Live Streaming Can Sound Good!


TMEA

Texas Music Educators Association 2025 Convention

Welcome! We are thrilled to join the Texas Music Educators Association in presenting its 2025 Convention.

Texas’ nearly 5.5 million public school students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. We applaud how you embrace the pioneering spirit of Texas as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you!

Click here to learn about five common challenges music educators face and some organizations that offer help and resources.

Meet Your Texas District Managers

  • Chris Manners

  • Jazmin Moralez

  • Neal Postma

This conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support, and professional development.

We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help. Stop by the exhibit hall so we can chat, or you can email us (cmanners@yamaha.com, jmoralez@yamaha.com, npostma@yamaha.com) with any questions. We’re eager to talk with you about your needs as an educator or performer.

Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more. Have a wonderful conference! 

— Chris Manners, District Manager, School Services Division, Yamaha Corp. of America

— Jazmine Moralez, District Manager, Piano Division, Yamaha Corp. of America

— Neal Postma, District Manager, Higher Education Solutions , Yamaha Corp. of America

Yamaha Master Educators Clinics

A Conversation with Band Featured Clinician Kevin Sedatole 
  • Clinician: Kevin Sedatole (Yamaha Master Educator) 
  • Thursday, February 13, 2025 at 10 – 11 a.m.  
  • Room: CC Hemisfair BR 3
Enhancing the Quality and Musical Depth of Your Concert Ensemble  
  • Clinician: Kevin Sedatole (Yamaha Master Educator) 
  • Thursday, February 13, 2025 at 1 – 2 p..m.  
  • Room: CC Hemisfair BR 3 
Exploring Rehearsal Techniques and Musical Ideas Through Grainger’s Lincolnshire Posy 
  • Clinician: Kevin Sedatole (Yamaha Master Educator) 
  • Friday, February 14, 2025 at 10 – 10:50 a.m.
  • Room: CC Hemisfair BR 3 
    Musical Opportunities in Grades 1-3 Wind Literature  
    • Clinician: Kevin Sedatole (Yamaha Master Educator) 
    • Friday, February 14, 2025 at 2:30 – 3:30 p.m.  
    • Room: CC Hemisfair BR 3 
    An Informal Conversation with Texas Band Legends 
    • Clinicians: Jerry Junkin (Yamaha Master Educator), Sarah McKoin, Richard Floyd (Yamaha Master Educator) 
    • Friday, February 14, 2025 at 4 – 5 p.m.  
    • Room: CC 217 
    Dallas Winds Saxes: What We’ve Learned In 32 Years 
    • Clinicians: Jerry Junkin (Yamaha Master Educator), David Lovrien, Donald Fabian, Roy Allen, John Sweeden 
    • Saturday, February 15, 2025 at 4:00 – 5 p.m.  
    • Room: CC 217 

    New Product Highlight: Marching Hardware

    Learn about the innovative design and manufacturing process behind the new Yamaha marching hardware products, which are scheduled to hit the market in early 2025. 

    In an exclusive interview, Joel Tetzlaff, Product Marketing Manager of the drums and percussion team, provides insight into how the new line of carriers and stands were developed. 

      Piano Info Sessions

      Explore Yamaha Pianos
      • 10 a.m.
      • “Whether you’re teaching foundational skills or guiding students to professional-level mastery, discover the innovative design features of Yamaha Pianos, crafted to elevate your music curriculum and enhance every learning experience.” 
      Clavinova in the Classroom
      • 11 a.m.
      • “Inspiring players of all levels, learn how Clavinova Keyboards combine cutting-edge technology with user-friendly features to engage your students, foster creativity and build essential skills.” 
      Respecting Tradition, Embracing Innovation
      • 2 p.m. – Thursday & Friday Only
      • “Find out how the latest Yamaha innovations are transforming the educational experience and bridging the gap between traditional craftsmanship and modern technology to meet the dynamic needs of today’s students.” 
      The Future of the Classroom & Beyond!
      • 3 p.m. – Thursday & Friday Only
      • “Discover how Yamaha connects students, teachers and musicians worldwide through a seamlessly accessible learning environment that can be accessed virtually anywhere.” 
      Grand Piano Action That Is Always in Tune
      • 4 p.m. – Thursday & Friday Only
      • “Explore how the AvantGrand Hybrid Piano can transform your music program by elevating the learning experience and empowering the next generation of musicians.”
      Yamaha Premium Piano Salon Open Hours
      • Grand Hyatt, Bowie B 2nd Floor
      • Thursday & Friday: 11 a.m. – 1 p.m.

        More Voices = More Music

        Below are five common challenges music educators face and some organizations that offer help and resources. 

        CHALLENGE #1: I want my music program to reflect the diversity of my students but finding music that represents their cultures and experiences can be difficult.

        SOLUTION: United Sound Composer Project supports emerging composers from diverse and minoritized backgrounds. United Sound helps teachers find and program music that resonates with their classrooms. They make it easy to access new compositions and provide resources to inspire your students to start creating.

        CHALLENGE #2: I want to include students with special needs in my music program, but I don’t have the staff or specialized training to support them.”

        SOLUTION: United Sound removes barriers by providing teacher and student training, peer mentor programs, and a comprehensive curriculum. With their support, music programs can be truly inclusive, giving ever student the chance to play and perform alongside their peers.

        CHALLENGE #3: My students are interested in music technology and production, but I lack the know-how to teach it.

        SOLUTION: Technology in Music Education (TI:ME) supports educators with the training and resources needed to integrate music technology into the classroom. From conferences to professional development sessions, they make sure you’re equipped to give students hands-on experiences in music production and technology. 

        CHALLENGE #4: I’d love to reach more students by integrating guitar glasses into my program but I don’t have the experience or resources to get started.

        SOLUTION: Teaching Guitar Workshop provides hands-on training for educators to start or expand guitar programs. 

        CHALLENGE #5: I’d love to reach more students by integrating popular music education into my program but I don’t have the experience or resources to get started.

        SOLUTION: Association for Popular Music Education (APME) advocates for popular music education at all levels, helping you integrate modern music into your programs. 

          PRODUCT SHOWCASES

          Harmony Director

          HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1

          HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


          WINDS

          Tomplay

          NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


          STRINGS

          YVN Model 3 Violin

          How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


          PERCUSSION

          NEW Marching Hardware

          NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum

          NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone

          CFM Series Concert Field Drum

          Concert Chimes



          PIANOS

          NU1XA AvantGrand Piano

          DC3XENPRO PE Disklavier Enspire

          GUITARS

          C40II Nylon Guitar

          SLG SILENT guitar™


          DORICO

          Why Switch to Dorico?

          What is Dorico?


          DRUMSETS

          DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview

          Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice

          Stage Custom Hip: Full Sound, Compact Size


          PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

          STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System

          Remote Music Education and Live Streaming


          Continue reading

          OMEA 2022

          Ohio Music Education Association 2022 Convention

          Welcome! We are thrilled to join the Ohio Music Education Association in presenting its 2022 Convention.

          Ohio’s nearly 1.7 million public school students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. We applaud how you embrace the pioneering spirit of Ohio as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you! 

          Meet Dave Clark

          Adam FrankThe Ohio Music Education Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We know how difficult these past two years have been as we have navigated through these uncertain times, and we want to express our appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

          Stop by the exhibit to chat, or you can email me at dclark@yamaha.com with any questions. We’ll be showing some new instruments in the booth, including the Harmony Director, the YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone, and the MS-9414 Marching Snare Drum. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

          Have a wonderful conference!

          — Dave Clark, District Manager, School Services Division, Yamaha Corporation of America 

          Professional Development Resources

          Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

          Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

          Product Showcases

          HARMONY DIRECTOR

          HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1


          HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


          WINDS

          NEW Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


          NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


          STRINGS

          YVN Model 3 Violin: The Most Innovative Student Violin


          How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


          SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


          PERCUSSION

          NEW MS-9414 Series

          NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum


          NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


          NEW CFM Series Concert Field Drum


          Concert Chimes


          SOFTWARE

          Dorico for iPad


          Cubase Recording Software


          Dorico Music Notation Software


          Introduction to Dorico for iPad


          DRUMSETS

          DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview


          Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice


          Stage Custom Hip – Full Sound and Compact Size


          PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

          STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System


          Remote Music Education and Live Streaming Can Sound Good!


          40 Under 40 – 2022

          2022 Yamaha “40 Under 40” — Celebrating Excellence in Music Education

          Last year, Yamaha launched the “40 Under 40” music education advocacy program to celebrate and recognize outstanding music educators who are making a difference by growing and strengthening their music programs. Now, we celebrate the 2022 group of remarkable educators who triumphed before and during the pandemic to keep their programs thriving.  

          These 40 educators — all under the age of 40 — showcase the following characteristics: action (anticipate what needs to be done and proactively take the necessary steps that lead to a stronger music program), courage (propose and implement new or bold ideas), creativity (show innovation and imagination in achieving plans and objectives) and growth (establish, grow or improve music education in their schools and communities). 

          We received hundreds of nominations from students, parents, other teachers and administrators, local instrument dealers and mentors. The selected “40 Under 40” educators below have gone above and beyond to elevate music and music-making in their students’ lives — like Terry Nguyen, who shares traditional Japanese and Asian cultural and traditional arts, especially taiko drumming; Jennifer Stadler, who incorporates fun games and technology into her lessons at her private piano studio; Amanda Schoolland, whose music program honors the culture and traditions of the Tsimshian people who live in the small Alaska town of Metlakatla where she teaches; Alexander Wilga, who coordinated a proposal that secured guaranteed funding for music programs across his district; and Kenneth Perkins, who started a faculty and staff choir at his elementary school.

          All the “40 Under 40” educators have remarkable stories behind their teaching philosophies and methods, and you’ll be inspired by all of them. 

          Join us in applauding the 2022 class of “40 Under 40” educators.

          Meet the 2025 “40 Under 40” Educators

          Meet the 2024 “40 Under 40” Educators

          Meet the 2023 “40 Under 40” Educators

          Meet the 2021 “40 Under 40” Educators

          David Amos

          David Amos

          Director of Bands
          Heritage Middle School
          Painesville, Ohio

          Read more

          Justin Antos

          Dr. Justin Antos

          Director of Bands and Orchestras
          Dwight D. Eisenhower High School
          Blue Island, Illinois

          Read more

          Cassandra Bechard

          Dr. Cassandra Bechard

          Director of Bands, Assistant Professor of Music
          University of Northwestern St. Paul
          St. Paul, Minnesota

          Read more

          Stephen Blanco

          Stephen Blanco

          Director of Mariachi Studies
          Las Vegas High School
          Las Vegas, Nevada

          Read more

          Robert Bryant

          Dr. Robert Bryant

          Music Education Coordinator,
          Assistant Professor of Music
          Tennessee State University
          Nashville, Tennessee

          Read more

          Adam Calus

          Adam Calus

          Executive Director
          Education Through Music — Massachusetts
          Boston, Massachusetts

          Read more

          Kristopher Chandler

          Kristopher Chandler

          Director of Bands
          Gautier High School
          Gautier, Mississippi

          Read more

          Danielle Collins

          Danielle Collins

          Director of Music, Media, Entertainment Technology (MMET) Department
          Academy for the Performing Arts
          Huntington Beach High School
          Huntington Beach, California

          Read more

          Dr. Nathan Dame

          Dr. Nathan Dame

          Director of Choral Activities,
          Fine Arts Department Chair
          Wylie East High School
          Wylie, Texas

          Read more

          Brandon Felder

          Brandon Felder

          Fine Arts Music Director
          SHABACH! K-8 Christian Academy
          Landover, Maryland
          Music Director
          Georgetown University Gospel Choir
          Washington, D.C.

          Read more

          Bryson Finney

          Bryson Finney

          Artistic Director, We Are Nashville Festival
          Learning Technology Specialist
          Metro Nashville Public Schools
          Nashville, Tennessee

          Read more

          Alain Goindoo

          Alain Goindoo

          Director of Bands, Jeaga Middle School
          West Palm Beach, Florida
          Executive Director, Hope Symphony INC

          Read more

          Jayme Hayes

          Jayme Hayes

          Director of Bands
          Mayberry Cultural and Fine Arts
          Magnet Middle School
          Wichita, Kansas

          Read more

          Jonathan Helmick

          Dr. Jonathan Helmick

          Director of Bands,
          Associate Professor of Music,
          Slippery Rock University
          Slippery Rock, Pennsylvania

          Read more

          Anastasia Homes

          Anastasia Homes

          Director of Bands
          San Elijo Middle School
          San Marcos, California

          Read more

          Amir Jones

          Amir Jones

          Director of Bands
          Thomas W. Harvey High School
          Painseville, Ohio

          Read more

          Damon Knepper

          Damon Knepper

          Director of Bands and Orchestras
          Ironwood Ridge High School
          Oro Valley, Arizona

          Read more

          Katie O'Hara Labrie

          Katie O’Hara LaBrie

          Composer, Conductor, Clinician
          Fairfax, Virginia

          Read more

          Wesley Lowe

          Wes Lowe

          Director of Instrumental Arts
          The King’s Academy
          West Palm Beach, Florida

          Read more

          Tracy Meldrum

          Tracy Meldrum

          Director of Bands, Fine Arts Department Chair
          Verrado High School
          Buckeye, Arizona

          Read more

          Tammy Miller

          Tammy Miller

          Artist Faculty of Piano
          Omaha Conservatory of Music
          Omaha, Nebraska

          Read more

          Gabrielle Molina

          Gabrielle Molina

          Executive Director
          Project Music
          Stamford, Connecticut

          Read more

          Justin John Moniz

          Dr. Justin John Moniz

          Associate Director of Vocal Performance,
          Coordinator of Vocal Pedagogy
          New York University — The Steinhardt School of Culture, Education and Human Development
          New York, New York

          Read more

          Bryant Montalvo

          Bryant Montalvo

          Music Teacher, Choir Director
          Central Falls High School
          Central Falls, Rhode Island

          Read more

          Cody Newman

          Cody Newman

          Director of Bands
          Forney High School
          Forney, Texas

          Read more

          Terry Nguyen

          Terry Nguyen

          Lecturer
          University of California, Riverside
          Riverside, California

          Read more

          Tanner Otto

          Tanner Otto

          Orchestra Director
          Sycamore Community Schools
          Cincinnati, Ohio

          Read more

          Kenneth Perkins

          Kenneth Perkins

          Music Teacher
          Joseph Keels Elementary School
          Columbia, South Carolina

          Read more

          Joel Pohland

          Joel Pohland

          Band Director (8-12),
          Assistant Band Director (5-7)
          Pierz Healy High School
          Pierz, Minnesota

          Read more

          Alec Powell

          Alec Powell

          Director of Choirs
          Mountain Ridge Junior High
          American Fork, Utah

          Read more

          Benjamin Rogers

          Benjamin Rogers

          Director of Choirs
          Liberty Middle School
          Spanaway, Washington

          Read more

          Amanda Schoolland

          Amanda Schoolland

          Music Director, Computer Coding Instructor
          Metlakatla High School
          Metlakatla, Alaska

          Read more

          Jennifer Stadler

          Jennifer Stadler

          Independent Piano Teacher
          Jennifer Stadler’s Piano Studio
          Oklahoma City, Oklahoma

          Read more

          Mark Stanford

          Mark Stanford

          Director of Bands, Music Teacher
          Springfield High School
          Springfield, Pennsylvania

          Read more

          Brandon Tambellini

          Brandon Tambellini

          Band Director
          Blackhawk High School
          Beaver Falls, Pennsylvania

          Read more

          Heather Taylor

          Heather Taylor

          Instrumental Music Teacher
          Lakeshore Elementary School
          Rochester, New York

          Read more

          Katie VanDoren

          Katie VanDoren

          Associate Director of Bands
          Vandergrift High School
          Austin, Texas

          Read more

          Chris Vitale

          Chris Vitale

          Director of Bands
          Westfield High School
          Westfield, New Jersey

          Read more

          Armond Walter

          Armond Walter

          Director of Instrumental Music
          Meadville Area Middle School
          Meadville Area Senior High School
          Meadville, Pennsylvania

          Read more

          Alexander M. Wilga

          Alex Wilga

          Director of Bands
          Davenport Central High School
          Davenport, Iowa

          Read more

          Continue reading

          Understanding Bandwidth and What it Means for HDMI®

          It’s not easy navigating the ever-changing world of video and audio for home entertainment. It seems like new formats and terms are popping up constantly.

          Bandwidth is a word you hear a lot these days, in reference to both computers and consumer electronics. In this article, we’ll take a look at what bandwidth means and how it impacts your home AV system.

          Speed vs. Bandwidth

          When defined in reference to what comes through your internet router, bandwidth refers to the maximum amount of digital data that can pass through the cable (or, in the case of Wi-Fi, through the air) in a given amount of time. It’s typically measured in Megabits per second (Mbps) or Gigabits per second (Gbps). A bit is the smallest increment in digital data; a Megabit is one million bits, and a Gigabit is a thousand times bigger. Don’t confuse Megabits and Gigabits (Mb and Gb) with Megabytes and Gigabytes (MB and GB), which are much larger and are used to measure file size.

          So far, so good, but here’s a crucial concept: When it comes to digital data, speed isn’t the same as bandwidth. Although they’re both measured in Mbps or Gbps, speed refers to how fast the data moves, whereas bandwidth refers to the cable’s (or Wi-Fi’s) maximum capacity to carry data in a given period of time.

          “Think of it as a wide-open highway versus that same highway with a one-mile construction zone that drops down to two lanes,” suggests Phil Shea, Content Development Manager for Consumer Audio at Yamaha. “Bandwidth is how many open lanes are available for the whole trip.”

          Line of traffic on highway being directed via orange cones and electronic arrow sign to move into one lane from many due to lane closure.
          Think of the data as the cars and the bandwidth as the size of the highway.

          Another analogy would be to a water hose. The wider the hose, the more water can pass through it at any one time.

          HDMI Bandwidth

          Bandwidth is also used as a measurement of how much data you can stream over HDMI®, whether it’s coming from an internet router, a streaming device (like a Roku® box), a gaming console or a Blu-ray player, and whether it’s going to an AV receiver or directly to your TV.

          If you have an AV receiver or sound bar in your system, it provides what’s referred to as HDMI passthrough. That means that data coming from your router, streaming box, game console or Blu-ray player goes into your receiver or sound bar and exits unchanged from that device’s HDMI output. From there, you connect it to your TV with another HDMI cable. (For more information about these kinds of interconnections, check out this blog posting.)

          The diagram below shows a simple setup. The content comes through the internet router, where it’s sent, either via ethernet or Wi-Fi, to a streaming device that’s connected to the AV receiver with an HDMI cable. The receiver amplifies the audio and sends it to the speakers (two speakers are shown here, but it could be a surround system) while the HDMI signal gets passed through the receiver and sent to the TV to provide the video portion of the content.

          Diagram.
          How HDMI passthrough works.

          How Much Is Too Much?

          The amount of bandwidth you need depends on the data rate of the content that you want to watch. (Data rate refers to the actual amount of information that’s required for a particular format such as 1080p, 2160p, 4K 30Hz, 4K 60Hz or 4K 120Hz.) The higher the format’s resolution, the more HDMI bandwidth it requires. It’s important to note that your system will only deliver as much bandwidth as its least capable component. So if your receiver supports 8K, but your TV only supports 4K 60Hz, then the latter will be the maximum resolution you can watch.

          The reason why this occurs is due to an HDMI feature called Extended Display Identification Data (EDID). The source device (e.g., Apple TV®, Roku, etc.) checks with the TV to establish the highest quality of content that the system can support. If every device agrees that they are capable of 4K 120, for example, then the source will send 4K 120 signal up the line. But if something in the system can only do 4K 30, then the source will only send 4K 30.

          Cabling Counts

          But there’s one part of your system that EDID doesn’t factor in: your HDMI cables. For example, if all the devices are compatible with 4K 120, the source will send out 4K 120. But if the cables don’t have the capacity to carry 4K 120 signal, you’ll get bad things like blank screens, dropouts and intermittent sound.

          When HDMI 2.1 was released a few years ago, it included a new cable standard supporting 48 Gbps bandwidth. But HDMI 2.0 cables only can handle 18 Gbps, so if you want content in 4K 120 (or, eventually, 8K), you’ll not only need components with sufficient bandwidth but cables with that same capacity too.

          Closeup of the connector.
          Not all HDMI cables have the same bandwidth.

          The 8K Way?

          The 8K format is the “new shiny object” of TV technology, with video resolution of 7680 × 4320 pixels. That’s four times as many pixels as 4K UHD (3840 x 2160) and sixteen times as many as Full HD (1920 x 1080). It requires so much data that you’ll not only need components capable of its bandwidth demands but HDMI 2.1 cables as well.

          But if you’re adding new components or building a completely new system, do you need it to be 8K capable? Not necessarily, says Shea … at least for now. “By far the most important thing is the dynamic range,” he says, referring to the brightness and contrast of the TV display when using video formats like HDR10+ and Dolby Vision™. “That offers the biggest improvement in picture quality. If you’re not doing 8K video streaming, then having a 40 Gbps receiver and nothing else in your system at that level doesn’t help.” Entry-level Yamaha AV receivers like the RX-V6A or RX-V4A offer 24 Gbps of HDMI bandwidth, sufficient, according to Shea, “for most consumer applications.”

          Closeup of front panel of unit.
          Yamaha RX-V6A AV receiver.

          The bottom line is that not everyone needs the biggest, baddest, fastest componentry out there when everything in the system is limiting. As long as you’re satisfied with the video and audio quality your home entertainment system is delivering, the specific bandwidth it’s using is irrelevant. After all, it’s about the experience, not the numbers.

          A Brief Guide to Drum Tonewoods

          Drum shells are constructed from a variety of materials, but wood is by far the most popular. Wood is strong, stable, easy to work with, produces a good sound and can be manufactured in a variety of eye-catching finishes. What’s more, different types of wood contribute different tonal characteristics to a drum, such as:

          • Warmth: A mellow tone comprised mostly of mid-range frequencies
          • Attack: The amount of clarity and articulation that is present in each stroke
          • Sustain: The length of time during which the sound of the drums resonates before decaying
          • Projection: The level of power and volume that is created
          • Low end: The amount of low-end frequencies the drum produces
          • Sensitivity: How quickly and accurately sound is produced when the drum is struck

          Yamaha began making drums in the late 1960s using birch and mahogany. According to Daryl Anderson (Senior Designer, Drums), those tonewoods were selected not only because they were structurally sound, but because they had a tonality that worked well for the music of that era. “The changes in construction of Yamaha drums in the decades since are reflections of what was happening in the music scene,” he explains. As an example, Anderson cites the Yamaha Recording Custom Series introduced in 1975 (originally named the 9000 Series), which were the first 100% birch drums available. “Their sound was characteristic of the music of the time,” he says, “with a cutting attack and deep low frequencies. As music evolves, we react in the way we create new instruments.” (Here’s what a YD9000 Recording Series drum kit sounds like).

          Let’s take a look at the various tonewoods commonly used to construct drum shells.

          Birch

          Birch is a durable hardwood that has long been popular for use in drum shells because it’s easily pliable and grows plentifully throughout the Northern Hemisphere. It’s a strong, medium-weight wood that usually has a straight grain pattern; although sometimes, the grain can appear curly. Birch typically has a white color that takes stain well and can develop an attractive yellow tint as it ages.

          The North American birch used to make Yamaha Recording Custom Series drum shells reduces unwanted overtones while producing a powerful, bright sound that cuts through the densest instrumentation, with excellent low-end boom. Here’s Yamaha artist Larnell Lewis playing a Recording Custom kit.

          Classic full drum kit with high hats and bass drum. The name Yamaha appears on drum face.
          The iconic Yamaha Recording Custom Series.

          Chinese birch, used in Yamaha Stage Custom Birch Series drums, needs a slightly warmer climate, so the wood grows a little faster and is a little softer than the North American variety. It produces a balanced tone across the entire frequency range with plenty of bite for a more “vintage” sound. Here’s what a Stage Custom Birch snare drum sounds like.

          Maple

          North American maple is a very strong hardwood that grows plentifully in the Northeastern United States and Canada. It’s durable and dense, with a light cream color and a smooth grain pattern that looks great when stained.

          Maple has been a mainstay of drum shells for many years due to its crisp tonality, balanced mids and highs, and slightly warm low end. The shells used for Yamaha Absolute Hybrid Maple Series drums consist of three plies of maple on each side of a single ply of wenge (see below), which makes for a rich, powerful sound with excellent sensitivity, projection and sustain. Here’s Wale Adeyemi playing an Absolute Hybrid Maple drum kit.

          North American and European maple shells give Yamaha Tour Custom Series drums a refined tone with quick response, excellent sustain and a focused low end, making them suitable for any musical style. Here’s Yamaha artist Larnell Lewis playing a Tour Custom Maple kit.

          Oak

          Oak is an extremely durable, dense hardwood that thrives in the Northern Hemisphere. It’s strong and heavy, with a characteristic deep grain that’s easy to recognize. What’s more, oak stains very well, enabling it to take on colors ranging from light beige to a dark walnut.

          Oak drum shells yield a very low fundamental tone (the basic pitch of the drum) for a focused sound, along with a solid midrange and bright, cutting highs, as well as excellent projection. Yamaha Live Custom Hybrid Oak Series drums are constructed using three plies of oak on each side of a center ply of phenolic material, then hand-finished with traditional Japanese uzukuri for a uniquely beautiful appearance.

          Closeup of wood grain.
          Live Custom Hybrid Oak Series shells are hand-finished.

          Here’s Yamaha artist Satoshi Bandoh playing a Live Custom Hybrid Oak kit.

          Poplar

          Poplar is a relatively light, stiff and resonant tonewood that has a straight, uniform grain with a white or creamy yellow color. Due to this light hue, minerals soaked up from the ground sometimes create streaks of color through the wood, ranging from blue and green to red and yellow, giving it a striking appearance.

          Poplar has been used for years in the construction of drum shells, both on its own or layered with other tonewoods. It yields a smooth, even tone with gentle highs and mids, along with a slightly boosted low end. Yamaha Rydeen Series drums feature six-ply poplar shells to achieve a warm tone with a good deal of bite as well as a great low end.

          Bright red drum kit with Yamaha on bass drum.
          Yamaha Rydeen Series.

          Wenge

          Found primarily in Central Africa, wenge is an extremely hard, dense wood with a medium to dark brown color, coarse straight grain and black veins. Wenge produces a relatively bright tone and resonant low end, and it’s used as the center ply in the construction of Yamaha Absolute Hybrid Maple drums.

          Closeup of inside edge of a drum shell showing the layers of wood and other materials that make up the shell.
          Yamaha Absolute Hybrid Maple shell.

          Jatoba

          Also known as Brazilian cherry, jatoba is found primarily in Central America and is one of the most popular exotic woods. Jatoba heartwood (from the dense inner part of the tree) is extremely hard and varies in color from light orange/brown to dark red/brown. Positioned as the center (and hardest) ply in Yamaha PHX Series drums, jatoba helps increase projection and strengthens the fundamental tone of the drum. Here’s Yamaha artist Moses Boyd playing a PHX Series drum kit.

          Closeup of a drum.
          Yamaha PHX Series drums are available in a variety of stunning finishes.

          Mahogany

          A heavy wood with straight, fine grain, mahogany grows in Cuba, Honduras, Mexico and Africa, and is often used in the construction of musical instruments due to its resonant properties. When used to make drum shells, mahogany yields soft highs, a smooth midrange and a boomy low end.

          Kapur

          A reddish-brown hardwood that grows primarily in Malaysia and Indonesia, kapur has a straight grain and a hardness that’s in-between maple and jatoba. Drum shells manufactured from kapur produce a good deal of boom with plenty of projection.

          Hybrids

          Yamaha PHX Series drums employ a unique shell configuration with plies of North American maple, kapur and jatoba. “The PHX shell has the hardest ply — the jatoba — at the center,” says Anderson. “On either side are plies of kapur, then we use maple for the inside and outside plies of the shell. Jatoba is incredibly dense and serves to excite the adjacent layers, sort of the way dropping a stone in a lake causes the energy to ripple outward.” The result is a shell that maximizes attack and sustain while providing plenty of projection and warmth.

          Crosscut image of shell.
          Yamaha PHX shell excitation structure.

          As mentioned previously, wenge is used as the center ply in Yamaha Absolute Hybrid Maple drum shells. “Wenge is harder and more dense than maple, so it produces a brighter sound and a higher pitch compared to maple,” Anderson explains. “It changes the tone versus a 100% maple shell. The very hard and dense center ply of the Absolute Hybrid Maple helps energize the drum shell chamber, increasing dynamic range, sensitivity, projection and volume. Basically, it takes that classic maple sound and bumps it up a few notches.”

          The shells for Yamaha Live Custom Hybrid Oak drums are constructed with a phenolic center ply — a type of resin. “Once we discovered how the core excites the adjacent layers,” says Anderson, “we experimented with a phenolic sheet as the center ply, and it reacted in a similar way as using a jatoba or wenge core because the phenolic resin is very hard and very dense.” This unique combination produces a drum shell with excellent projection and a balanced tone with bite.

          Manufacturing Process

          In addition to the tonewoods selected, the manufacturing process plays a critical role. Anderson explains the Yamaha method of making drum shells: “The veneer is kept at constant temperature and humidity to prevent delamination due to environmental changes (heat or humidity, for example), and we cut the veneer at a bias to ensure a perfect diagonal seam. The wood plies are cross-laminated for increased shell strength, and the seams are staggered around the shell so they don’t overlap. We use an ‘air seal’ system where an air bag is dropped into the center of the mold and inflated, pushing outward against the interior of the shell and marrying those plies together. This guarantees a perfect cylinder with uniform pressure throughout the shell. The whole thing — under pressure — goes into a huge microwave oven that bakes the glue and dries it quickly, and that’s how a Yamaha drum shell is born.”

          “We take the same care in the paint process,” he adds, “using environmental chambers to test whether our paint recipes are going to last if they’re exposed to extremely hot and humid environments or extremely cold and dry environments. We need to ensure that when our drums are purchased by someone — whether they live in Ontario, Canada or in the middle of Brazil — they arrive safely and will last a lifetime.”

           

          Want to hear a comparison between the sounds of these different tonewoods? Check out this video:

           

          Click here for more information about Yamaha acoustic drums.

          Fix It: Tips for Teaching Rhythmic Accuracy on the Piano

          Rhythm is the bedrock of music. Without it, we would have a random set of pitches aimlessly poking through our sonic world.

          A strong understanding of rhythm and the development of an internal pulse are key skills all musicians and music students must possess.

          However, too often, students and even their teachers focus their efforts on pitch accuracy with little attention to rhythm. This can lead to playing that lacks character, forward drive and a sense of phrasing. Here are some common errors I have encountered in the piano studio along with proven solutions.

          Fix it: Unsteady Sense of Pulse

          It is important to recognize the difference between rhythm and pulse. Pulse is what we consider the “beat,” while rhythm consists of the long and short sounds that fit within the pulse. It is common for students to play without a steady pulse. Sometimes this can be due to deficiencies with their playing technique. More often, it is because they have not fully internalized a steady sense of pulse.

          HEAD OF THE CLASS: The P-22 Upright Piano

          As teachers, sometimes we make the error of immediately reaching for the metronome, hoping that it will solve the problem. However, it is important to note that the metronome is a tool to help us remember the pulse or recall what different speeds are. The metronome is not the panacea for all pulse and rhythmic issues.

          Solution — To addressyoung female student marching pulse and rhythm problems, I like to use movement activities that can be accomplished away from the piano. I find this approach to be more effective. It also creates a small break in the lesson when the student can stand up and refocus with a different activity. Some movement ideas include marching or patsching (tapping on thighs) while singing the melody of the piece.

          These movements can also be used in a call-and-answer game of different rhythms as well as more traditional exercises like rhythmic dictation. An understanding of subdivisions can also be addressed with these activities. Inspiration for other movement activities can be found by exploring the teachings of Kodály, Orff and Dalcroze. Once I am convinced students have developed a reliable sense of pulse, I then introduce them to the metronome to help remind them of that pulse.

          Fix it: Misinterpreting Rhythmic Notation

          Incorrectly reading the rhythm of a passage is another common error made by piano students. Again, because we can sometimes be so focused on pitch accuracy, rhythm is forgotten. In this case, teachers often resort to some type of counting hoping that this will immediately solve the issue. In her book “Professional Piano Teaching, Volume 1,” Jeanine Jacobson outlines four counting systems:

          • Descriptive (nominative) — the student uses rhythmically spoken note names (quarter, half note, etc.)
          • Numerical — the student counts the number of beats for each note value (i.e., a half note is 1-2, a whole note is 1-2-3-4)
          • Metric — the student counts the number of beats per measure successively (i.e., 1 always refers to beat 1, 4 always refers to beat 4)
          • Syllabic — the student counts using an arbitrary set of syllables or words (i.e., Kodály system uses ta, ta-ty)

          Many piano method books focus on the first three approaches, which are very helpful when decoding rhythms. However, teachers can and should also apply the use of syllabic counting. Even if this approach is not employed in the method book being used, teachers can always supplement this knowledge with their own activities and explanations.

          Solution — I personally like to incorporate the principles of Dr. Edwin Gordon’s Music Learning Theory in my teaching. I introduce my students to reading rhythmic notation using his rhythmic syllable system. It is a beat function system and places emphasis on the rhythmic function of micro and macro beats. I feel that this approach helps students feel  the rhythm. Not only do they learn to internalize rhythms with conviction, they also easily grasp the concept of subdivision. As a result, the transfer of this knowledge to their own repertoire is seamless. Another similar approach that uses the principle of beat function but with different syllables is the Takadimi system.

          The syllabic approach to rhythm allows students to feel and verbalize rhythms before trying to play them on the piano. Furthermore, they will be able to confidently and accurately recognize and replicate the same rhythmic patterns in different contexts. Once students develop this skill, the transition to metric counting will be much easier, and they will more likely be open to counting while playing! I highly recommend looking into the syllabic approach by attending workshops and conference sessions. This YouTube video provides a short introduction.

          THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

          Fix It: Not Feeling the Difference Between Simple and Compound Meters

          two female students facing each other while holding hands and swaying The musical flow of 4/4 versus 6/8 meter is very different. Often, students may not read rhythms correctly because they do not have a full understanding of the meter.

          Solution — Again, movement activities will work best to help students appreciate the difference of meters. I sometimes like to join hands with students and help them sway back and forth, alternating weight on each foot to help them feel the pulse of each meter. Doing this while singing a passage or saying a rhythm together will help them feel the accurate rhythm as well as the overall phrasing. It will also help them develop a sense of the subdivisions within each big beat. Once students feel confident with this activity, I may pair them together or have older siblings help younger siblings develop that same understanding of meter.

          By focusing on rhythm, you will help your students play with greater confidence and accuracy. Their playing will communicate more musicality, artistry, vitality and character. Once a sense of rhythm and pulse is internalized, your students will enjoy learning music independently and they will play with flair.

          Picking the Best TV for Your Space

          How do you select the best TV for your space? There are so many options out there, it can get confusing. You also have to think about how large the TV should be, where and how high it should be placed, and how you will mount it if you end up deciding it should go on a wall.

          In this article we’ll demystify all these factors so you can simply kick back and enjoy some great shows and movies on your new TV.

          Think Big

          In my experience as an installer, I never get complaints from a client that their TV is “too big.” On the other hand, I’m often asked to swap out smaller sets for larger ones. So, to avoid annoying trips back to the store, re-stocking fees, or dealing with painful return processes — think big!

          How big are we talking about? Since TVs are very high resolution nowadays, you can get very close to the screen without seeing pixels. The accepted formula for minimum viewing distance (1.5x the screen width) reveals that you only have to be about 8.75 feet away from an 85″ diagonal display. I’m guessing this is probably much closer than many people think.

          I always recommend putting some blue tape on the wall to simulate the outer dimensions of a TV — a cheap and easy exercise — before you finalize the size of the set you’re going to buy. By doing this, you will likely find that the TV you thought was “too big” still looks kind of small on the wall. If you are waffling between two sizes (a 75″ and 85″ model, for instance), my advice is to always purchase the larger size if you can afford it.

          One last important note: TV manufacturers always list two heights: without stand and with stand. Use the “without stand” number if you plan to mount the set on a wall; use “with stand” if you intend to sit it on top of a piece of furniture.

          The Room Dictates the Size

          An important consideration for TV selection is how wide the room is. If you have some important seats that are off to the side of the TV and not directly in front, you may want to select an OLED model instead of a standard LCD one. These TVs have a wider viewing angle, so those folks off to the side won’t experience a darker image just because they are not in the prime seat. OLEDs are typically premium quality, so you are not just paying for the wide-angle capability, but also for better black levels and a more dynamic and detailed image. In my opinion, they’re worth the extra bucks.

          Needless to say, bigger spaces like the family room, rec room or home theater require bigger TVs. The minimum size set I recommend for those locations is 65″, but most of these types of rooms can accommodate a 75″, 85″ or even 100″ TV pretty easily.

          Locations like an office or home gym will generally require somewhat smaller TVs — usually in the 55″ to 65″ range — as will main bedrooms if space permits. Guest bedrooms are often outfitted with smaller models (43″ to 55″) while kitchens only require compact TVs in the 24″ to 32″ range. Mind you, these are just typical home guidelines. If you happen to watch a lot of movies in your bedroom or office, by all means go bigger!

          How High?

          This is something a lot of folks get wrong. In today’s home designs, there are less and less places to put a TV … and most of the available areas are not great. For example, a typical family room design uses the fireplace as a focal point and has a ton of windows. This forces you to put the TV above the fireplace, which is always too high. For optimum comfort (and minimum neck strain), your eyes should be level with the middle to the bottom third of the screen when seated. This is the most comfortable viewing angle for the human body. In other words, a 65″ TV should be mounted so that the bottom of the TV is roughly 26″ off the ground.

          A typical fireplace mantel, on the other hand, is 60″ off the ground — far from ideal. So get that TV as low as possible when room design permits. That said, you need to keep in mind any potential obstacles that could obstruct the view — things like coffee table knick-knacks, bed footboards and other furniture. Make sure they are not going to block any part of the screen at your selected TV height and viewing position.

          In addition, for optimum audio, you’ll want to add a sound bar, which should be placed as close to seated ear level as possible. This typically dictates that the sound bar be positioned under the TV. For that reason, you’ll need to take its dimensions into consideration before finalizing your TV height. (Note that, like TVs, most sound bars can be mounted on a wall or placed on top of a piece of furniture.) For more information about mounting a TV and sound bar, check out this blog posting.

          Mount Up

          Finally, there’s the important decision about whether you should mount your TV on the wall or simply put it on top of a credenza or other piece of furniture. The answer largely depends on the desired height and the aesthetic you are going after, as well as any physical restrictions. For example, if you’re an apartment-dweller, you may not be able to drill into the wall to hide wires … or you may not have an electrical outlet on the wall where you want to put the TV. In that case, using a piece of furniture instead of wall-mounting may be your best bet.

          If you do decide to mount the TV on a wall, you need to select a bracket type. There are three options here: tilt brackets, articulating arms and simple flat brackets. A tilt bracket is a must if for some reason you need to mount the TV very high up (for example, above the fireplace, as previously discussed). This will give you the flexibility to angle it downward. Unfortunately, these brackets are a little on the thick side, so your TV will stick off the wall an extra inch or so compared to a flat bracket. If your room has multiple viewing locations, then an articulating arm makes sense, but this is an even thicker bracket and will make the set stick off the wall an additional 3-4 inches. Assuming you can mount the TV at the correct height, and you have only a single primary viewing position, a flat bracket is the lowest cost, thinnest and best option.

           

          Choosing the right TV — in terms of both size and location — allows you to create an immersive home viewing experience. Integrate it with a quality audio system for an equally immersive listening experience and you’ll have every angle covered … literally.

          Auxiliary Instruments Every Concert Band Should Have

          At some point, concert band directors will need some auxiliary instruments. You may need to purchase these instruments for a music program at a new school. Or, you may need to replace instruments that are far too old and worn out to take to the stage anymore.

          With bands performing auxiliary-heavy modern pieces like “Godzilla Eats Las Vegas!” by Eric Whitacre, it can be difficult to determine which and how many auxiliary instruments you will need. In this article, I will list the ones that every concert band should have on hand.

          Auxiliary Percussion

          This is the area where you will spend most of your auxiliary instrument budget. Percussionists are always jumping from instrument to instrument for effect. The following auxiliary percussion instruments are must-haves.

          • two female percussionist playing the marimba and vibraphoneTimpani and Marimba : While many directors consider these standard instruments, they are technically auxiliary. A nice marimba (see photo to the right) is a must-have because it adds a mellow timbre that carries in a way that cannot be substituted by other tuned bar instruments like the xylophone or vibraphone. The timpani adds depth to the low end of a band’s sound. They are actually an evolved version of military drums. This versatile instrument can be found in operas, concertos and marches. These two instruments are at the top of the list because they are expensive and can be difficult to maintain. If your band program doesn’t have high-quality timpani and a rosewood marimba, set aside money in the budget for these first.
          • Brake Drum: With a little bit of searching, band directors can find a brake drum, which is a large piece from a car wheel, for free. It sounds like an anvil being struck. You play the brake drum with regular drumsticks.
          • Crotales: This set of small, cymbal-shaped bells are placed in a way that makes them look like the keys on a piano. They can be struck with a stick or even played with a bow for an eerie effect.
          • Castanets: These are common in concert band literature, especially Spanish marches. If you have a small budget, get the regular wooden castanets that you hold in each hand. If you have extra cash, get a castanet machine, a vertical stand with built-in castanets; you press or tap on the instruments with your hands. Having castanets on a stand and readily available will help percussionists with fast transitions.
          • Guiro: A specialized scraper instrument made from a hollowed and notched gourd, a guiro makes a ratchet sound when you run a stick along the notches.
          • Bell Tree: This is a tree of inverted and nested metal bowls that is scraped in a downward motion for a unique sound effect. The bell tree as we know it today was invented relatively recently — around 1950 — musically speaking.
          • Blocks: Wood blocks (a single piece of wood with a slit in it) and temple blocks (a set of five hollow wood or plastic blocks) are found in many scores. They can be heard in band pieces like “The Wooden Clock,” where the instruments create the featured tick tock sound.
          • Shakers: While most band programs have some type of shakers, it’s always a good idea to expand the percussion cabinet and get more. Egg shakers, maracas, woven basket-type shakers like the shakere are a good place to start.
          • Slapstick: If you plan on playing the ever-popular holiday tune, “Sleigh Ride,” next winter, make sure you have a slapstick (two pieces of wood connected by a hinge on one end) on hand to mimic the sound of a whip.

          Other fun auxiliary percussion instruments you should consider having on hand include a vibraslap (imitates a jaw-bone rattle), flexitone (makes a comical “boing” sound and when played very fast, mimics the sound of an old phone ringing) and ratchet  (makes rattling and clicking sounds and can be found in some of Strauss’s and Schoenberg’s pieces).

          flugelhornAuxiliary Brass

          The must-have auxiliary brass instrument is the flugelhorn, which is usually easy for trumpet players to transition to.

          While the Bb trumpet and flugelhorn share the same tubing size, the timbre of the two instruments is very different, which is mainly due to the shape of the bell. Also, the flare of the flugelhorn’s tubing begins closer to the mouthpiece than the trumpet, giving it more of a dark timbre.

          You can put bass trombones and piccolo trumpets on your wish list, but the flugelhorn is the most commonly used auxiliary brass instrument you see in a score (one example is this arrangement of “Auld Lang Syne”). The flugelhorn is also found in arrangements of folk songs and traditional holiday tunes. Amanda MucCulough’s “Charon’s Lullaby” is a really interesting use of the flugelhorn, which is the character of Charon, the Greek ferryman of Hades.

          Auxiliary Woodwinds

          piccoloThe must-have auxiliary woodwind for a concert band is a grenadilla wood piccolo. While many band directors make do with a metal marching piccolo and others get away with using all flutes for Sousa marches, leaving out this little instrument takes away a certain timbral je ne sais quoi.

          If it’s not in your budget to get a real grenadilla wood instrument, consider synthetic grenadilla wood or even a resin one. Remember: Anything is better than a metal piccolo when it comes to an indoor concert band.

          Other auxiliary woodwinds to consider, especially if you plan on delving into college-level repertoire, are an Eb clarinet, bass clarinet and English horn. Those with larger band programs (and hopefully, a larger budget) might be able to get an alto flute or a bass flute.

          A great budget hack when it comes to these smaller woodwinds is to go to garage sales and flea markets. While you are unlikely to find an English horn, you’d be surprised how many different kinds of clarinets and piccolos are floating around at outdoor garage sales! They might need a trip to the repair shop, but this is much more economical than buying one from an instrument retailer.

          Auxiliary Instruments: Substitutions

          If you can’t afford all the instruments on this list, get creative and substitute some instruments. While shakers vary widely in timbres, many of them can be substituted for one another when you’re in a pinch. Crotales can be replaced with some types of bells, and guiros can be replaced with other scrapers.

          Unfortunately, there aren’t many great substitutions for auxiliary woodwinds and brass instruments, though you can cheat a little by using timbres. If you can’t get a piccolo, Eb clarinet or another reedy wooden instrument, ask your clarinets, oboes and saxes to be louder or teach them to change their tone color to something more bright. The same goes for brass if you don’t have a flugelhorn. Ask your other conical-bore instruments like the euphonium and French horn to come up in volume and become more mellow and dark.

          Lastly, if your budget is tight, plan out all of your concerts during the summer. That way, you know what pieces your ensembles will play for each concert, and you’ll know exactly what instruments you will need, too!

          With a little planning and research, you can have a variety of auxiliary instruments for your program. Once you know what you can and can’t get and what you actually need, buying new bells and whistles (quite literally!) can be fun! Happy shopping!

          UMEA 2022

          Utah Music Educators Association 2022 Professional Development Conference

          Welcome! We are thrilled to join the Utah Music Educators Association in presenting its 2022 Professional Development Conference.

          Utah’s nearly 660,000 public school students are lucky to have access to music programs led by dedicated band, choral and orchestra directors like you. We applaud how you embrace the pioneering spirit of Utah as you map out innovative and trailblazing ways to engage and educate your students. Thank you! 

          Meet Wes Kreitz

          Adam FrankThe Utah Music Education Association conference gives us an opportunity to connect with all of you and to remind you that Yamaha is your partner in music education, not just through our great instruments and professional audio products but also with resources, support and professional development. We know how difficult these past two years have been as we have navigated through these uncertain times, and I want to express my appreciation and gratitude for everyone involved in making this conference possible. We want to continue to hear about your programs and learn about you and your specific needs to see how Yamaha can partner with you to help.

          Stop by and say hi to me in the exhibit hall. We’ll be showing some new instruments in the booth, including the Harmony Director, the YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone and the MS-9414 Marching Snare Drum.

          If you need help or have additional questions, please feel free to reach out directly to me at wkreitz@yamaha.com. Sign up for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to access advocacy, professional development, information on instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more.

          Have a wonderful conference!

          — Wes Kreitz, District Manager, School Services Division, Yamaha Corporation of America 

          Professional Development Resources

          Through the Yamaha Educator Suite blog site and SupportED magazine, Yamaha reaches thousands of educators with professional development tips, advice and resources. If you have questions or need help finding resources for your program, email us at educators@yamaha.com.

          Here is a sampling of our top professional development articles:

          Product Showcases

          HARMONY DIRECTOR

          HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 1


          HD-300 Quick Start Video Part 2


          WINDS

          NEW Yamaha Baritone Saxophone Demo


          NEW YDS-150 Digital Saxophone


          STRINGS

          YVN Model 3 Violin: The Most Innovative Student Violin


          How To Set Up an Electric Strings Ensemble


          SLB300 New Generation Silent Bass


          PERCUSSION

          NEW MS-9414 Series

          NEW CSR Brass Shell Snare Drum


          NEW YV-3030MS Vibraphone


          NEW CFM Series Concert Field Drum


          Concert Chimes


          SOFTWARE

          Dorico for iPad


          Cubase Recording Software


          Dorico Music Notation Software


          Introduction to Dorico for iPad


          DRUMSETS

          DTX6K3-X Electronic Drums Overview


          Using the EAD10 for Lessons and Practice


          Stage Custom Hip – Full Sound and Compact Size


          PROFESSIONAL AUDIO

          STAGEPAS 1K Portable PA System


          Remote Music Education and Live Streaming Can Sound Good!


          Top 10 Electric Guitar Effects

          It’s not just distortion, delay and reverb anymore. Today, there are thousands upon thousands of plug-ins and pedals that can change the sound of an electric guitar in countless ways. To help cut through the fuzz, here are 10 of the most popular electric guitar effects, complete with audio examples and screenshots showing their settings.

          1. DISTORTION

          When you think of blazing hot guitar sounds, there’s usually distortion involved. This comes from the harmonic saturation that occurs when you overload a preamp and/or vacuum tubes, but it can also be successfully emulated in digital models of amp sounds. Distortion is a mainstay of heavy metal and thrash music and provides extra sustain, tone and grit to your signal — think the classic sound of Randy Rhoads on Ozzy Osbourne’s “Crazy Train.”

          Screenshot.

          2. FUZZ

          Fuzz is another form of distortion, this time generated by using transistors to create a “clipped” square wave. (Like distortion, fuzz is something that can be successfully emulated by digital models.) Jimi Hendrix’s “Foxy Lady” is one of the best examples of fuzz guitar on record.

          Screenshot.

          3. DELAY

          A delay is simply a copy of the original signal, usually occurring milliseconds later. Many guitar effects processors and pedals allow you to set this in BPM (Beats Per Minute) with the use of a “tap tempo” button so that the delays can be synchronized with the music. Controls typically allow you adjust the effect level, the delay time and number of delays, as well as the amount of feedback (that is, how much output signal is fed back to the input). You can also usually pan the delays in stereo for an even more powerful sonic experience, as you can hear in the audio clip below. U2 guitarist The Edge often uses delays prominently, for example on “Where The Streets Have No Name.”

          Screenshot.

          4. REVERB

          Reverb is the sound of an acoustic space, where sound waves are bouncing off walls, ceilings and floors to create a sonic “wash.” Early recording studios (such as the famed Abbey Road in London, or Capitol Records in Los Angeles) created reverb by placing speakers in small but very “live” rooms (usually with tiled walls and concrete floors and ceilings), with carefully spaced microphones placed nearby to pick up the “re-amped” sound, which would then be blended in with the original source signal.

          Of course, this method of generating reverb wasn’t (and still isn’t!) practical for most people. Starting in the 1960s, guitar amps often came outfitted with a spring (or set of springs) to generate reverb, along with mounted transducers to pick up the reverberated signal. (Think Dick Dale or any surfer guitarist of the era.) Today’s digital emulations of spring reverbs (whether in pedal or plug-in form) sound equally cool.

          Screenshot.

          The recording studios of the ’70s offered a different kind of reverb called “plate” reverb. This was generated by a large, thin sheet of metal suspended by springs or clamps, with contact mics mounted on its surface to pick up the reverberated sound. Again, this isn’t practical for most homes (or stages), but modern digital emulations of plate reverbs sound just as good, making for a nice “washy” effect in which the sound of the guitar seems to float in space.

          Screenshot.

          5. PHASER

          What happens when you combine two identical audio signals together, but with one very slightly delayed? You get something known as phasing. Guitar phasers apply subtle filtering to shift the phase relationship of the two signals back and forth, creating this signature effect. The late Eddie Van Halen was well known for his use of phasing, as can be heard on songs like “Eruption” and “Atomic Punk.”

          Screenshot.

          6. FLANGER

          Add a subtle time modulation to phasing and you get what is known as flanging. (The term originated because this overlay of signals initially was done by playing two tape recordings of the same sound simultaneously while subtly changing the speed of one by gently pressing a finger down on the metal flange of one of the tape reels.) Technically, this creates what’s known as a comb filtering effect, but most of us simply refer to it as a “swooshing” sound.

          Screenshot.

          7. CHORUS

          Chorus is one of the most popular guitar effects. It uses subtle time and pitch differences to create a “doubling” effect that adds sparkle and shimmer to your sound. The delay times are usually quite short — under 30 milliseconds (thousandths of a second) — and the pitch wobble is generated by modulating the delay time with an LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). Chorusing was a mainstay of the sound of Police guitarist Andy Summers; think “Message In a Bottle.”

          Screenshot.

          8. PITCH SHIFT

          A pitch shifter alters the frequency (pitch) of the original input signal, then blends it back in with itself. This can be used to generate either a different musical note (a fourth, fifth, octave, etc.), or more commonly, a very subtle detuning of the note (a quarter-tone or less) for a “harmonizer” effect. With the use of a blend knob, you can add the extra shifted note (or notes) back into the original signal to your taste.

          Screenshot.

          9. ROTARY

          This guitar effect is based upon the sound of a rotating speaker cabinet called a “Leslie,” originally designed for use with the Hammond organ. It didn’t take long before players like George Harrison realized how cool it was to run a guitar through a Leslie too! It’s a big part of his sound in his late-era Beatles and solo records, and it plays a major role in the Tom Petty song “You Don’t Know How It Feels.”

          Screenshot.

          10. WAH

          This effect is normally controlled with a foot pedal; as you press the pedal up and down, it opens and closes a filter, similar to the action of manually turning a tone knob on an electric guitar as you play notes. (There are also “auto-wah” effects that are created by using a low-frequency oscillator — or “LFO” for short— to repetitively and automatically modulate a filter without the use of a pedal.) This creates a sound like a voice saying the word “wah,” hence the name. The wah effect reached the pinnacle of its popularity in the ’70s (think “Shaft”), but it’s still sometimes used today. When it comes to examples, there are few better than the classic “Theme From Shaft” by Isaac Hayes, or Jimi Hendrix’s “Voodoo Child.”

          Screenshot.

          Bear in mind that you can also combine two or more effects to create more complex tonalities: for example, distortion and wah (archetypical Hendrix), or reverb, delay and chorus (a big part of the sound of The Police). Take the time to experiment and create some of your own signature sounds using the effects on this list!

          All audio examples are played on a Yamaha Pacifica electric guitar through a Line 6 HX Stomp™ effects pedal. All screenshots were taken in HX Edit (the companion app to HX Stomp).

          The Pros and Cons of Discs vs. Downloads for Console Games

          These days, gamers have a lot of options at their fingertips, from myriad characters to emulate, to which systems to choose, to whether their quests will happen at home or via mobile devices. But there’s another big choice entering the gaming ecosystem lately and that’s whether to purchase game titles as traditional physical discs or as digital downloads.

          Just as some music lovers want vinyl albums or CDs and others don’t, there are no clear-cut “winners” or “losers” here. Both discs and digital games cost about the same, and they provide a gaming experience and interface that is often identical. Yet while physical discs still represent most sales, more and more gamers (and gaming console manufacturers) are moving toward downloadable cloud-based offerings. In this article, we’ll take a look at the reasons why, along with the advantages and disadvantages of each format.

          Discs: The Pros

          For those who grew up pre-millennium, this is largely the standard. For those folks, owning something tangible is a priority, and discs or cartridges allow for this; in fact, there are many gamers who will only buy a digital game if they can’t find a physical one for sale. While it’s true that physical discs can be scratched or lost, that’s more a matter of the owner’s due diligence; cared for correctly, they will provide smooth gaming (essentially) forever. Digital games do not always offer this permanence (more on that shortly).

          Unlike digital games, with a physical game, you can never be locked out. (See below.) Furthermore, if (heaven forbid) all the video game companies went out of business tomorrow, or if their servers went down, with physical games, you would still be able to play them on your consoles; digital games reliant on the internet or the cloud would be lost.

          Another big plus: There are no subscriptions needed for physical games; they’re always yours. What’s more, unlike digital games, physical games have a resale value. This value can even rise above the original purchase price if the game becomes a collector’s item.

          Last but not least, game discs or cartridges can be loaned or traded to other players. Digital games are non-transferable, though you can usually play them on any console you can sign into.

          Discs: The Cons

          The most obvious drawbacks to gaming from physical discs is that they are fragile (see above) and take up space. If you’re an avid gamer, you might own dozens — perhaps, even hundreds — of titles. These all need to go somewhere: on shelves, under a bed, in a closet or, worst of all (especially if you have a significant other), the middle of the living room. This can be a problem, especially in smaller living spaces. Digital games, of course, don’t have this drawback.

          Here’s something you might find surprising, however: When it comes to gaming speed, there’s no appreciable difference between a digital or physical game. Loading times may differ, depending upon your console, but unless the game is being played interactively online and the player’s internet is slow, the actual gaming experience should be identical regardless of whether the data originated in a server or on a physical disc.

          Downloads: The Pros

          Digital games are convenient, plain and simple. With a few clicks of a button, you can purchase one on your console or handheld device and within a relatively short space of time (which might range from just minutes to a couple of hours at most), the game is ready to play in the comfort of your home. There is no car ride necessary, no big box store or salesperson to deal with, no delivery time to wait out for a package to arrive. Just point, click and play.

          In addition, as noted above, digital games provide a way to own a great deal of media without having to worry about where to store it … or have a mountain of discs come crashing down on you!

          Another huge benefit is that digital libraries never sell out. Many gamers from the ’80s and ’90s know the frustration of going to a brick-and-mortar store to buy that one perfect title, only to learn that the last one had just walked out the door. Digital games are never unavailable.

          Digital games also make traveling with a library of titles much easier. Don’t want to pack hundreds or thousands of dollars worth of games in your checked bags? With a library of games stored on your hard drive, you’ll never face that dilemma. In the same way, digital games can never be lost by accident; they remain on a player’s account, essentially permanently.

          Downloads: The Cons

          Here’s where a pro turns into a con. The fact that digital games are bound to a player’s account means that, if for some reason a player is locked out of their account, access to the games is also denied. However, loss of access is rare and would likely only be the result of egregious behavior while playing online games or commenting vulgarly in online chats.

          In addition, digital games are often only sold by subscription; let the subscription lapse, and your access to the game is gone forever … or at least until you scrape up the necessary bucks to renew it.

          Digital games are like everything that’s on the internet: easily accessible but, in actuality, ephemeral. While your console is tangible, the game itself isn’t, which offers a sense of freedom … and, perhaps, a sense of absence, too. The choice is yours. Just bear in mind that there are advantages and disadvantages to both ways of entering the gaming Metaverse.

          The Power of the Placeholder

          I don’t know about you, but I was mesmerized watching The Beatles’ songwriting process in the recently released documentary Get Back. The most eye-opening practice was how Paul and John often sang whatever came to mind and slipped off their tongues … no matter how silly or unrealistic the idea was.

          This wasn’t necessarily unfamiliar to me, but the more I watched the more I realized I don’t do it as much as I used to. Hmm.

          In the song “Dig A Pony,” for example, John originally sings the words “I dig a skylight.” But he knows it isn’t right yet. We can almost see his brain turning as he twiddles a pencil, repeating the line over and over again until “road hog” occurs to him quite randomly. He realizes it’s the right choice as soon as he utters it.

          Merriam-Webster defines a road hog as “a driver of an automotive vehicle who obstructs others especially by occupying part of another’s traffic lane.” I didn’t know that! I always assumed that a road hog was some kind of street animal. But why would you “dig” an inconsiderate driver? John was a writer who didn’t care about logic. He simply liked the sound of how words fell together. “Road hog” may not have been as polite as “skylight,” but John wasn’t exactly known for his manners. So there we go. He dug a road hog. OK!

          The entry for “Dig A Pony” in the online Beatles Music History Newsletter states that “the randomness of the lyrics suggest that the author possibly didn’t have any intended interpretation in mind at all.” As John Lennon himself often professed, “Words meant whatever the hell one wished them to.”

          I get it. But that concept is a hard pill to swallow for someone like me who teaches a college class in pop songwriting, especially since I instruct my students to be sure to give context in the first verse of a song and clarity throughout the body so the listener doesn’t have to work so hard to understand what’s going on. It’s my belief that aspiring songwriters should learn the rules before breaking them … and that, if you do choose to break them, it should be done artfully. In this case, the extracted norm should be replaced with something that provokes the same or similar emotion.

          In the process of birthing “Something,” John counsels George to “just say whatever comes into your head each time … until you get the word.” For the line “attracts me like no fill-in-the-blank,” John offers up “cauliflower.” Ridiculous, yes, though it has the correct number of syllables. But we can also hear the connection between cauliflower and “other lover,” which George eventually stumbles on — we can see how one led to the other. How the two very softly rhyme. The relationship is there. And so, the logic.

          And then there’s Paul sitting at a piano discovering “The Long And Winding Road.” He’s contemplative, open, noncommittal with his word choices. Did you leave me standing there? Or waiting there? It’s a tie. In the end (and with a little help from a friend — roadie Mal Evans), he uses both words in different parts of the song.

          In my many years as a professional songwriter I’ve often been asked to find words for a “placeholder” lyric (sometimes called a “dummy” lyric) sung by a collaborator over a track he or she put together. If that person has a good sense of semantic aesthetics, half my work is done. Their verbal “road map” will be extremely suggestive of where I go with it.

          On my own, though, I don’t use placeholder lyrics as much as I used to. I wonder why. Perhaps over the years I’ve become jaded? Not as playful? Downright lazy? But watching how effortless and fluid it was for The Beatles, and knowing how excellent a song can be even when the meaning is totally ambiguous, has inspired me not to think too much — to see what feels right, as opposed to literally being on the money.

          Songwriting is an endless work in progress. We’re constantly learning how to expand or add to our tool box … and sometimes how to get back (no pun intended) to tools we have forgotten. I look forward to being a little dumber and welcoming that particular tool back in.

           

          Check out Shelly’s other postings.

          Use Movement to Fix Rhythmic Issues

          We have all had students who struggle to maintain a steady beat or who seem to not understand metric relationships. They compress rhythms or slow down during more challenging passages.

          The main reason students struggle with rhythm is because they haven’t experienced a rhythmically diverse foundation and developed a rhythm vocabulary. While clapping and playing with a metronome can fix some things, for students who do not feel rhythm, movement is often the most effective teaching tool.

          In my movement pedagogy and in this article, I like to synthesize the work of Émile Jaques-Dalcroze and Edwin Gordon, sprinkled with a little Rudolf Laban.

          • Émile Jaques-Dalcroze (1865-1950), a Swiss composer and music educator, developed Eurhythmics, or the study of music through movement.
          • Edwin Gordon (1927 – 2015) was a performer, music educator, researcher and author who established Music Learning Theory, a model for music education based on how children learn when they learn music. He also coined the term “audiation” – hearing and understanding music in one’s head, even when there is no music present.
          • Rudolf Laban (1879 – 1958), an Austrian-Hungarian dancer, choreographer and movement theorist, created Labanotation, a dance notation that allowed dances to be restaged. He also researched the basic principles of human movement, classifying them into four main parts.

          Although these three creative men differed in many ways, they agreed that movement and music are intertwined. I won’t dive too deeply into their philosophies and pedagogies here because I want to focus more on practical application, but I encourage you to read more about them.

          Rhythmic Patterns

          Music educators all agree that the sound should come before the symbol. Unfortunately, it’s far too easy to just open a method book and teach the symbol first. Often rhythmic problems can occur because a student just isn’t sure what those dots sounds like – they have no real meaning to the student. In Music Learning Theory, Gordon advocated for the use of rhythmic patterns prior to reading rhythmic notation.

          4/4 patternIn his theory, there are specific rules for creating the patterns, but for now, let’s just use a simple pattern of quarter, quarter, eighth, eighth, quarter in 4/4 time (see pattern to the right). As the teacher, I would start by using a neutral syllable like “bah, bah, bah-bah, bah.”

          I can either create different patterns and have the student repeat them back to me or I can chant two patterns and have the student tell me if they are the same or different. If the student cannot determine whether my patterns are the same or different, I know that they are not quite ready to audiate the meter and its subdivisions. So, we continue working on repeating patterns. After adding rhythmic solfege to the patterns and having the student create their own patterns, the notation or symbol makes more sense because the student already has the sound in his or her head. The timeline for this is different with each student.

          Big Beats and Little Beats

          woman swaying One of the most common rhythmic problems I encounter is playing steadily in 3/4 time. Unfortunately, most of the music on the radio and most of the music in early method books is in 2/4 or 4/4 time, so switching to triple meter can create problems. (While not directly movement-related, improvising in the “troublesome” meter can be a great help.)

          When a student struggles with playing with a steady beat or compresses running notes, it is usually because they do not understand the relationship between the big beats and the little beats. (Gordon calls big beats “macrobeats” and the little beats are called “microbeats.”)

          To help a student with this problem, I will improvise a piece in 3/4 time and ask them to sway back and forth or walk around the room to the macrobeat. I like swaying or walking better than clapping because these movements show the time and space that also exists between the beats, not just on the beat. (If you are not comfortable improvising, you can always use pre-notated music or sing or use a recording.)

          To incorporate the microbeats, have the student tap their fingers on their head or shoulders. When they can accurately feel the macrobeats and microbeats individually, ask the student to sway the macrobeats while tapping the microbeats. Again, this is helping the student to really feel the subdivisions.

          tennis ballI have also seen Dalcroze teachers use tennis balls to work on this concept. The teacher plays a piece with changing tempi while the student bounces the ball on the macrobeat. The microbeat actions might be passing the ball to another hand, tossing it. (Using the tennis ball also makes the student pay attention to how much force or accent is needed on each downbeat.)

          I work in a similar way with students who are compressing subdivisions or rushing through 16th note runs. I also like to have them “play” on the closed keyboard cover so they can hear the clarity of the rhythm without worrying about correct notes, dynamics, articulation, etc.

          Body Percussion

          twin girls clapping With older children, body percussion is a fun way to work on complex rhythms or polyrhythms. One of my favorite body percussion activities is a rhythm canon, demonstrated in this video by Dr. Jeremity Dittus. Michelle Wirth also has some great activities on her website, Body Percussion Classroom. I have used her Simple Three-Part Rhythm in conference presentations, with young children and even with  my college students, and they all have a great time.

          You can also have students create their own body percussion ensembles to address specific rhythmic issues. A great opportunity for body percussion is the 3:2 rhythm that occurs in Debussy’s “First Arabesque.”

          Of course, listening is the most powerful tool and we should encourage our students to listen to a variety of musical styles. There will always be students who struggle, though, and I hope that these tips will help you and your students as you travel on your musical journey together.

          Creating Vocal Chops and Other Sampler Tricks, Part 2

          In Part 1 of this two-part series, we used AudioWarp mode in a Sampler Track in Steinberg Cubase. The idea was to isolate one note and transpose it across the MIDI keyboard. Most samplers of this type — the kind that only let you load one sample at a time — offer a similar mode.

          They also usually have a mode that cuts your sample into smaller pieces based on user-selectable criteria. In the Cubase Sampler Track, it’s called Slice mode. This offers many creative possibilities but can be a little trickier to use than other modes.

          The advantage to making vocal chops with Slice mode is that, since you’re working with slices from a vocal recording, you end up with several that have different consonant sounds. These can be more interesting than the same sound transposed up and down the keyboard. Slice mode is also great for creating and manipulating drum loops.

          Ready to learn how to use Slice mode? Read on …

          Multi Chop

          In Cubase Sampler Track and similar plug-ins for other DAWs, the default option is to slice samples by their transients. Transients are the peaks at the beginning of sound waves where the attack of the sound begins. The sampler turns each of the transients it finds into a separate note and maps it to the keyboard. A Threshold knob allows you to control the level at which transients are detected, which affects how many slices you get.

          Screenshot of soundwaves.
          A drum sample sliced up using Transient mode.

          In Cubase, you can also choose Grid mode, which slices a sample based on the grid setting that you create for that track. Choosing sixteenth notes often works well, but it depends on the source material. You can also manipulate the slices manually in any mode by dragging their start or end points. If you select Manual mode, nothing gets automatically sliced — you have to click in the waveform to create slices.

          By the Slice

          Whichever method you choose, you end up with a finite group of slices, each triggered by its own MIDI note (these slices, by the way, don’t get transposed). In Cubase, the number of notes you have available after you slice a sample is equivalent to the number of slices created. These are mapped to your MIDI keyboard in a linear order.

          Screenshot of sound waves.
          The white keys represent notes with slices mapped to them.

          Cubase also creates a MIDI file of the notes corresponding to the slices — something that’s really helpful since you can drag and drop that file into the sampler’s MIDI track in the Project window.

          Screenshot of sound wave.
          The Drag MIDI Phrase to Project button (circled in red).

          From there, you can open the MIDI Key Editor to change the order and rhythm of the notes. It will then look something like the screenshot below:

          Screenshot of frequency chart.
          Each note represents a slice.

          You’ll have the most luck if you use a vocal sample from your song as the source material for your chops. It will feel more integrated, and the notes will be in the same key and scale as the song.

          If you want to use a vocal sample from outside your song, you’ll likely need to transpose it to match the key. Samplers all have global transpose options, so you’ll just have to figure out how many steps up or down you need to go.

          A Real Cut-Up

          Let’s take a look at an example of Slice mode in action, applied to this vocal phrase:

          I opened up a Sampler Track and dragged the phrase in, then sliced it in Transient mode to create vocal chops for use as a melody on top of a simple bass and MIDI drum part I’d recorded. I then triggered the chops I wanted from my MIDI keyboard, adding some delay and distortion in the Cubase mixer. When I was happy with my performance, I recorded it. Finally, I used Cubase’s Key Editor to quantize most of the notes.

          Here’s what the final track sounded like:

          On the Beat

          As mentioned earlier, Slice mode is also useful for cutting up drum loops or a section from a mixed drum track. Let’s say you have a loop with really cool sounds, but the drum part is not right for your song. Even if it’s at a much different tempo or in a different time signature, you can slice it into samples that you can trigger via MIDI. This allows you “deconstruct” drum recordings and access their individual hits, which you can then “reconstruct” into new patterns.

          To do this, simply drop the loop (or section) into your sampler and slice it by transients. Each resulting slice should represent a different drum hit. Try triggering from your MIDI keyboard or another controller, and you should be able to find kick, snare and hi-hat or ride slices that sound good. Now, with the click track going, record a new drum pattern or part and quantize it accordingly.

          Note that the end points of slices may not always work for a particular drum or cymbal. If it sounds cut off, you’ll need to extend the end of the slice. Conversely, if you hear another drum or cymbal at the end of a slice, you may have to shorten it. In Cubase and many samplers, slices are delineated by vertical markers that you can drag horizontally to change the start or end time.

          Screenshot of sound waves.
          Drag the white slicing markers to change start and end times.

          Here’s an example of deconstructing a drum loop, using this loop as source material:

          After slicing it up, you can record a completely different pattern with it, like this:

          The Transfer to New Instrument Button (circled in red in the illustration below) in Cubase’s Sampler Control allows you to move the active sample (or sample slices) into a virtual instrument. From there, you can edit it using that instrument’s features.

          Screenshot of sound waves.
          The Transfer to New Instrument button, circled in red..

          Slicing up a drum sample is an excellent way to create new drum tracks, but it does have some limitations. Dedicated drum sample instruments like Groove Agent SE (included with Cubase) use multisamples on each hit to make them sound more realistic. Different samples will be triggered depending on the velocity of the MIDI note (essentially, how hard you hit it), with each sample correspondingly louder or softer. For example, on a real drum kit, if you lightly tap a snare drum with a drumstick, it will sound quite a bit different than if you hit it hard. Using multisamples helps translate those dynamics into a realistic performance … even if you’re triggering virtual drum kit sounds instead of playing real drums.

          Screenshot.
          Sample slices loaded into Groove Agent 5 SE.

          Open the Envelope

          One final point: Samplers generally allow you to apply and edit envelopes, and to modulate samples with things like LFOs (Low Frequency Oscillators) so that the volume, pitch and/or timbre of a note changes over time, same as on a synthesizer.

          Screenshot.
          Editing a sample’s amplitude envelope.

          If you haven’t had experience with that type of editing, it’s helpful to experiment with it when you have some time on your hands. For example, check out what happens when you lengthen the attack or the release of an amplitude envelope. Or see how different filter types affect the notes sonically. Find out what happens when you turn up the resonance control in the filter section or use an LFO as a modulator. The more you understand those controls, the better your ability to manipulate vocal chops and other sampled parts.

           

          Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

          Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

          Be a Better Teacher by Being Selfish

          The word selfish gets a bad rap. By definition, it’s “lacking consideration for others; concerned chiefly with one’s own personal profit or pleasure.”

          The lacking consideration part may not be something to be celebrated. After all, we have to share this world with others, and we can achieve more when we work together. But being concerned chiefly with one’s own personal profit or pleasure — what’s so wrong with that? If I don’t put myself first, who else will?

          Why is selfish considered a negative trait? Probably because when we think of this term, Ebenezer Scrooge comes to mind or the dinner guest who gets seconds before the other guests have finished their first plate. The people in these examples can certainly improve their behavior and attitudes. But is the answer to go to the opposite extreme and sacrifice everything pleasurable and fulfilling to help someone else? I don’t think so. But perhaps a redirection or reevaluation of being selfish is necessary.

          The Giving Tree: A Tale of Selflessness or a Modern Horror Tale?

          If you’ve read Shel Silverstein‘s book “The Giving Tree,” you are likely in one of two camps. The quick synopsis of the book is that a boy needs/wants things, and a tree is happy to provide what the boy needs.

          The first camp sees a heartwarming story with an altruistic tree at its core. The tree is happy when it can give. The second camp sees the story differently — the boy continually takes advantage of the giving nature of the tree. Eventually, the tree becomes a stump with nothing left to give. The end.

          I was a fan of the tree, which first provided some fun for the boy — he swung around its branches and wore its fallen leaves like a crown. Later, the tree provided shade and apples. The apples were picked, and the leaves eventually fell, but they would come back with care and the change of the seasons.

          tree stumpBut then the story loses me. The boy wants more, and the tree gives it. But the tree starts giving away so much that it becomes less and less valuable. Branches are removed, and eventually, the entire trunk is cut down. The tree is reduced to a stump, but it continues to tell itself that its happy to give.

          At the time of this writing, I’m nearly 38 years old. I’m a practicing music teacher during the weekdays. I’m married with five kids. What do I want at the end of my career? I’m not exactly sure, but I do know two things: 1) I don’t want to delay all of my happiness and fulfillment post-teaching, and more importantly, 2) I don’t want to end up a stump. Furthermore, I want to be in a place where I am mentally and physically healthy enough to help others without sacrificing myself.

          When I look back at my early years of teaching, I cringe. Nearly every waking minute was tied to my career. If I wasn’t working, I was thinking about work or recovering from work. I enjoyed my job, but I was slowly losing some personal agency, my health was declining and I had little free time. And worst of all, it was my fault. I needed to shift some priorities and start acting with my own best interests in mind.

          In other words, I started to be a little selfish.

          man holding cup of coffee Some Small Changes to Put Yourself First

          “My first coffee of the day will not be in the car.” I made this a rule over a year ago, and it has made a world of difference. I get up, get ready, brew a cup of coffee and sit down with it. Oh, the anxiety I felt for the first week or two into this. I wasn’t able to get to school five minutes earlier. I thought I’d break. But in reality, it was a great, low-risk exercise in putting me first.

          Here are some other things you can do for yourself.

          Make It a Tie Game: For everything you do for someone else, do one thing for yourself. I don’t really believe in scorekeeping, but if you’re a person who always puts others first, this can be a great way to at least be playing a tied game.

          Don’t Delay All Gratification: How many times have you thought, “If I work hard, then someday, I’ll reap the benefits of my rewards”? Delayed gratification is fine, but sometimes we just need to enjoy what we want when we want it (in other words, now!).

          Early on, I made no time for social events and relaxing. All I did was work. And honestly, I wasn’t very fun to be around. Making some time each day or week to do something enjoyable with no strings attached did wonders in helping me to find balance.

          Remember Why You Got Into This: One of my college professors, Dr. Charles Menghini, used to say that many teachers end up losing their love for music. It can be struggle and a fight, but you must keep your love of music and educating students at the core of what you do professionally. It will be hard and may even seem naive with all the outside work that must be done, but you must avoid burning out.

          Do you remember when you first opened your instrument case or sang in the choir for the first time? That was a great feeling. We can still have that feeling while also sharing it with others.

          Establish Priorities

          So, you’ve chosen to put yourself first, and you’ve freed up some time. What do you do now? Establish some priorities to help determine where you most enjoy directing your energy. You may find that you simply want to spend time relaxing. Or, you may discover that all your free time goes toward something that you work extremely hard at — but as long as you choose to do it, mission accomplished!

          priority list in a spiral-bound notebook Make a list of the things that you want to do for yourself — things for your health, personal growth, recreation and relationships. This can be anything from studying a piece you enjoy, exploring a new exercise routine or getting a band together to play a set at a bar. I have a list of projects and priorities that I can do now, and a list that I’d like to do someday (called my “Someday/Maybe” list).

          Once you’ve determined what you want to do, schedule time for these activities and make yourself and your goals a priority. If you find that you really enjoy what you’re doing, keep it going. If you complete a project or decide that it’s not for you, then promote something from your Someday/Maybe list to a current project.

          Accept That Some Things May Slip

          The mundane but necessary daily tasks will try to get in the way of your goal of putting yourself first. Accept that you are just one person who simply cannot do everything. Sometimes you must choose what is important. Do I want to move forward on a project that means a lot to me or do I load the dishwasher? Not doing which task will make me feel worse? Can I hand wash only what I need until I can actually do all the dishes? This is not a great long-term solution, but if this happens occasionally, you’ll be fine.

          If you’re like me, you get a lot of satisfaction from a clean workspace, but as we know, there’s always more to clean and organize. I can go for hours cleaning up messes in my house. But there will always be messes to clean up, and usually leaving a mess for another day or two will not hurt.

          Apply this attitude of acceptance to other projects and goals. You won’t have time for it all, and that’s OK. Some things can slip, and you can reprioritize projects and goal.

          Don’t Let Others Shame You

          You’re putting yourself first, and you are really starting to enjoy the time you have carved out for yourself. And then other people give their opinions. Don’t be discouraged or disheartened by comments like: “I couldn’t take that time away from my family,” “I just don’t have the time” or, my mother’s signature phrase, “Must be nice.”

          They’re not bad people. Sometimes people just disagree with your choices. If a close friend or family member says something, you should certainly take them seriously, but don’t take it personally. These responses often come from people who also want to enjoy themselves and maybe break away from the grind. They just haven’t given themselves permission to put themselves first.

          For example, I planned to try out wall-climbing recently and told some friends. They said, “Must be nice.” My response? “It is. I’m going on Monday night if you want to join me.” Magically, schedules cleared up, and we all went and had a great time.

          Don’t Be Stumped!

          Here’s the bottom line: The more selfish I was, the better teacher, father, husband, friend I became, and the more I could act selflessly. On the other hand, the less I thought about myself and put my own wants and needs last, the less useful I was. I was shocked by this observation.

          Where would your “giving tree” story end? Would you let yourself become a stump? I sure wouldn’t. I would certainly share my leaves and apples and offer shade. But I’d draw the line at cutting down my branches and whittling down my trunk. They may help someone else in the short term, but I can’t get them back once they’re gone.

          By putting your own best interests, wants and needs first, you will become more balanced, content and better equipped to pursue what you want in life and handle what life happens to throw your way.

          It’s OK to Say “No”

          Saying “no” may sound easy, but it’s really very complicated. “No” is one of the shortest complete sentences, but it carries significant emotional weight for some people.

          How do you decide when to say “yes” and, more importantly, when to say “no”? First, you must set up your environment for healthy decision-making. Plan out your boundaries and decisions ahead of time, which will make decisions easier to execute and more honest in the heat of the moment. Here are a few ways I have helped myself.

          Set Parameters for a “Yes”

          closeup of man's thumbs up hand Because your time is valuable and you have so many options, any request of your time must earn a “yes” from you. Think about some requests or opportunities in the past that you have regretted saying yes to. Chances are, they provided little benefit to you or your students. Your time would have been better spent doing something else. I don’t think there’s a specific formula for a “yes” from me, but I have noticed some patterns.

          • If a request or opportunity is technically required for my job and happens on contract hours or during planned extracurricular hours, it’s a yes. (Note: these are usually not requests but rather directives packaged in a nice question-like statement.)
          • If a request or opportunity is not required by my employer, but it is something that I think is required of high-quality music programs, I will probably say yes.
          • If the request or opportunity costs me either time or money and does not offer any significant benefit to me, my family or my program, it’s a no.

          Benefits — what you get from saying yes — are another category altogether. These can be as easy as financial benefits all the way to the good feeling you get from volunteering.

          Create a Not-To-Do List

          chalkboard with the words No and Yes, with Yes crossed out I love lists. My favorite is my “not-to-do” list, which includes things, ideas or events that I have tried at least once and determined that I do not want to do them again if given the choice.

          As a gigging musician on the side, I’ve had a few gigs that were just not enjoyable. They either didn’t pay or they didn’t pay well, they took many hours, and they were a very far drive from home. I also didn’t know any of the people involved with these events, so I couldn’t use the social gathering aspect as an excuse. I dreaded when one particular gig, which I felt obligated to do, came around each year. After the last gig, I made the long drive home and told myself all the reasons to keep doing it. Eventually, I told myself, “It’s OK to not want to do it. It’s a gig – not a life sentence.”

          This was the start of my not-to-do list. My second entry was judging solo and ensemble contests, which just aren’t my thing. If you enjoy these, more power to you.

          Choices are easy to make when you can refer to this list. If you have a particular amount of anxiety about saying no, just pretend this list was written by someone else and that you have to follow these orders. It’s not a long-term solution, but it’s a start in gaining more agency.

          Non-Negotiables and Negotiables

          It’s also important to determine your negotiables and non-negotiables. The goal is the same: Eliminate any thought process or judgment regarding decisions on these matters.

          For example, my non-negotiables: I won’t miss my own children’s concerts, I won’t accept gigs or extracurricular events on a particular night of the week, etc.

          On the other hand, my negotiables: I will work on a specific night of the week if the pay is X dollars or if my favorite celebrity is showing up. I will add on a parade if I take one other engagement off the calendar.

          You can’t always choose what to say no to. However, if you have autonomy in your job, simply ask yourself, “What if I did say no?”

          Schedule Yourself

          blank page in open planner So, you’ve got your not-to-do list, your negotiables and non-negotiables, but you’re still having trouble saying “no.”

          Next, schedule your time. Dinner with friends, game nights, hobbies, etc. are important because they are something you look forward to other than work. Or maybe you just want to be alone and relax.

          Put “Thursday, 7 p.m., watch Brooklyn 99” on your calendar. If something else comes up, it’s a conflict that you cannot accommodate because you “already have something scheduled.” And when Thursday 7 p.m. comes around, you can watch your show or change your mind and do something else, it’s your right to do so.

          Don’t Invite Others to Solve Your Issues

          When you actually say “no,” don’t give away more information than is needed. People are absolute masters at solving problems to get someone to help them get what they need. (They are not bad people for doing this — they are just resourceful.)

          If you present an opening, don’t be surprised if someone takes it. Saying, “No, I can’t do this right now, but check with me in a few weeks,” is fine, but you must be prepared for that person to reach out again in a few weeks.

          Furthermore, if you present a barrier why you can’t do something, expect them to solve your problem. So, shed that thinking. You don’t have to give a reason for saying no.

          Does this conversation sound familiar?

          “Don, I know it’s last minute, but can you stay with some band kids today to do a small performance for some visitors?”
          “Thank you for the offer, but I’m unable to today.”
          Response A: “Thanks, no problem. Just thought we’d check.” (End of discussion. I then go home and watch TV/rake the yard/climb Mt. Everest/stare at the wall.)
          Response B: “It’s just for a little bit. Can you think about it? Is there anything you can do to reschedule some things?”

          This is a trap! This person is looking to get what they want or need (which is fine — again, they are not bad people). Now, they are going into problem-solving mode. If you give them the opportunity, they will solve your problem for not staying. Don’t overshare — keep yourself as your priority and maintain a sense of balance and health. Besides, do you really want to cave in and later unfairly resent this person for asking, when in reality, you could have just said no?

          So, how should you respond? You can firmly but politely repeat, “Thank you again, but I’m unable to today.” If they persist, keep repeating. My record is four repeats. But I was able to keep my after-school plans.

          If you get particularly anxious in these situations, practice with a friend — seriously. I’ve had to do this in the past. 

          Your Personal Life Should Not Be Used Against You

          My wife and I have five children ranging in age from 2 to 12. Some of our friends have fewer children, one has more and several have none. If you don’t have children, you may have suffered from these experiences at some point: “Can you stay after and help out with this? Don has to leave … he has kids.”

          You can respond in whatever way you choose. But your relationship and family status should never play a factor in how valuable your non-contractual time is. It’s not their business, and your time is your time.

          Don’t Use your Students as an Excuse

          If anyone tries to get you to do something by saying, “it’s what’s best for the kids,” don’t take it personally, but you should realize that it may be manipulation. You’re a degreed professional, who knows what’s best for your kids. This person is probably not consciously trying to manipulate you,  but avoid letting this statement cloud your judgment.

          You probably use this same reasoning on yourself and have thought, “If we don’t do this event, the kids will be upset, or they won’t get a good experience!” I’m going out on a limb and say that if you are thinking this, you obviously care, and your kids are probably getting a great experience from you. Going from four to three festivals a year will likely not send a student down a non-redeemable path.

          Feel Free to Say “No” (To Anyone Except Me)

          The most challenging “nos” are those directed to people closest to you and those in a supervisory role over you. I have had situations where supervisors have told me, “You don’t have to say yes to everything; no is a perfectly acceptable response.”

          When I later received a request from them and said “no,” they were upset. Nervously, I had to explain that if they told me something, I would take it at face value.

          two women talking as they sit around a round table Practice, Practice, Practice

          When possible, say “no” in person or over the phone; avoid emails or texts if you have concerns that your response might be taken the wrong way. It’s also good practice in assertiveness. The first few “nos” can be tricky. As recommended above, practice with a friend. Once you get five or six “nos” under your belt, your assertiveness becomes more straightforward, and you even start to realize how much more you enjoy the things you say “yes” to.

          You’re in the Driver’s Seat

          When you say “yes” to something, you’re actually saying “no” to something else. It could be saying “no” to score study, time with your kids or yourself or even boredom. The time is non-renewable.

          Interruptions and other distractions can easily take up your valuable time. See my article, “5 Time Burglars to Avoid,” for some of these distractions and how you can combat them.

          No one is going to take care of your time like you will. A “no” or a “yes” is neither good nor bad but remember that you’re in the driver’s seat and requests and opportunities must earn a “yes” from you.

          What’s the Difference Between Soprano, Alto, Tenor and Baritone Saxophones?

          If you’ve ever watched a horn section onstage, you may have noticed that the sax players are sometimes playing different-sized instruments, even ones that have different shapes. On occasion, they even swap out their saxes from song to song.

          Ever wonder why? If you guessed it’s because each type of saxophone makes a slightly different sound, you’d be right, but the differences don’t end there. In this article, we’ll take a closer look at what differentiates the four most common types of saxophones, but first let’s talk a little about the history of this fascinating and exceptionally versatile instrument.

          Origins

          Invented by Belgian musician Adolphe Sax (hence: saxophone) in 1846, the original idea was to create an instrument that would bridge the sonic gap between brass instruments and woodwinds. Indeed, the saxophone is the only woodwind made of brass, yet it uses a reed mouthpiece.

          At first, there were as many as 16 varieties of saxophone, which were primarily found in orchestras and used to play classical music. Today, there are only a few types in common use — predominantly the soprano, alto, tenor and baritone — and the instrument more often plays a role in contemporary jazz and rock, where it is typically used for soloing as well as main melody and underpinning.

          Similarities

          For starters, all saxophones, regardless of type, are conical, meaning their tubes or bodies widen from the mouthpiece to the end of the instrument. What’s more, each of their tubes blossom into a bell-like shape at the end of the horn — a part known, fittingly enough, as the bell.

          The bells of multiple saxophone types in one image.
          Saxophone bells.

          In addition, the keys on soprano, alto, tenor and baritone saxophones are all essentially the same. A baritone sax may have one extra key for a lower note, or a soprano may have one more for a higher note, but anyone familiar with one type of saxophone can play the others.

          But this is where differences begin to emerge. Whereas a piano has 88 keys, and therefore a large range of notes, a saxophone has fewer possibilities, which is why there are several options available. And since, as shown in the illustration below, each varies in size, their pitch range and breath and force requirement changes as well. As with vocalists, soprano designates the highest voice, alto the next highest, then tenor, followed by baritone.

          Graphic comparing the sizes of types of saxophones to absolute heights and to each other.

          Soprano Saxophone

          The soprano saxophone is the smallest (and lightest in weight) of the four types and therefore offers the highest pitch. For this reason, it is more sensitive and thus harder to keep in tune than the other three types. Soprano saxes are usually tuned to the key of B-flat, which is the same tuning as many other orchestral instruments, including the trumpet.

          Additionally, as fans of contemporary smooth jazz may have noticed, most soprano saxophones are, unlike their three cousins, are straight, not curved. Some modern soprano saxes (such as Yamaha YSS-82ZR models) feature curved necks, allowing the player to adopt a more traditional playing stance and embouchure (mouth position), rather than the downward-looking position the straight soprano sax requires. There are even some soprano saxophones with curved bells, which make them look like an especially small version of their bigger cousins.

          Two different silver color saxophones, one with a curved neck the other with a straight neck.
          Straight neck soprano sax (left), curved neck (right).

          Alto Saxophone

          Alto saxophones, which are nearly always tuned to the key of E-flat, are the next biggest in size and the next highest in pitch. Unlike the straight-shaped soprano, the alto saxophone is shaped like the letter “J.” Tenor and baritone saxes are also J-shaped but the neck of the alto is bent straight at an almost 90-degree angle.

          Gold color saxophone.
          Yamaha YAS-875EXII alto saxophone.

          The curve in the alto saxophone neck gives the tube more length. This not only extends the pitch range downward but also deepens the sound. For a more extreme example of this, consider a tuba, which is very big and has many twists in both its neck and body.

          Tenor Saxophone

          The tenor saxophone, which is the next largest in size and next lower in pitch, is the most commonly played type of sax in popular music. It uses a larger mouthpiece and reed than the soprano or alto and is nearly always tuned to the key of B-flat. As exemplified by the playing of legendary musician John Coltrane, the tenor sax has enjoyed long-standing popularity, from the inventive jazz of the 1940s to the bebop and honking rock’n’roll of the ’50s, all the way to the contemporary rock and R&B enjoyed by millions today.

          Gold colored tenor saxophone with silver colored keys.
          Yamaha YTS-26 tenor saxophone.

          Baritone Saxophone

          The baritone saxophone, which is tuned to the key of E-flat, is the largest and heaviest of the four. To help extend the body of the baritone sax and allow for the lowest pitch possible, the top of the neck incorporates a twist, or “curly-q” — a feature not found in any of the other saxophone types.

          Large gold colored saxophone with a small foot.
          Yamaha YBS-82 baritone saxophone.

          Because of their large size and very long neck length, baritone saxes require the most lung power and an especially “open” (that is, relaxed) embouchure to enable the low rumble of its imposing tonality. Despite this, more and more young musicians are gravitating to baritone sax, especially since modern craftsmanship has helped make beginner models such as the Yamaha YBS-480 lighter and easier to play.

           

          Yamaha offers a wide variety of soprano, alto, tenor and baritone saxophones, from beginner and intermediate models to professional-level instruments. Click here for more information.

          A promotion for Yamaha Limited Edition 62 Series saxophones.

          Pinar Toprak

          Classically trained film, television and game composer Pinar Toprak’s credits include blockbuster superhero movies like Captain Marvel and Justice League, as well as the hugely popular Fortnite from Epic Games. In this video, conducted at her Los Angeles studio, she talks about the psychology of music being at the center of her craft, striving to always improve, the excitement of hearing musicians play her compositions for the first time and the importance of not just musicianship but technology as well.

          “I’m mesmerized by the power of music,” she states, “and by emotions that are not necessarily verbally expressed. Music gets through to us more than any words you can imagine.” Yet Toprak’s compositional approach varies, depending upon the specific project. “Sometimes it’s a matter of creating different sounds and textures — it’s more [about] the vibe — and sometimes it’s a tune that I need to come up with.” One thing remains constant, though: “I start with the most difficult [element], and then build everything around it.”

          Steinberg Cubase plays a major role in the process, as Toprak explains. “It allows me to create without worrying about the tool itself. Having a template and all of the workflow already in place — it’s like being with a friend. Cubase allows me to work in the fastest and most efficient way, and [to] really focus on the music, which is what matters the most.”

          Toprak wraps things up with some sage advice for aspiring composers. “The main thing is having a curious mind, because when you have a curious mind, you’re guaranteed to evolve.” Equally important, she says, are musicianship, a mastering of technology, resilience and loving what you do. “When you’re passionate about what you do,” she explains, “people feel it and they want to create with you.” Truly words to live by!

          Check out these related articles.

          Click here to learn more about Steinberg Cubase.

          Navigating a Score

          There’s more to reading a score than just learning the notes, the rhythms and the chords. In this article, we’ll tell you what’s involved, with tips for navigating the various symbols and markers you’re likely to encounter.

          Key Signature and Time Signature

          There are two vital pieces of information that you’ll find at the beginning of every written piece of music, and they establish important rules for what will follow.

          The first is called the key signature, and it consists of a group of sharps or flats, placed right after the musical clef. (As a keyboard player, you’ll usually be following the treble clef only, but in some sheet music — for example, in all classical music scores — there will be a treble clef for the right hand and a bass clef for the left).

          The second is called the time signature, and it follows the key signature on the staff. Here is the beginning of a piece for piano, with these elements labeled for you:

          Musical annotation.

          Let’s look at these in greater detail.

          Key Signature

          Most music tends to be based on a certain scale (or key center), and that means it will be made up of combinations of white and black keys. The key signature at the beginning of printed music tells you which black-key notes (i.e., sharps and flats) will be used often throughout the piece. (This saves the printed music from having to show a lot of sharp or flat signs in every measure.) So when you first look at a new piece of music, you need to — pardon the pun — take note of this.

          Here are some common key signatures:

          Musical annotation.

          Time Signature

          The time signature describes the general rhythm and feel of a piece of music by telling us how to count the bars and what the basic unit of counting is. The top number indicates how many beats are in each measure, and the bottom number indicates the rhythmic unit that gets each beat.

          Here are some common time signatures:

          Musical annotation.

          Signs and Symbols

          The most common navigational symbol is a pair of brackets with a pair of dots inside them. Together, these are called a repeat sign. The first bracket is the Start Repeat, and the second one is the End Repeat:

          Musical annotation.

          These tell you to play the bracketed section twice (unless otherwise marked). So for the example above, you would play bars 1-2-3-4-1-2-3-4 and then move on to the rest of the score.

          Bear in mind that repeat signs don’t always have to occur at the beginning of a line of music. For example, you might see this:

          Musical annotation.

          Here, you would play bars 1-2-3-4-3-4 and then continue on.

          When you need to repeat a bracketed section more than twice, the score will have an instruction telling you how many times to repeat, like this:

          Musical annotation.

          This would be played as 1-2-3-4-3-4-3-4 and then onward.

          Another common occurrence is when a section is meant to repeat, but with some small differences in the end of each phrase. Those situations utilize what are called numbered endings, i.e., 1st ending, 2nd ending and so forth. For instance:

          Musical annotation.

          Here, you would play up to the first ending’s End Repeat sign and then go back to the Start Repeat sign. At that point, you’d play through, but this time go to the second ending and onward, so for this example, it would be played as 1-2-3-4-1-2-3-5-6-7-8 and onward.

          There are some other signs that tell you where to go back to after encountering an End Repeat sign. For example, the symbol D.C. (Da Capo) at the end of a section is an instruction to go back to the very top of the score. So when you see it, you don’t need to look for a Start Repeat sign; you just jump back to the beginning.

          Musical annotation.

          The “roadmap” for this piece of music would be 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-5-6-7-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-16-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-5-6-7-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-16 and onward. Whew!

          You don’t always have to go back to the top, or to a Start Repeat sign, either. The D.S. (Dal Segno) sign is used to indicate a specific bar to go back to. It looks like this:

          Musical annotation.

          Here it is in use:

          Musical annotation.

          Here, you would play through both endings as usual, and then continue to the bar that has the D.S. instruction in it. From there, you’d jump back to wherever the D.S. sign is and then continue playing onward. The roadmap for this example would be: 1-2-3-4-1-2-3-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-7-8-9-10-11-12 and so on.

          There are also ways to indicate how far to play after going back to the D.S. sign. A common one used in classical music is D.S. al Fine, which means, “go back to the D.S. sign and play until you come to a bar that is marked Fine.” Note that this doesn’t have to be at the end of the piece. If it comes earlier, you don’t do anything special when you first pass through that bar — just keep going. You only observe the Fine after having gone back using a D.C. al Fine or D.S. al Fine sign.

          Here’s an example of how it works:

          Musical annotation.

          This would be played 1-2-3-4-1-2-3-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-16-7-8-9-10-11-12-13 and done.

          A common method of navigational instruction after using a D.C. or D.S. sign is to use what is called a Coda sign.

          Musical annotation.

          This is an instruction to jump to a new section of music that is usually (but not always) an extended section leading up until the end of the piece. If you encounter a D.S. al Coda sign at the end of a bar, you need to jump back to the D.S. sign and play until you encounter a bar that contains a Coda sign, or the words To Coda/Al Coda. Then you jump to whatever later bar has the Coda sign at the beginning of the measure. Here’s an example:

          Musical annotation.

          The roadmap here would be 1-2-3-4-1-2-3-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-7-8-9-10-13-14-15-16.

          Repeat signs and symbols serve a very useful purpose; without them, most pieces of sheet music would be quite long … and it’s difficult to keep turning pages while you are playing!

          Look for Changes

          Checking a piece of music ahead of time for key signatures, time signatures and repeat signs allows you to pre-plan your journey before you attempt to actually play the music. However, they don’t always remain the same from start to finish, so you should always look through the score carefully to see if any of them change during the course of the piece. If such a change occurs within a staff, it will be notated at the start of the first bar of the change; if it’s going to happen on the next line or stave, there will usually be a cautionary indication to warn you that it is about to happen.

          As an example, here’s a piece of music that goes through a lot of time changes:

          Musical annotation.

          The time change to 2/4 in bar 7 comes in the middle of the line, so it’s indicated immediately, but for the change to 6/8 that occurs in bar 13, there is a cautionary indication at the end of bar 12 to help warn you ahead of time — same thing for the return to 4/4 that happens in bar 21.

          Changes in key signatures are usually referred to as a modulation, and the same cautionary indications are used if they occur on the next line or stave. For example:

          Musical annotation.

          This piece starts in the key of C (no sharps or flats) and then modulates to the key of A (three sharps) at bar 7. The next key change, to the key of B-flat (two flats) occurs at bar 13, but since it is at the start of a stave, a cautionary warning appears at the end of bar 12. Bar 16 returns to the key of C, and to indicate no sharps or flats, natural signs are used to say, “stop using the B-flat and E-flat you were using previously.”

          Many professional musicians circle (or use a highlighter to annotate) these important instructions to draw attention to them before ever playing through the piece. You’d never take a trip without knowing where you’re going. The same is true for playing sheet music and written scores. Be prepared!

           

          Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

          Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

          What are MIDI Songs?

          Perhaps you’ve heard the term “MIDI songs” before, but maybe you’re not quite sure what they actually are — in fact, you may not even know what “MIDI” is. Fear not! Here are the answers to the most commonly asked questions about MIDI songs and explain why they’re such a great addition to your digital keyboard or digital piano.

          What Is MIDI?

          The word “MIDI” is an acronym for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface” — a standard developed back in the 1980s that allowed different digital music devices, such as keyboards, sequencers and drum machines (and, later, computers) to communicate with one another, regardless of manufacturer. In effect, MIDI is a kind of language, with clearly enumerated performance commands (such as “play middle C and hold it for four beats, then let go of it and play a D six beats later”) that all MIDI-compatible instruments understand.

          Yamaha has prepared a short, easy-to-understand document called “MIDI Basics” that goes into greater detail. Click here to download it.

          What are MIDI Songs?

          Simply put, MIDI songs are just collections of data that tell your keyboard what to play. They come in the form of digital files (usually with the suffix .MID) that you can upload to your instrument, either directly from your computer via USB, or by transferring them first to a flash drive, then plugging the drive into the instrument’s USB port. As we’ll see shortly, MIDI song files are very small in size, so it takes mere seconds to load them; once in your instrument, you can play them instantaneously at the push of a button.

          What are the Advantages of MIDI Songs Over Audio Files?

          At this point you may be thinking, “Wait a minute … why should I bother with MIDI songs when I can simply download an audio file of the song I want to hear?” After all, there are literally millions of songs available on iTunes® and other streaming sources, as well as special “minus-one” audio files that leave one instrument out so you can play along.

          But MIDI songs offer several major advantages over audio files, as follows:

          1. You can freely change their key. This is not possible with audio files unless you’re willing to put up with the (often significant) degraded sound quality that results. Change the key of MIDI songs and the sound quality is completely unaffected — they sound exactly the same, only transposed.

          2. You can freely change their tempo. Similarly, if you do this to audio files, the sound quality is degraded. Speed up an audio file more than a little bit, and everything starts sounding cartoonish (think Alvin and the Chipmunks); slow it down too much, and it sounds muddy and swampy. In contrast, MIDI songs can be slowed down or sped up by any amount without affecting the sound quality at all.

          3. You can freely change their instrumentation. This isn’t possible with audio files, period.

          4. You can turn tracks on and off, creating your own custom “minus-one” versions. This is only possible if an audio file is in a multi-track format, which is rare. If the audio file is stereo — which is almost always the case — it’s impossible to do. Being able to freely mute or solo instrument tracks makes it easy to hear and learn each individual component, and is a terrific live performance feature, too, since it allows you to do “break-downs” with the push of a button.

          5. They’re much, much smaller than audio files. A one-minute MIDI file is about 10 KB (kilobytes, or thousands of bytes) in size. In contrast, an MP3 file of the same duration will be about 1 MB in size (a megabyte is a million bytes), while a better quality uncompressed audio file (such as a WAV) will be over 10 MB. The smaller the file, the less memory space is required and the faster the loading time — plus, you can typically load many MIDI files into even those instruments that have limited memory capacity.

          6. They work with pretty much every modern digital keyboard. This includes all current Yamaha digital keyboards, digital pianos, arranger workstations and synthesizers, as well as keyboards introduced by most other manufacturers since the early 1990s — vintage instruments as well as newer ones.

          What are the Different Types of MIDI Songs?

          The innovation that enabled the creation of standardized MIDI songs was something called “General MIDI” (GM for short), a protocol that was universally adopted by all major digital keyboard manufacturers in 1991.

          GM specifies that particular sounds be stored in particular memory areas — for example, Voice 1 must always be the sound of an acoustic grand piano; Voice 25, the sound of a nylon-string guitar. What’s more, these voices are arranged into 16 specified “families” of eight instruments each; the Reed family, as an example, must include four kinds of saxophones, an oboe, an English horn, a bassoon and a clarinet. Thanks to this meticulous degree of organization, no matter what GM-enabled digital keyboard you use, you always hear the same type of sound when you select a particular Voice (though the audio quality may differ somewhat from instrument to instrument). In addition, GM also specifies which drum sounds are assigned to which keys, so that the drum track of a MIDI song always plays the correct drums and cymbals, regardless of the digital keyboard being used.

          In 1999, GM Level 2, which includes more sounds and features (such as the addition of standardized reverb and chorus effects), was adopted. Yamaha expanded upon this further with the introduction of the XG (EXtended General MIDI) standard. Most Yamaha downloadable MIDI songs incorporate multiple file formats (in many cases including both GM and XG versions) zipped into one file. Other “premium” versions, optimized for various Yamaha keyboards, are often included as well. (See below.) To learn which versions are recommended for your model, click here.

          What are Premium MIDI Songs?

          Premium MIDI songs (such as “XA,” “XT” or “G” files) offer additional features optimized to work with the score display functionality of specific Yamaha digital keyboards, as well as learning features such as stream lights and song waiting. They provide chord notation and lyrics, making it easy for you to play along on other instruments such as guitar and/or to sing along karaoke-style; if your instrument has vocal harmony features, you can even plug in a microphone and turn your voice into a choir! You can also make custom mixes of Premium MIDI songs on compatible Yamaha keyboards. An explanation of the different kinds of MIDI songs offered by Yamaha can be found here.

           

          Yamaha offers hundreds of MIDI songs available for immediate downloading. Click here to view the available titles.

          The Science of Awe (and Why it Matters)

          Ah, rebranding. There’s a powerful emotion that used to be called “the sublime.” That idea first burbled up with the Greek philosophers, and then resurfaced later with the 18th-century art movement called Romanticism.

          These artists were trying to put a finger on how some experiences — like a stirring musical composition, an inspiring painting or a violent thunderstorm — can produce the very strongest emotion humans are capable of.

          As French author Nicolas Boileau-Despréaux (1636-1711) wrote, “The sublime is not strictly speaking something which is proven or demonstrated, but a marvel, which seizes one, strikes one, and makes one feel.” In the 21st century, there’s a new phrase for this emotion, and psychologists call it “awe.”

          What Exactly Is Awe?

          Milky Way arch in the sky

          To put it simply, awe is the sensation of seeing yourself as a small part of something bigger. In the magazine Philosophy Now, Robert Clewis, a professor at Gwynedd Mercy University in Pennsylvania, described it as “a complex, mixed feeling of intense satisfaction sensed before a striking or inspiring object, event or act.” This could include positive feelings of seeing a natural wonder, like you may have felt if you have ever stood at the edge of the Grand Canyon or by a waterfall in Hawaii. Or maybe you were camping and looked up and saw the bright Milky Way glowing in the night sky. We can even feel awe around human-built creations, such as a vast cathedral or the Great Pyramids.

          Interestingly, awe is a mixed experience, both soul-satisfying and yet also a bit … discomforting. It’s a bit humbling. But overall, people like the feeling of awe and want that experience to continue, Clewis writes.

          Awe + Creativity

          So, what does awe have to with being a music educator? Awe, it turns out, is strongly linked with creativity and music.

          People who are more creative tend to experience awe more frequently — even finding it daily — according to a 2021 study by J.W. Zhang and team and published on the American Psychological Association PsycNet site. This study also noted that people who scored highly in the trait of awe performed better on a cognitive performance task (called Duncker’s candle problem, this test looks at how people deal with a challenge). Lastly, the study reports that when people were having a more awe-inducing day than normal, they reported being more creative that same day.

          It may be that creative personalities are able to home in on awe-inspiring things with more ease, or in new ways — or, it may be that being open to awe helps inspire creativity.

          The Benefits of Awe

          woman with eyes closed, listening to music through earbudsOver the past 20 years, researchers have been increasingly interested in awe, as they have found that it helps people feel more satisfied, more connected, more generous and less anxious.

          Awe has been a particularly useful emotion to tap into during the overwhelming and uncertain times of the pandemic. Awe is an antidote to isolation, according to Piercarlo Valdesolo at Claremont McKenna College in California. His research, as discussed in this interview with NPR, finds that awe can make our problems seem to fade away because it diminishes the focus on self, drawing attention to that which is bigger than ourselves. “You become more concerned about the collective,” he says. “You become more generous. You help … more cooperative. You kind of get out of your own head, to put it simply.”

          Feeling Awesome

          Good news: Many of the things we’re told to do to inspire a sense of awe are already a part of your life as a music educator. These include spending time with children, who naturally encounter the world with a sense of wonder, and listening to music, which creates a deep language of emotion in the brain.

          You can also foster a sense of awe by focusing closely on everyday experiences, like taking a long hot shower, snuggling a pet or enjoying a cup of coffee. Time in nature — observing the miraculous things like changing seasons, rainfall, growing plants and subtle shifts of light — creates awe, too.

          How to Cultivate Awe in the Classroom

          artwork of female's face, neck and shoulders painted in bright colors with musical notes coming out of her ears In the classroom, ask students to find a piece of music that makes them feel the sensation of awe — or come up with a list together as a class. (Here are some examples of lists: 10 Awe-Inspiring Tracks for Your Adventure Travel and 8 Pieces of Classical Music Inspired by the Sea.)

          What music makes students feel awe? “Solsbury Hill” by Peter Gabriel? Bon Iver? Gregorian chants? Calls to prayer recorded in Istanbul? John Williams’ theme from “Jurassic Park”? Australian duo Dead Can Dance? Te Vaka? Experiment with playing music from various eras, different artists and the use of different instruments, to see what resonates. What shakes the soul?

          For me, it’s Russian composers like Pyotr Tchaikovsky and Modest Mussorgsky. I love pieces like “Night on Bald Mountain” and “Baba Yaga, The Hut on Hen’s Legs,” from Pictures at an Exhibition and even the zesty parts of “The Nutcracker.” But also, Nine Inch Nails, and Holly Holy by Neil Diamond, who says of that song, “To me it has magic. But you can’t listen to it, you just have to feel it.”

          That’s the wonderful thing about awe — it’s such a deeply powerful human emotion, but it’s also so personal. It’s not the lyrics, but the feeling. It’s between us and the universe.

          So, what moves you? What makes you feel awe?